Owner's Manual
2017 Chevrolet Silverado Owner's Manual, 2017 Chevy Silverado Owner's Manual, 2017 Chevrolet SIlverado Owner's Manual, Chevy Silverado Owner's Manual, Chevrolet Silverado Owner's Manual, Silverado Owner's Manual
2017, Chevrolet, Silverado, Owner's, Manual, 2017, Chevy, Silverado, Owner's, Manual, 2017, Chevrolet, SIlverado, Owner's, Manual, Chevy, Silverado, Owner's, Manual, Chevrolet, Silverado, Owner's, Manual, Silverado, Owner's, Manual
Chevrolet
2017-silverado3500hd Silverado Owner's Manual
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . 33 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Instruments and Controls . . . . . . 119 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 181 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 246 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 451 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 472 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 483 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
2 Introduction
Introduction
The names, logos, emblems, slogans, vehicle model names, and vehicle body designs appearing in this manual including, but not limited to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, SILVERADO, and Z71 are trademarks and/or service marks of General Motors LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name "General Motors of Canada Company" for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual.
This manual describes features that may or may not be on the vehicle because of optional equipment that was not purchased on the vehicle, model variants, country specifications, features/applications that may not be available in your region, or changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual.
If the vehicle has the Duramax® diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for additional and specific information on this engine.
If the vehicle has the bi-fuel engine, see the Silverado/Sierra Bi-Fuel supplement for additional and specific information on this engine.
For an eAssist vehicle, see the Silverado/Sierra eAssist supplement.
Refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm the features.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Canadian Vehicle Owners
A French language manual can be obtained from your dealer, at www.helminc.com, or from:
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, MI 48170 USA
Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 23476161 A First Printing
©2016 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found.
Danger, Warning, and Caution
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them.
{ Danger
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death.
{ Warning
Warning indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death.
Caution Caution indicates a hazard that could result in property or vehicle damage.
A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means "Do Not," "Do not do this," or "Do not let this happen."
Introduction 3
Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gauge, or indicator.
M : Shown when the owner
manual has additional instructions or information.
* : Shown when the service
manual has additional instructions or information.
0 : Shown when there is more
information on another page -- "see page."
4 Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. For more information on the symbol, refer to the Index.
0 : Adjustable Pedals
9 : Airbag Readiness Light ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar® (if equipped)
$ : Brake System Warning Light " : Charging System I : Cruise Control ` : Do Not Puncture ^ : Do Not Service B : Engine Coolant Temperature O : Exterior Lamps _ : Flame/Fire Prohibited # : Fog Lamps . : Fuel Gauge + : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
( : Heated Steering Wheel
j : LATCH System Child Restraints * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : : Oil Pressure
g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
O : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start > : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor _ : Tow/Haul Mode d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak® a : Under Pressure
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
In Brief
Instrument Panel Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Initial Drive Information Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . 8 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Heated and Ventilated Seats . . . 13 Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 14 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Passenger Sensing System . . . 14 Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 16 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 18 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Vehicle Features Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . 24 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 25 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Forward Automatic Braking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . 27 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 27 Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Universal Remote System . . . . . 28 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
In Brief 5
Performance and Maintenance Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 30 Fuel (Except L86 6.2L Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Fuel (L86 6.2L Engine) . . . . . . . . 30 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . 31 Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Base Shown, Uplevel Similar
1. Instrument Panel Illumination Control 0 177.
2. Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) System (If Equipped). See Towing Equipment 0 335.
3. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 171.
Fog Lamps 0 176 (If Equipped).
4. Air Vents 0 243.
5. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals 0 175.
Windshield Wiper/ Washer 0 122.
6. Favorite Switches (Out of View). See Steering Wheel Controls 0 121.
Volume Switches (Out of View). See Steering Wheel Controls 0 121.
7. Instrument Cluster 0 128.
8. Hazard Warning Flashers 0 175.
9. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission 0 277.
Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282.
Range Selection Mode (If Equipped). See Manual Mode 0 280.
10. Light Sensor. See Automatic Headlamp System 0 174.
11. Infotainment 0 181.
12. Passenger Airbag On-Off Switch (If Equipped) (Out of View). See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 80.
13. Heated and Ventilated Seats 0 13 (If Equipped).
14. Power Outlet 110/120 Volt Alternating Current (If Equipped). See Power Outlets 0 124.
15. Power Outlets 0 124 (If Equipped).
16. g Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control 0 295.
In Brief 7
0 Pedal Adjust Switch (If
Equipped). See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 0 267.
{ Cargo Lamp 0 177.
X Parking Assist Button (If
Equipped). See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 302.
A Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
(1500 Series) 0 309 (If Equipped).
@ Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) (2500/3500 Series) 0 307 (If Equipped).
5 Hill Descent Control Switch
(If Equipped). See Hill Descent Control (HDC) 0 297.
q Exhaust Brake (If
Equipped). See "Exhaust Brake" in the Duramax diesel supplement.
g Power Take Off (PTO)
Switch (If Equipped). See the Duramax diesel supplement.
8 In Brief
Auxiliary Button (If Equipped). See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 345.
17. Instrument Panel Storage 0 115 (If Equipped).
18. Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only) 0 237 or Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning) 0 238 (If Equipped).
Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 240 (If Equipped).
19. Parking Brake Release (Manual Transmission Only, If Equipped). See Parking Brake 0 293
20. Steering Wheel Controls 0 121 (If Equipped).
Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls (If Equipped). See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147.
21. Hood Release. See Hood 0 353.
22. Horn 0 122.
23. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 120 (Out of View).
24. Cruise Control 0 298.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 304 (If Equipped).
25. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out of View). See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) 0 138.
26. Parking Brake 0 293.
27. Electronic Transfer Case Control (If Equipped). See Four-Wheel Drive 0 284.
Card Holder (If Equipped). See Instrument Panel Storage 0 115.
Initial Drive Information
This section provides a brief overview about some of the important features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions may work from up to 60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.
K : Press to unlock the driver door. Press K again within three seconds
to unlock all remaining doors and the tailgate.
: Press to lock all doors and the
Q
tailgate. Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized. See Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
7 : Press and release one time to initiate vehicle locator. Press 7 and
hold for at least three seconds to
sound the panic alarm. Press 7
again to cancel the panic alarm.
See Keys 0 33 and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 36.
Remote Vehicle Start
If equipped, the engine can be started from outside of the vehicle.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Press and release on the
Q
RKE transmitter.
2. Immediately press and hold /
for at least four seconds or until the turn signal lamps flash.
Start the vehicle normally after entering.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on.
Remote start can be extended.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start, do one of the following:
. Press and hold / until the
parking lamps turn off.
In Brief 9
. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
. Turn the vehicle on and then off. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 38.
Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
From outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the key in the driver door.
From inside, use the power door locks or push down or pull up on the manual door locks.
From inside, pull the door handle once to unlock the door. Pull again to open the door.
10 In Brief Power Door Locks
Windows
Power Windows
Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim Shown, Other Models Similar
Base Trim
If equipped with power door locks:
: Press to lock the doors.
Q K : Press to unlock the doors.
See Door Locks 0 39 and Power Door Locks 0 40.
Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim Shown, Other Models Similar
If equipped, the driver door has a switch to control all windows. Each passenger door has a switch to control that window. The power windows work when the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271.
Press the switch to lower the window. Pull the switch up to raise it. See Windows 0 51 and Power Windows 0 51.
Power Sliding Rear Window
The power sliding rear window cannot be operated manually. See "Power Sliding Rear Window" in Rear Windows 0 53.
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
In Brief 11
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure it is locked in place.
See Seat Adjustment 0 58. Power Seats
If equipped, the power sliding rear window works when the ignition has been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271.
Press the switch to open the window. Pull the switch up to close it. See Windows 0 51 and Power Windows 0 51.
To adjust a manual seat:
1. Pull the handle at the front of the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the handle.
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward.
. If equipped, raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down.
12 In Brief
. If equipped, raise or lower the seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.
See Power Seat Adjustment 0 59. Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Lumbar
Power Lumbar
See Lumbar Adjustment 0 59. Reclining Seatbacks Manual Reclining Seatbacks
If equipped, move the lever up or down repeatedly to increase or decrease lumbar support.
See Lumbar Adjustment 0 59.
To adjust the power lumbar support, if equipped:
. Press and hold the control forward to increase or rearward to decrease upper and lower lumbar support at the same time.
. If equipped, press and hold the control up to increase upper lumbar support and decrease lower lumbar support.
Press and hold the control down to increase lower lumbar support and decrease upper lumbar support.
To adjust a manual seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
The seatback will automatically fold forward.
2. To recline, move the seatback rearward to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback will return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks 0 60.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
. Tilt the top of the control forward to raise.
See Reclining Seatbacks 0 60.
Memory Features
In Brief 13
Automatic Memory Recall and/or Easy Exit Recall features may be enabled in the Personalization Menus. See Memory Seats 0 61 and Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Heated and Ventilated Seats
To recline a power seatback, if equipped:
. Tilt the top of the control rearward to recline.
Crew/Double Cab Shown, Other Models Similar
If equipped, the SET, 1, 2, and B
(Exit) buttons on the driver door are used to manually store and recall memory settings for the driver seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable pedals (if equipped).
Heated and Ventilated Seat Buttons Shown, Heated Seat
Buttons Similar
If equipped, the buttons are on the center stack. To operate, the engine must be running.
14 In Brief
Press I to heat the driver or
passenger seatback only.
Press J to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and seatback.
PressC to ventilate the driver or
passenger seat.
See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 63.
Head Restraint Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating position, change the seatback recline angle as little as necessary while keeping the seat and the head restraint height in the proper position.
See Head Restraints 0 57 and Seat Adjustment 0 58.
Safety Belts
Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use safety belts properly: . Safety Belts 0 66. . How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly 0 67. . Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 68. . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) 0 96.
Passenger Sensing System
The passenger sensing system, if equipped, turns off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. No other airbag is affected by the passenger sensing system.
If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position unless there is an airbag off switch on the instrument panel endcap.
If there is an airbag off switch, the vehicle does not have a passenger sensing system. See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 80 for more information.
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead console when the vehicle is started.
United States
Exterior Mirrors
Manual Mirrors
If equipped, adjust manual mirrors by moving them up and down or left to right to see a little of the side of the vehicle and to have a clear view behind the vehicle.
See Manual Mirrors 0 46.
Power Mirrors
In Brief 15
2. Press the arrows on the control pad to move the mirror up, down, right, or left.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
4. Keep the selector switch in the center position when not adjusting either outside mirror.
Canada and Mexico
See Passenger Sensing System 0 82 for important information.
Mirror Adjustment
Using hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on convex mirror attachments could decrease mirror performance.
Base Power Mirrors
If equipped with power mirrors: 1. Press (1) or (2) to select the driver or passenger side mirror.
Uplevel with Power Folding Mirrors
1. Press (1) or (3) to select the driver or passenger side mirror.
16 In Brief
2. Press the arrows on the control pad while the indicator light on the (1) or (3) button is illuminated, to move the mirror up, down, right, or left.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
4. Press either (1) or (3) again to deselect the mirror.
See Power Mirrors 0 47.
If equipped with power folding mirrors:
1. Press (2) to fold the mirrors out to the driving position.
2. Press (2) again to fold the mirrors in to the folded position.
For manual, power, and auto folding mirrors, see Folding Mirrors 0 48.
The mirrors may also include a memory function that works with the memory seats. See Memory Seats 0 61.
Interior Mirror
Adjustment
Adjust the mirror for a clear view of the area behind the vehicle.
Manual Dimming Rearview Mirror
If equipped, push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use to avoid glare from the headlamps from behind. See Manual Rearview Mirror 0 51.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
If equipped, the mirror will automatically reduce the glare of the headlamps from behind. The dimming feature comes on when the vehicle is started.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror 0 51.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
To adjust the steering wheel: 1. Hold the steering wheel and
pull the lever. 2. Move the steering wheel up
or down. 3. Release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Tilt and Telescoping Steering Wheel
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamps
In Brief 17
Reading Lamps
To adjust the tilt and telescoping steering wheel, if equipped:
1. Push the lever (1) down to move the steering wheel forward or rearward. Lift the lever up to lock the wheel in place.
2. Pull the lever (2) toward you to move the steering wheel up or down, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
There are dome lamps in the overhead console and the headliner, if equipped.
To change the dome lamp settings, press the following:
OFF : Turns the lamps off, even when a door is open.
DOOR : The lamps come on automatically when a door is opened.
ON : Turns all dome lamps on.
There are reading lamps in the overhead console and the headliner, if equipped. To operate, the ignition must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position or using Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
18 In Brief Press m or n next to each reading
lamp to turn it on or off. For more information about interior lighting, see Instrument Panel Illumination Control 0 177.
Exterior Lighting
The exterior lamp control is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
O : Turns off the automatic
headlamps and Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp control to the off position again to turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, off will only work when the vehicle is in P (Park).
AUTO : Automatically turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, roof marker lamps (if equipped), front/rear sidemarker lamps, and license plate lamps.
; : Turns on the parking lamps
including all lamps, except the headlamps.
5 : Turns on the headlamps
together with the parking lamps and instrument panel lights.
See:
. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 171.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 0 174.
. Fog Lamps 0 176.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper control is on the turn signal lever. The windshield wipers are controlled
by turning the band with z on it. 1 : Fast wipes. w : Slow wipes. 3 INT : Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. OFF : Turns the windshield wipers off.
8 : For a single wipe, turn to 8,
then release. For several wipes,
hold the band on 8 longer.
L : Push the paddle at the top of m
the lever to spray washer fluid on the windshield.
See Windshield Wiper/ Washer 0 122.
Climate Controls
These systems control the heating, cooling, and ventilation.
For an eAssist vehicle, see the Silverado/Sierra eAssist supplement.
Climate Control System (with Heater Only)
In Brief 19
1. Fan Control 2. Air Recirculation 3. Air Delivery Mode Control
4. Defrost 5. TEMP (Temperature Control)
20 In Brief Climate Control System (with Air Conditioning)
1. Fan Control 2. A/C (Air Conditioning) 3. Air Delivery Mode Control 4. Defrost 5. TEMP (Temperature Control)
6. K (Rear Window Defogger, If
Equipped)
f (Outside Heated Mirror, If
Equipped)
8 (Outside Air, If Equipped)
7. Air Recirculation
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
In Brief 21
Transmission
Range Selection Mode
1. Driver Temperature Control 2. A/C (Air Conditioning) 3. Air Delivery Mode Controls 4. Fan Control 5. Defrost 6. Passenger Temperature
Control 7. SYNC (Synchronized
Temperature) 8. Rear Window Defogger
9. Power Button
10. Air Recirculation
11. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
See Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only) 0 237 or Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning) 0 238 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 240 (If Equipped).
The Range Selection Mode buttons, if equipped, are on the automatic transmission shift lever.
To enable:
1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode). The current range will display next to the M. This is the highest attainable range with all lower gears accessible. As an example, when 5 (Fifth) gear is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are available.
2. Press the plus/minus buttons to select the desired range of gears for current driving conditions. See Manual Mode 0 280.
22 In Brief
While using Range Selection Mode, cruise control and the Tow/Haul Mode can be used.
Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282.
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, the engine's driving power can be sent to all four wheels for extra traction.
Transfer Case Controls
The vehicle will have one of these three styles of transfer case controls. Use these controls to shift into and out of the different four-wheel drive modes.
Manual Transfer Case
This transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right of the driver.
Electronic Transfer Case
This transfer case knob is to the left of the steering column.
Automatic Transfer Case
This transfer case knob is to the left of the steering column. The different drive options that may be available are described following. 2 (Two-Wheel Drive High) : This
m
setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations. AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive) : This setting is ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are variable.
Do not use AUTO mode to park on a steep grade with poor traction such as ice, snow, mud or gravel. In AUTO mode only the rear wheels will hold the vehicle from sliding when parked. If parking on a steep
grade, use 4 to keep all four
m
wheels engaged.
4 (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Use
m
this setting when extra traction is needed, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations.
N (Neutral) : Shift to this setting only when towing the vehicle. See Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 437 or Trailer Towing 0 318.
4 (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : This
n
setting sends maximum power to all
four wheels. Choose 4 when
n
driving in deep sand, mud, or snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills.
See Four-Wheel Drive 0 284.
In Brief 23
Vehicle Features
Infotainment System
The base radio and base radio with touchscreen information is included in this manual. See the infotainment manual for information on the uplevel radios, audio players, phone, navigation system, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE), and voice or speech recognition, if equipped.
Radio(s)
Base Radio
O : Press to turn the system on.
Press and hold to turn it off. When on, press to mute; press again to unmute. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
RADIO : Press to choose between FM, AM, and SiriusXM®, if equipped.
MEDIA : Press to change the audio source between CD, USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® Audio, if equipped.
{ : Press to go to the Home Page.
24 In Brief
MENU : Press to select a menu.
g : Press to seek the previous
station or track.
l : Press to seek the next station
or track.
See "Base Radio" in Overview (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 183 or Overview (Base Radio) 0 184.
Base Radio with Touchscreen
O : Press to turn the system on.
Press and hold to turn it off. When on, press to mute; press again to unmute. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
{ : Press to go to the Home Page. 7 : Press to seek the previous
station or track.
6 : Press to seek the next station
or track.
See "Base Radio with Touchscreen" in Overview (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 183 or Overview (Base Radio) 0 184.
Setting the Clock
See Clock 0 123.
Satellite Radio
Vehicles with a SiriusXM® satellite radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM satellite radio subscription can receive SiriusXM programming.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast to coast, and in digital-quality sound. A fee is required to receive the SiriusXM service.
For more information refer to:
. www.siriusxm.com or call 1-888-601-6296 (U.S.).
. www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
See Satellite Radio (Base Radio) 0 193 or Satellite Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 193.
Portable Audio Devices
This vehicle may have a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack and USB ports in the center console or armrest. There may be a USB port in the upper glove box. External devices such as iPods®, laptop computers, MP3 players, and USB storage devices may be connected, depending on the audio system.
See USB Port (Base Radio) 0 199 or USB Port (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 201 and Auxiliary Jack 0 207.
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® system allows users with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle audio system and controls.
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must be paired with the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used in the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions.
See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition Base Radio) 0 221 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio) 0 217 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 216 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 226.
Steering Wheel Controls
If equipped, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.
: If equipped with OnStar® or a
gBluetooth® system, press to interact
with those systems. See OnStar Overview 0 486, Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base Radio) 0 221 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls Base Radio) 0 217 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 216 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 226, or "Bluetooth (Overview)" in the infotainment manual.
: Press to reject an incoming
i
call or end a current call. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system when not on a call.
or : Press to go to the
op
previous or next menu option.
or : Press to go to the next or
wx
previous selection.
V : Press to select a highlighted
menu option.
In Brief 25
The favorite and volume switches are on the back of the steering wheel. 1. Favorite: When on a radio
source, press to select the next or previous favorite. When on a media source, press to select the next or previous track. 2. Volume: Press to increase or decrease the volume. See Steering Wheel Controls 0 121.
26 In Brief Cruise Control
5 : Press to turn the system on or
off. The indicator light is white when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off. +RES : If there is a set speed in memory, press briefly to resume to that speed or press and hold to accelerate. If cruise control is already active, use to increase vehicle speed.
SET : Press briefly to set the speed and activate cruise control. If cruise control is already active, use to decrease vehicle speed.
* : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set speed from memory.
See Cruise Control 0 298.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC display is in the instrument cluster. It shows the status of many vehicle systems.
If the vehicle has the base level instrument cluster, the trip odometer reset stem is used to operate the DIC.
If the vehicle has the uplevel instrument cluster, the right steering wheel controls are used to operate the DIC.
or : Press to move up or
wx
down in a list.
or : Press to move between
op
the interactive display zones in the cluster.
V : Press to open a menu or select
a menu item. Press and hold to reset values on certain screens.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System
If equipped, FCA may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. FCA provides a
green indicator, V, when a vehicle
is detected ahead. This indicator displays amber if you follow a vehicle much too closely. When approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly, FCA provides a flashing red alert on the windshield and rapidly beeps or pulses the driver seat.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 304.
Forward Automatic Braking (FAB)
If the vehicle has Forward Collision Alert (FCA), it also has FAB, which includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA). When the system detects a vehicle ahead in your path that is traveling in the same direction that you may be about to crash into, it can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the
vehicle. This can help avoid or lessen the severity of crashes when driving in a forward gear.
See Forward Automatic Braking (FAB) 0 306.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
If equipped, LDW may help avoid unintentional lane departures at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or greater. LDW uses a camera sensor to detect the lane markings. The
LDW light, @, is green if a lane
marking is detected. If the vehicle departs the lane, the light will change to amber and flash. In addition, beeps will sound or the driver seat will pulse.
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (2500/3500 Series) 0 307.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
If equipped, LKA may help avoid crashes due to unintentional lane departures. It may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane
In Brief 27
marking without using a turn signal in that direction. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert as the lane marking is crossed. The system will not assist or alert if it detects that you are actively steering. Override LKA by turning the steering wheel. LKA uses a camera to detect lane markings between 60 km/h (37 mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph).
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (2500/3500 Series) 0 307 and Lane Keep Assist (LKA) (1500 Series) 0 309.
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
If equipped, RVC displays a view of the area behind the vehicle on the infotainment display when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) to aid with parking and low-speed backing maneuvers.
See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 302.
28 In Brief
Parking Assist
If equipped, Rear Parking Assist (RPA) uses sensors on the rear bumper to assist with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). It operates at speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph). RPA may display a warning triangle on the Rear Vision Camera screen and a graphic on the instrument cluster to provide the object distance. In addition, multiple beeps or seat pulses may occur if very close to an object.
The vehicle may also have the Front Parking Assist system.
See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 302.
Power Outlets
Accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cell phone, MP3 player, etc.
The vehicle may have up to four accessory power outlets.
Vehicles with a Center Console
. One or two in front of the cupholders on the center console.
. One inside the center console.
. One on the rear of the center console.
Vehicles with Bench Seats
. One on the center stack below the climate control system.
. One or two in the storage area on the bench seat.
Lift the cover to access and replace when not in use.
See Power Outlets 0 124.
Universal Remote System
If equipped with the Universal Remote system, these buttons will be in the front overhead console. This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. See Universal Remote System 0 168.
Sunroof
If equipped, the sunroof operates when the ignition is on or in ACC/ ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271. Slide Switch Express-Open/Express-Close : To express-open the sunroof, fully
press and release I. Press the
switch again to stop the movement. To express-close the sunroof, fully
press and release K. Press the
switch again to stop the movement.
In Brief 29
Open/Close (Manual Mode) : To open the sunroof, press and
hold I. Release the switch to stop the movement. Press and hold K
to close the sunroof. Release the switch to stop the movement.
Tilt Switch
Vent : From the closed position,
pKresstoJclotosevethnet
the sunroof. vent.
Press
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed.
The sunroof also has a sunshade, which can be pulled forward to block sun rays. The sunshade must be opened and closed manually.
If an object is in the path of the sunroof while it is closing, the automatic reversal system will detect the object and stop the sunroof.
See Sunroof 0 54.
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control/ Electronic Stability Control
The vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel spin and the StabiliTrak system that assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. Both systems come on automatically when the vehicle is started and begins to move.
. To turn off traction control, press
and release g on the center stack. The traction off light i
displays in the instrument cluster. The appropriate Driver Information Center (DIC) message displays. See Ride Control System Messages 0 154.
. To turn off both traction control and StabiliTrak, press and
hold g until i and g illuminate
30 In Brief
in the instrument cluster and the appropriate DIC message displays. See Ride Control System Messages 0 154.
. Press and release g again to
turn on both systems.
StabiliTrak will automatically turn on if the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h (35 mph). Traction control will remain off.
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
tires. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259. The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is corrected.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This may be an early indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
The TPMS does not replace normal monthly tire maintenance. Maintain the correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 407.
Fuel (Except L86 6.2L Engine)
Regular Fuel Use only unleaded gasoline rated 87 octane or higher in your vehicle. Do not use gasoline with an octane rating lower as it may result in vehicle damage and lower fuel economy. See Fuel 0 311.
Fuel (L86 6.2L Engine)
The low tire pressure warning light alerts to a significant loss in pressure of one of the vehicle's
Premium Recommended Fuel Use premium 93 octane unleaded gasoline in your vehicle. Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 87 may be used, but it will reduce performance and fuel economy. See Fuel 0 311.
E85 or FlexFuel
FlexFuel Possible Certain models are compatible with E85 fuel. See Fuel 0 311.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life based on vehicle use and, on most vehicles, displays a DIC message when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter. The oil life system should be reset to 100% only following an oil change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
To reset the engine oil life system:
1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147. If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display.
2. Press and hold the V button on
the DIC, or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, for several seconds. The oil life will change to 100%.
The oil life system can also be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds.
In Brief 31
3. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If the display shows 100%, the system is reset.
See Engine Oil Life System 0 362.
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
. Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
. Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
. When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control.
. Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require.
. Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
32 In Brief
. Combine several trips into a single trip.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near the size.
. Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
Roadside Assistance Program
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
TTY Users (U.S. Only): 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
New Chevrolet owners are automatically enrolled in the Roadside Assistance Program.
See Roadside Assistance Program 0 476.
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 38 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 41 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Doors Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Vehicle Security Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 43 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 45
Keys, Doors, and Windows 33
Exterior Mirrors Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . 49 Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Interior Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 50 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 51 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Windows Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Roof Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Keys and Locks
Keys
{ Warning
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous and children or others could be seriously injured or killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition, and children or others could be caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave children in a vehicle with the ignition key.
34 Keys, Doors, and Windows
{ Warning
If the key is unintentionally rotated while the vehicle is running, the ignition could be moved out of the RUN position. This could be caused by heavy items hanging from the key ring, or by large or long items attached to the key ring that could be contacted by the driver or steering wheel. If the ignition moves out of the RUN position, the engine will shut off, braking and steering power assist may be
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
impacted, and airbags may not deploy. To reduce the risk of unintentional rotation of the ignition key, do not change the way the ignition key and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if equipped, are connected to the provided key rings.
The ignition key and key rings, and RKE transmitter, if equipped, are designed to work together as a system to reduce the risk of unintentionally moving the key out of the RUN position. The ignition key has a small hole to allow attachment of the provided key ring. It is important that any replacement ignition keys have a small hole. See your dealer if a replacement key is required.
The combination and size of the rings that came with your keys were specifically selected for your vehicle. The rings are connected to the key like two links of a chain to reduce the risk of unintentionally moving the key out of the RUN position. Do not add any additional items to the ring attached to the ignition key. Attach additional items only to the second ring, and limit added items to a few essential keys or small, light items no larger than an RKE transmitter.
Interference from radio-frequency identification (RFID) tags may prevent the key from starting the vehicle. Keep RFID tags away from the key when starting the vehicle.
The key is used for the ignition, all door locks and glove box, if equipped.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 35
Programming Keys
Follow these procedures to program up to eight keys to the vehicle.
Programming with Two Recognized Keys
To program a new key:
1. Insert the original, already programmed key in the ignition and turn the key to the ON/ RUN position.
2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
3. Quickly, within five seconds, insert the second original already programmed key in the ignition and turn the key to the ON/RUN position.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
5. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the ON/RUN position within five seconds.
6. The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed.
7. Repeat Steps 15 if additional keys are to be programmed.
If a key is lost or damaged, see your dealer to have a new key made.
Programming without Recognized Keys
Program a new key to the vehicle when a recognized key is not available. Canadian regulations require that owners see their dealer.
If two currently recognized keys are not available, follow this procedure to program the first key.
This procedure will take approximately 30 minutes to complete for the first key. The vehicle must be off and all of the keys you wish to program must be with you.
1. Insert the new vehicle key into the ignition.
2. Turn to ON/RUN. The security light will come on.
3. Wait 10 minutes until the security light turns off.
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
36 Keys, Doors, and Windows
5. Repeat Steps 24 two more times. After the third time, turn to ON/RUN; the key is learned and all previously known keys will no longer work with the vehicle.
6. To learn a second key, turn to OFF, insert the second key to be learned, and rotate to ON/RUN.
After two keys are learned, the remaining keys can be learned by following the procedure in "Programming with Two Recognized Keys."
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
See your dealer if a replacement key or additional key is needed.
If it becomes difficult to turn a key, inspect the key blade for debris. Periodically clean with a brush or pick.
With an active OnStar subscription, an OnStar Advisor may remotely unlock the vehicle. See OnStar Overview 0 486.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 482.
If there is a decrease in the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) operating range:
. Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle.
. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.
. Check the transmitter's battery. See "Battery Replacement" later in this section.
. If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
The RKE transmitter functions may work up to 60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle. Other conditions can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System 0 36.
With Remote Start (without Remote Start Similar)
/ : If equipped, / is used to start
the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 38.
Q : Press to lock all doors and the
tailgate.
If enabled in vehicle personalization, the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled through vehicle personalization, the horn chirps
when Q is pressed again within
three seconds. See Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Pressing Q arms the alarm system.
See Vehicle Alarm System 0 43.
If equipped with auto mirror folding,
pressing and holding Q for
one second will fold the mirrors. The auto mirror folding feature will not operate unless it is enabled. See Folding Mirrors 0 48 and Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
K : Press once to unlock only the driver door. If K is pressed again
within three seconds, all remaining doors and the tailgate unlock. The interior lamps may come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 37
If enabled in Vehicle Personalization, the turn signal lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle Personalization 0 160. If enabled through vehicle personalization, the exterior lamps may turn on. See Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
disarms the alarm system. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 43.
If equipped with auto mirror folding,
pressing and holding K for
one second will unfold the mirrors. The auto mirror folding feature will not operate unless it is enabled. See Folding Mirrors 0 48 and Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
On some models, press, release
and then press and hold K to open
all of the windows. Pressing the button again will stop the windows.
See Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
7 : Press and release one time to
initiate vehicle locator. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds three times.
Press and hold 7 for at least
three seconds to sound the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to ON/
RUN or 7 is pressed again. The
ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer. Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters programmed to it. See your dealer for transmitter programming.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery in the transmitter soon if the REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC.
38 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Caution When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate and remove the back cover of the transmitter with a flat, thin object, such as a coin.
2. Press and slide the battery down toward the pocket of the transmitter in the direction of the key ring. Do not use a metal object.
3. Remove the battery.
4. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up. Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
5. Push together the transmitter back cover top side first, and then the bottom toward the key ring.
Remote Vehicle Start
If equipped with the remote start feature, the climate control system will come on when the vehicle is started remotely, depending on the outside temperature.
The rear defog and heated and ventilated seats, if equipped, may also come on. See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 63 and Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters. Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use remote start if the vehicle is low on fuel.
The vehicle cannot be remote started if:
. The key is in the ignition.
. The hood is not closed.
. There is an emission control system malfunction and the malfunction indicator lamp is on.
. Fuel level is too low.
The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if:
. The coolant temperature gets too high.
. The oil pressure gets low.
The RKE transmitter range may be reduced while the vehicle is running.
Other conditions can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System 0 36 or Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Starting the Engine Using Remote Start
1. Press and release Q.
2. Immediately press and hold /
until the turn signal lamps flash or for at least four seconds.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on. The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 39
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. After 30 seconds, repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a 10-minute time extension.
Place the ignition in ON/RUN to operate the vehicle.
Extending Engine Run Time
The engine run time can be extended by 10 minutes, for a total of 20 minutes, if during the first 10 minutes Steps 1 and 2 are repeated while the engine is still running. An extension can be requested 30 seconds after starting.
A maximum of two remote starts, or a single start with an extension, is allowed between ignition cycles.
The vehicle's ignition must be turned on and then back off to use remote start again.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start, do one of the following:
. Press and hold / until the
parking lamps turn off.
. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
. Turn the ignition on and then off.
Door Locks
{ Warning
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
. Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
(Continued)
40 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Warning (Continued)
. Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it.
. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop the vehicle. Locking the doors can help prevent this from happening.
From inside, pull the door handle once to unlock the door. Pull the handle again to open the door. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 43.
Power Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
From outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the key in the driver door.
From inside, use the power door locks or manual door locks. To lock or unlock the door with the manual locks, push down or pull up on the manual lock knob.
Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim Shown, Other Models Similar
Base Trim
If equipped with power door locks:
Q : Press to lock the doors. K : Press to unlock the doors.
Delayed Locking
If equipped, when locking the doors with the power lock switch and a door open, the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed. Three chimes signal that delayed locking is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch twice overrides the delayed locking feature and immediately locks all doors.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
Turn delayed locking on or off using vehicle personalization. See Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Automatic Door Locks
If equipped, the doors will lock automatically when all doors are closed, the ignition is on, and the shift lever is moved out of P (Park) for automatic transmissions or vehicle speed is above 13 km/h (8 mph) for manual transmissions.
To unlock the doors:
. Press K on a power door lock
switch.
. If equipped with an automatic transmission, shift the transmission into P (Park)
Keys, Doors, and Windows 41
. If equipped with manual transmission, remove the key from the ignition when parked.
Automatic Door locking cannot be disabled. Automatic door unlocking can be programmed. See Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Lockout Protection
When locking is requested with the driver door open and the key in the ignition, all the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock.
This can be manually overridden by
pressing and holding Q on the
power door lock switch.
Safety Locks
The rear door safety locks prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim Shown, Others Similar
Press { to activate the safety locks
on the rear doors. The indicator light
comes on when activated. Press {
again to deactivate. The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained Accessory Power (RAP). See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271.
If the indicator light flashes, the feature may not be working properly.
42 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Doors
Tailgate
{ Warning
It is extremely dangerous to ride on the tailgate, even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds. People riding on the tailgate can easily lose their balance and fall in response to vehicle maneuvers. Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or death. Do not allow people to ride on the tailgate. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
If equipped, to lock or unlock the tailgate, use the RKE transmitter or the key. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 36.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate down.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it latches.
After closing the tailgate, pull it back to be sure it latches securely.
Power Assist Steps
If equipped, the power assist steps, when enabled, will extend when the door is opened. They will retract three seconds after the door is closed or immediately if the vehicle starts moving.
Keep hands, children, pets, objects, and clothing clear of the power assist steps when in motion.
The steps will reverse direction if there is an obstruction. Remove the obstruction, then open and close the door on the same side to complete the motion. If the obstruction is not cleared, the assist steps remain extended.
Slight movement of the steps while extended is normal.
Kick Switch
1. Place the vehicle in P (Park) and unlock the doors.
2. Kick the switch to extend the power assist step to the tire. A DIC message displays.
3. Kick the switch again to return to normal operation.
Center Stack Switch
The power assist steps can be extended and extended to the
tire by pressing j. When extending the steps with j, the
kick switch is disabled. The vehicle must be in P (Park) or N (Neutral). To extend the steps:
. Press j to extend both steps.
A DIC message displays.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 43
. Press j again to extend to the
tire. A DIC message displays.
. Press j again to return to
normal operation.
Enable/Disable
To enable or disable the power
assist steps, press and hold j for
four seconds. A DIC message displays.
Cleaning
Clean the power assist steps regularly. For an automatic car wash, extend the steps while in N (Neutral) using the center stack switch. The steps will stow when shifting into D (Drive).
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features; however, they do not make the vehicle impossible to steal.
Vehicle Alarm System
The indicator light, on the instrument panel near the windshield, indicates the status of the system.
Off : Alarm system is disarmed.
On Solid : Vehicle is secured during the delay to arm the system.
44 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured. A door, the liftgate or the hood is open.
Slow Flash : Alarm system is armed.
Arming the Alarm System
1. Turn off the vehicle.
2. Lock the vehicle in one of three ways:
. Use the RKE transmitter.
. Use the Keyless Access system.
. With a door open, press Q
on the interior of the door.
3. After 30 seconds, the alarm system will arm and the indicator light will begin to
slowly flash. Pressing Q on the
RKE transmitter a second time will bypass the 30-second delay and immediately arm the alarm system.
The vehicle alarm system will not arm if the doors are locked with the key.
If the driver door is opened without first unlocking with the RKE transmitter, the horn will chirp and the lights will flash to indicate pre-alarm. If the vehicle is not started, or the door is not unlocked
by pressing K on the RKE
transmitter during the 10-second pre-alarm, the alarm will be activated.
The alarm will also be activated if a passenger door, the liftgate, or the hood is opened without first disarming the system. When the alarm is activated, the turn signals flash and the horn sounds for about 30 seconds. The alarm system will then re-arm to monitor for the next unauthorized event.
Disarming the Alarm System
To disarm the alarm system or turn off the alarm if it has been activated:
. Press K on the RKE transmitter.
. Unlock the vehicle using the Keyless Access system.
. Start the vehicle.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
. Lock the vehicle after all occupants have exited.
. Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter, or use the Keyless Access system.
Unlocking the driver door with the key will not disarm the system or turn off the alarm.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If K is pressed on the RKE
transmitter and the horn chirps three times, an alarm occurred previously while the alarm system was armed.
If the alarm has been activated, a message will appear on the DIC. See Security Messages 0 156.
Inclination Sensor and Intrusion Sensor
In addition to the standard theft-deterrent system features, this system may also have an, inclination sensor and intrusion sensor.
The inclination sensor can set off the alarm if it senses movement of the vehicle, such as a change in vehicle orientation.
The intrusion sensor monitors the vehicle interior, and can activate the alarm if it senses unauthorized entry into the vehicle's interior. Do not allow passengers or pets to remain in the vehicle when the intrusion sensor is activated.
Before arming the theft-deterrent system and activating the intrusion sensor:
. Make sure all doors and windows are completely closed.
. Secure any loose items such as sunshades.
. Make sure there are no obstructions blocking the sensors in the front overhead console.
. Close DVD screens, if equipped, before leaving the vehicle.
Inclination and Intrusion Sensors Disable Switch
Keys, Doors, and Windows 45
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 482.
Immobilizer Operation
It is recommended that the intrusion and inclination sensors be deactivated if pets are left in the vehicle or if the vehicle is being transported.
With the vehicle turned off, press in the front overhead console.
o
The indicator light will come on momentarily, indicating that these sensors have been disabled for the next alarm system arming cycle.
This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system does not have to be manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically immobilized when the vehicle is turned off.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or START from the LOCK/OFF position.
46 Keys, Doors, and Windows
The security light, in the instrument cluster, comes on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When trying to start the vehicle, the security light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on.
If the engine does not start and the security light stays on, there is a problem with the system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. It may be necessary to check the fuse. See Fuses 0 390. If the engine still does not start with the other key, the vehicle needs service. If the vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer.
It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or replacement keys. Up to eight keys can be programmed for the vehicle. To program additional keys, see Keys 0 33. To program additional transmitters, see Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 36.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the vehicle theft system in the vehicle.
See your dealer to get a new key blank cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
{ Warning
A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat.
Manual Mirrors
If equipped, adjust manual mirrors by moving the mirror up and down or left to right to see a little of the side of the vehicle and to have a clear view behind the vehicle.
Using hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on convex mirror attachments could decrease mirror performance.
Trailer-Tow Mirrors
Keys, Doors, and Windows 47
seat. The convex mirror can be adjusted manually to the driver preferred position for better vision.
The mirror may have a turn signal arrow that flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change.
Power Mirrors
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
4. Keep the selector switch in the center position when not adjusting mirrors.
If equipped, adjust trailer-tow mirrors for a clear view of the area behind you. Manually pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer.
The lower portion of the mirror is convex. A convex mirror's surface is curved to see more from the driver
Base Power Mirrors
If equipped with power mirrors:
1. Press (1) or (2) to select the driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press the arrows on the control pad to move the mirror in the desired direction.
Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim Shown, Other Models Similar
1. Press (1) or (2) to select the driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press the arrows on the control pad while the indicator light on button (1) or (2) is illuminated, to move the mirror in the desired direction.
48 Keys, Doors, and Windows
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
4. Press either (1) or (2) again to deselect the mirror.
If you do not deselect the mirror, the feature will turn off after about one minute.
If equipped, the mirrors may include a memory function that works with the memory seats. See Memory Seats 0 61.
Folding Mirrors
Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim Shown, Other Models Similar
Power Folding If equipped with power folding mirrors: 1. Press (2) to fold the mirrors out
to the driving position. 2. Press (2) again to fold the
mirrors in to the folded position. The mirrors may also include a memory function that works with the memory seats. See Memory Seats 0 61.
Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors
Reset the power folding mirrors if:
. The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding.
. They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
. The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
. The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds.
Manually fold both mirrors if they are out of sync. Fold and unfold the mirrors three times using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position. A popping noise may be heard. This sound is normal after a manual folding operation.
Manual Folding
If equipped, push the mirror toward the vehicle to fold. Push the mirror outward to return to its original position.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash.
Auto Mirror Folding
If equipped, with the ignition off,
press and hold Q on the RKE
transmitter for approximately one second to automatically fold the
exterior mirrors. Press and hold K
on the RKE transmitter for approximately one second to unfold. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 36.
This feature is turned on or off through vehicle personalization. See Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Turn Signal Indicator
If equipped, indicator lights on the mirror flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.
Heated Mirrors 1 : If equipped, the rear window
defogger also heats the side mirrors.
W : If equipped, press to turn the
heated side mirrors on or off.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 49
If the vehicle has trailer-tow mirrors, only the upper glass of the mirror is heated. The lower convex part of the towing mirrors is not heated.
See "Rear Window Defogger" under Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only) 0 237 or Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning) 0 238 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 240.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If equipped, the driver outside mirror automatically adjusts for the glare of the headlamps from behind. This feature comes on when the vehicle is started.
Blind Spot Mirrors
If equipped, there is a small convex mirror built into the upper and outer corner of the driver outside rearview mirror. It can show objects that may be in the vehicle's blind zone.
Driving with the Blind Spot Mirror
Actual Mirror View
50 Keys, Doors, and Windows
1. When the approaching vehicle is a long distance away, the image in the main mirror is small and near the inboard edge of the mirror.
2. As the vehicle gets closer, the image in the main mirror gets larger and moves outboard.
3. As the vehicle enters the blind zone, the image transitions from the main mirror to the blind spot mirror.
4. When the vehicle is in the blind zone, the image only appears in the blind spot mirror.
Using the Outside Mirror with the Blind Spot Mirror
1. Set the main mirror so that the side of the vehicle can just be seen and the blind spot mirror has an unobstructed view.
2. When checking for traffic or before changing a lane, look at the main driver/passenger side mirror to observe traffic in the adjacent lane, behind your vehicle. Check the blind spot mirror for a vehicle in the blind
zone. Then, glance over your shoulder to double check before moving slowly into the adjacent lane.
Reverse Tilt Mirrors
If equipped with memory seats, the passenger and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This allows the curb to be seen when parallel parking.
The mirror(s) return to the original position when:
. The vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse), or remains in R (Reverse) for about 30 seconds.
. The ignition is turned off.
. The vehicle is driven in R (Reverse) above a set speed.
To turn this feature on or off, see Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Interior Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirrors
Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear view of the area behind your vehicle.
If equipped with OnStar, the vehicle may have three control buttons at the bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for more information about OnStar and how to subscribe to it. See OnStar Overview 0 486.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water.
Manual Rearview Mirror
If equipped, push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it rearward for nighttime use to avoid glare from the headlamps from behind.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
If equipped, the mirror will automatically reduce the glare of the headlamps from behind. The dimming feature comes on each time the vehicle is started.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 51
Windows
{ Warning
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke.
pulsing sound when either rear window is down and the front windows are up. To reduce the sound, open either a front window or the sunroof, if equipped.
Manual Windows
If equipped, turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or lower the manual windows.
Power Windows
{ Warning
Children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Never leave keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat, use the window lockout button to prevent operation of the windows. See Keys 0 33.
The vehicle aerodynamics are designed to improve fuel economy performance. This may result in a
52 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim Shown, Other Models Similar
The windows work when the vehicle is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271.
Press or pull the switch to open or close the window.
The windows will be temporarily disabled if the window switches are used repeatedly within a short time.
Window Lockout
Regular Cab Uplevel Trim Shown, Other Models Similar
Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim Shown, Other Models Similar
This feature stops the rear door passenger window switches from working except from the driver position.
Press Z to engage the rear
window lockout feature. The indicator light is on when engaged.
Press Z again to disengage.
Window Express Movement
Express-down and, if equipped, express-up allows the windows to be opened or closed without holding the window switch. Press the window switch fully down or pull it up, and quickly release it to engage. Briefly press or pull the same switch to stop window movement.
Express Window Obstacle Detection
The express-up feature will reverse window movement if it comes in contact with an object. Extreme cold or ice could cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will operate as normal after the object or condition is removed.
Obstacle Detection Override
{ Warning
If obstacle detection override is activated, the window will not reverse automatically. You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged. Before you use obstacle detection override, make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path.
The window can be closed by holding the window switch in the up position if conditions prevent it from express closing.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 53
Programming the Power Windows
Programming may be necessary if the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or discharged. If the window is unable to express-up, program the window:
1. Close all doors.
2. Place the ignition in ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
3. Partially open the window to be programmed, then close it and continue to pull the switch briefly after the window has fully closed.
4. Press the power window switch until the window is fully open and briefly hold.
Rear Windows
Power Sliding Rear Window
If equipped, the power sliding rear window works when the ignition has been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271. . Press the switch to open the
window. . Pull the switch to close the
window. The power sliding rear window cannot be operated manually.
54 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Sun Visors
Roof
Sunroof
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the center mount to pivot to the side window or, if equipped, extend along the rod.
If equipped, the sunroof operates when the ignition is on or in ACC/ ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271.
Slide Switch
Express-Open/Express-Close : To express-open the sunroof, fully
press and release I. Press the
switch again to stop the movement.
To express-close the sunroof, fully
press and release K. Press the
switch again to stop the movement.
Open/Close (Manual Mode) : To open the sunroof, press and
hold I. Release the switch to stop the movement. Press and hold K
to close the sunroof. Release the switch to stop the movement.
Tilt Switch
Vent : From the closed position,
pKresstoJclotosevethnet
the sunroof. vent.
Press
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed.
The sunroof also has a sunshade, which can be pulled forward to block sun rays. The sunshade must be opened and closed manually.
Automatic Reversal System
The sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversal system that is only active when the sunroof is being operated in express-close.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 55
If an object is in the path of the sunroof while it is express closing, the reversal system will detect the object and stop. In the event of closing difficulties like frost or other conditions, it is possible to override the reversal system. To override the reversal system, close in manual mode. To stop the movement, release the switch.
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not remove grease from the sunroof tracks.
If water is seen dripping into the water drainage system, this is normal.
Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the track. This could cause an issue with sunroof operation or noise. It could also plug the water drainage system. Periodically open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area using a clean
56 Seats and Restraints
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Front Seats Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 59 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Heated and Ventilated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Rear Seats Rear Seats (Double Cab Full Bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Rear Seats (Split Bench) . . . . . . 65
Safety Belts Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 72 Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Airbag System Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 75 When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . 80 Passenger Sensing System . . . 82 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 87 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 88 Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Child Restraints Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Infants and Young Children . . . . 90 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 92
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 94 Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) . . . . 96 Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 102 Securing Child Restraints (With
the Safety Belt in the Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Center Front Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Head Restraints
Front Seats
The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/ spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Seats and Restraints 57
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The height of the head restraint can be adjusted. Pull the head restraint up to raise it. Try to move the head restraint to make sure that it is locked in place.
To lower the head restraint, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push the restraint down. Try to move the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The front seat outboard head restraints are not removable.
58 Seats and Restraints
Rear Seats
The rear seat has adjustable headrests in the outboard seating positions.
The height of the headrest can be adjusted. Pull the headrest up to raise it. To lower the headrest, push the headrest down.
If you are installing a child restraint in the rear seat, see "Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System" under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96.
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
{ Warning
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a driver seat while the vehicle is moving. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the handle.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure it is locked in place.
To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks 0 60.
To adjust the lumbar support, if equipped, see Lumbar Adjustment 0 59.
Center Seat
If equipped, the center front seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage area for the driver and passenger when the center front seat is not used. Do not use it as a seating position when the seatback is folded down.
To adjust a manual seat:
1. Pull the handle at the front of the seat.
Power Seat Adjustment
Seats and Restraints 59
To adjust the lumbar support, see Lumbar Adjustment 0 59.
Some vehicles are equipped with a feature that activates a vibrating pulse alert in the driver seat to help the driver avoid crashes. See Driver Assistance Systems 0 301.
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Lumbar
Power Lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward.
. If equipped, raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down.
. If equipped, raise or lower the seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.
To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks 0 60.
If equipped, move the lever up or down repeatedly to increase or decrease lumbar support.
To adjust the power lumbar support, if equipped:
. Press and hold the control forward to increase or rearward to decrease upper and lower lumbar support at the same time.
. If equipped, press and hold the control up to increase upper lumbar support and decrease lower lumbar support.
Press and hold the control down to increase lower lumbar support and decrease upper lumbar support.
60 Seats and Restraints
Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the safety belts cannot do their job.
The shoulder belt will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.
To adjust a manual seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
The seatback will automatically fold forward.
2. To recline, move the seatback rearward to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback will return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline a power seatback, if equipped: . Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline. . Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
Memory Seats
Crew/Double Cab Shown, Other Models Similar
If memory equipped, the SET, 1, 2,
and B (Exit) buttons on the driver
door are used to manually store and recall memory settings for the driver seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable pedals (if equipped). Storing Memory Positions To store positions to the 1 and 2 buttons:
1. The ignition must be in ON/ RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
Seats and Restraints 61
2. Adjust the driver seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable pedals (if equipped) to the desired driving positions.
3. Press and release SET. A beep will sound.
4. Immediately press and hold 1 until two beeps sound.
5. Repeat Steps 14 for a second driver using 2.
To store positions to the B (Exit)
button and easy exit features,
repeat Steps 14 above using B to
store your positions for getting out of the vehicle.
Manually Recalling Memory Positions
Press and hold 1, 2, or B (Exit) to
manually recall the previously stored memory positions. Releasing
1, 2, or B before the stored
positions are reached stops the recall.
62 Seats and Restraints
Automatically Recalling Memory Positions (Auto Recall)
If programmed on in the vehicle personalization menu, the Auto (Automatic) Memory Recall feature automatically recalls the current driver's previously stored 1 or 2 position when the ignition is changed from OFF to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
See "Auto Memory Recall" under "Comfort and Convenience" in Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
To stop recall movement, press one of the memory, power mirror or power seat controls; or press the adjustable pedal control (if equipped).
RKE transmitters are not labeled with a number. If your memory seat position is stored to 1 or 2 but this position is not automatically recalling, then store your positions to the other button or switch RKE transmitters with the other driver.
Easy Exit Recall
If programmed on in the vehicle personalization menu, the easy exit feature automatically recalls the
previously stored B (Exit) position.
See "Storing Memory Positions" listed previously. See also Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Easy exit recall automatically activates when one of the following occurs:
. The vehicle is turned off and the driver door is opened within a short time.
. The vehicle is turned off with the driver door open.
To stop recall movement, press one of the memory, power mirror or power seat controls; or press the adjustable pedal control (if equipped).
Obstructions
If something has blocked the driver seat and/or adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position, the recall may stop. Remove the obstruction. Then do one of the following:
. For manual or automatic recall positions, press and hold the appropriate manual control for two seconds. Try recalling again by pressing the appropriate memory button.
. For exit recall position, press and hold the appropriate manual control for the exit feature not recalling for two seconds. Then try recalling the exit position again.
If the memory position is still not recalling, see your dealer for service.
Heated and Ventilated Front Seats
{ Warning
If you cannot feel temperature change or pain to the skin, the seat heater may cause burns. To reduce the risk of burns, people with such a condition should use care when using the seat heater, especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover, or similar item. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat.
Heated and Ventilated Seat Buttons Shown, Heated Seat
Buttons Similar
If equipped, the buttons are on the center stack. To operate, the engine must be running.
Press I to heat the driver or
passenger seatback only.
Press J to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and seatback.
Press C to ventilate the driver or
passenger seat.
Seats and Restraints 63
The indicator light on the button comes on when this feature is on.
Press the button once for the highest setting. With each press of the button, the seat will change to the next lower setting, and then to the off setting. The indicator lights next to the buttons indicate three for the highest setting and one for the lowest. If the heated seats are on high for an extended time, their level may automatically be lowered.
Remote Start Auto Heated and Ventilated Seats
During a remote start, the heated or ventilated seats can be turned on automatically. When it is cold outside, the heated seats turn on, and when it is hot outside the ventilated seats turn on. The heated or ventilated seats are canceled when the ignition is turned on. Press the heated or ventilated seat button to use the heated or ventilated seats after the vehicle is started.
64 Seats and Restraints
The heated or ventilated seat indicator lights do not turn on during a remote start.
The temperature performance of an unoccupied seat may be reduced. This is normal.
The heated or ventilated seats will not turn on during a remote start unless they are enabled in the vehicle personalization menu. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 38 and Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Rear Seats
Rear Seats (Double Cab Full Bench)
Rear Seat Reminder (Full Bench Only)
Look in Rear Seat Reminder Feature
If equipped, this message displays under certain conditions indicating there may be an item or passenger in the rear seat. Check before exiting the vehicle.
This feature will activate when a second row door is opened while the vehicle is on or up to 10 minutes before the vehicle is turned on, including if the vehicle was started remotely. There will be an alert when the vehicle is turned off. The alert does not directly detect objects in the rear seat; instead, under certain conditions, it detects when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat.
The feature is active only once each time the vehicle is turned on and off, and will require reactivation by opening and closing the second row doors. There may be an alert even when there is nothing in the rear seat; for example, if a child entered the vehicle through the rear door and left the vehicle without the vehicle being shut off.
The feature can be turned on or off through Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Folding the Rear Seat
Caution
Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.
To fold the seat:
1. Pull up on the front of the seat cushion while pulling down on the release strap loop under the seat cushion.
2. Pull the seat cushion up until it latches with the seatback.
3. Pull forward on the seat cushion to make sure it is locked in place.
To unfold the seat:
1. Push the seat cushion rearward while pulling the release strap loop under the seat cushion. Pull the seat cushion down until it latches.
2. Pull up on the seat cushion to make sure it is locked in place.
Make sure the safety belts are not twisted or caught in the seat cushion.
{ Warning
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.
Rear Seats (Split Bench)
Folding the Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be folded for added cargo space.
Seats and Restraints 65 Caution
Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. Make sure that nothing is on the seat cushion.
To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat cushion up.
66 Seats and Restraints
To return the seat to the normal seating position, slowly pull the seat cushion down.
Make sure the safety belts are not twisted or caught in the seat cushion.
{ Warning
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.
Safety Belts
This section describes how to use safety belts properly, and some things not to do.
{ Warning
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, injuries can be much worse than if you are wearing safety belts. You can be seriously injured or killed by hitting things inside the vehicle harder or by being ejected from the vehicle. In addition, anyone who is not buckled up can strike other passengers in the vehicle.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, passengers riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
passengers to ride in any area of the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Always wear a safety belt, and check that all passenger(s) are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders 0 134.
This vehicle may have the Safety Belt Assurance System, which may prevent the vehicle from shifting out of P (Park). See Safety Belt Messages 0 155.
Why Safety Belts Work
When riding in a vehicle, you travel as fast as the vehicle does. If the vehicle stops suddenly, you keep going until something stops you. It could be the windshield, the instrument panel, or the safety belts! When you wear a safety belt, you and the vehicle slow down together. There is more time to stop because you stop over a longer distance and, when worn properly, your strongest bones take the forces from the safety belts. That is why wearing safety belts makes such good sense.
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be -- whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. Your chance of being conscious during and after a crash, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only. They work with safety belts -- not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
Also, in nearly all states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing safety belts.
Seats and Restraints 67
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
There are special things to know about safety belts and children, and there are different rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children 0 88 or Infants and Young Children 0 90. Follow those rules for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
There are important things to know about wearing a safety belt properly.
68 Seats and Restraints
. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you.
. Always use the correct buckle for your seating position.
. Wear the lap part of the belt low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
. Wear the shoulder belt over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
{ Warning
You can be seriously injured, or even killed, by not wearing your safety belt properly.
. Never allow the lap or shoulder belt to become loose or twisted.
. Never wear the shoulder belt under both arms or behind your back.
. Never route the lap or shoulder belt over an armrest.
vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt except for the center front passenger position (if equipped), which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt 0 72.
The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see "Seats" in the Index.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
If the vehicle is a regular cab, then all seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. If the vehicle is a double or crew cab, then all seating positions in the
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may affect the passenger sensing system, if equipped. See Passenger Sensing System 0 82.
If the webbing locks in the latch plate before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate flat to unlock.
Seats and Restraints 69
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender 0 72.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See "Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster" later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information.
70 Seats and Restraints
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position.
Always stow the safety belt slowly. If the safety belt webbing returns quickly to the stowed position, the retractor may lock and cannot be pulled out. If this happens, pull the safety belt straight out firmly to unlock the webbing, and then release it. If the webbing is still locked in the retractor, see your dealer.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and front outboard passenger.
Adjust the height so the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 0 67.
Push down on the release button to move the height adjuster to the desired position. Move the adjuster up by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it down without pushing the release button to make sure it has locked into position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash. If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and the vehicle's safety belt system will probably need other new parts. See Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash 0 73.
Do not sit on the outboard safety belt while entering or exiting the vehicle or at any time while sitting in
the seat. Sitting on the safety belt can damage the webbing and hardware.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear safety belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head.
Comfort guides are available through your dealer for the rear outboard seating positions. Instructions are included with the guide.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Seats and Restraints 71
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
72 Seats and Restraints Lap Belt
This section is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 68. The vehicle may have a center seating position with a lap safety belt. The lap safety belt does not have a retractor.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. Buckle, position, and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender 0 72.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child restraints. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Safety System Check
Check that the safety belt reminder, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, and retractors, are all working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from performing properly. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, have it replaced immediately.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders 0 134.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Safety Belt Care 0 73.
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ Warning
Do not bleach or dye safety belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse safety belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.
Safety belts should be properly cared for and maintained.
Safety belt hardware should be kept dry and free of dust or debris. As necessary exterior hard surfaces and safety belt webbing may be lightly cleaned with mild soap and water. Ensure there is not excessive dust or debris in the mechanism. If dust or debris exists in the system
please see the dealer. Parts may need to be replaced to ensure proper functionality of the system.
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the safety belt system in the vehicle. A damaged safety belt system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the safety belt systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
Seats and Restraints 73
After a minor crash, replacement of safety belts may not be necessary. But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt system was not being used at the time of the crash.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, or if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 135.
74 Seats and Restraints
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
. A frontal airbag for the driver.
. A frontal airbag for the front outboard passenger.
The vehicle may have the following airbags:
. A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
. A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the front outboard passenger.
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver.
. A roof-rail airbag for the front outboard passenger and the person seated directly behind the front outboard passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word AIRBAG on the trim or on a label near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the center of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the front outboard passenger.
For seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the seatback closest to the door.
For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:
{ Warning
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt, even with airbags. Airbags are designed to work with safety
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
belts, not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to inflate in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are the only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 0 76.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are "supplemental restraints" to the safety belts. Everyone in the vehicle should wear a safety belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag for that person.
{ Warning
Because airbags inflate with great force and faster than the blink of an eye, anyone who is up against, or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to any airbag, as you would be if sitting on the edge of the seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear a safety belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The safety belts and the front outboard passenger airbags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.
{ Warning
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Always secure children properly in the vehicle. To read how, see Older Children 0 88 or Infants and Young Children 0 90.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 135 for more information.
Seats and Restraints 75 Where Are the Airbags?
The driver frontal airbag is in the center of the steering wheel.
76 Seats and Restraints
The front outboard passenger frontal airbag is in the passenger side instrument panel.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
If the vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and front outboard passenger, they are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door.
Driver Side Crew Cab Shown, Passenger Side Double and
Regular Cabs Similar
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, front outboard passenger, and second row outboard passengers, they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
{ Warning
If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tiedown through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
This vehicle is equipped with airbags. See Airbag System 0 74. Airbags are designed to inflate if the impact exceeds the specific airbag
system's deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. The vehicle has electronic sensors which help the airbag system determine the severity of the impact. Deployment thresholds can vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries, mainly to the driver's or front outboard passenger's head and chest.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should inflate is not based primarily on how fast the vehicle is traveling. It depends on what is hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds depending on whether the vehicle hits an object straight on or at an angle, and
whether the object is fixed or moving, rigid or deformable, narrow or wide.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, in rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, if the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is at or below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb), the vehicle has advanced technology frontal airbags. You can find the GVWR on the Certification/Tire label on the center pillar of the vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259 for more information.
Advanced technology frontal airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity. Vehicles with advanced technology frontal airbags have a seat position sensor that enables the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver seat. The seat position sensor provides information that is used to adjust the deployment of the driver frontal airbag.
Seats and Restraints 77
If the GVWR is at or below 4 536 kg (10,000 lb), the vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags. Vehicles with a GVWR above 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) may or may not have seat-mounted side impact airbags. Seat-mounted side impact airbags, if equipped, are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not designed to inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is designed to inflate on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
Vehicles with a GVWR at or below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) have roof-rail airbags. These roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. The roof-rail airbags are not designed to inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will inflate when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the
78 Seats and Restraints
sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side, or in a severe frontal impact.
Vehicles with a GVWR above 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) up to and including 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) also have roof-rail airbags. These roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. Both roof-rail airbags will inflate when either side of the vehicle is struck. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in a severe frontal impact. The roof-rail airbags are also rollover capable except on models sold as an incomplete vehicle with the pickup box removed. If the roof-rail airbags are rollover capable, both roof-rail airbags will also inflate if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side. The roof-rail airbags are not designed to inflate in rear impacts.
Vehicles with a GVWR above 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) may or may not be equipped with roof-rail airbags. These roof-rail airbags, if equipped,
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. Both roof-rail airbags will inflate when either side of the vehicle is struck. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in a severe frontal impact. If the vehicle has single rear wheels and has a factory-installed pickup box and roof-rail airbags, the roof-rail airbags are rollover capable. If the vehicle has dual rear wheels, or is sold as an incomplete vehicle, as a chassis cab, or with the pickup box removed, and has roof-rail airbags, the roof-rail airbags are not rollover capable. If the airbags are rollover capable, both roof-rail airbags will also inflate if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side. The roof-rail airbags are not designed to inflate in rear impacts.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the vehicle damage or repair costs.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module.
For airbag locations, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 75.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts by distributing the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's body.
Seats and Restraints 79
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first and second rows. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 0 76.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts.
What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?
For an eAssist vehicle, see the Silverado/Sierra eAssist supplement.
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they inflate. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 75.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.
{ Warning
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate. The feature may also activate, without airbag inflation, after an event that exceeds a predetermined threshold. You can lock the doors, and turn off the interior lamps, and turn off the hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features.
80 Seats and Restraints
{ Warning
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the front outboard passenger airbag.
. Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
. The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 0 484 and Event Data Recorders 0 484.
. Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service.
Airbag On-Off Switch
If the passenger side instrument panel endcap has the switch pictured in the following illustration, the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch that you can use to manually
turn on or off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag. See Instrument Panel 0 6.
If the vehicle does not have an airbag on-off switch, it may have a passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System 0 82. This switch should only be turned to the off position if the person in the front outboard passenger position is a member of a passenger risk group identified by the national government as follows: Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: . My vehicle has no rear seat;
. My vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
. The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant's physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child's condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because:
. My vehicle has no rear seat;
. Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
. The child has a medical condition which, according to the child's physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child's condition.
Medical Condition. A passenger has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician:
. Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger; and
. Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the instrument panel or windshield in a crash.
{ Warning
If the front outboard passenger frontal airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government, that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Do not turn off the front outboard
(Continued)
Seats and Restraints 81
Warning (Continued) passenger frontal airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group.
To turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, insert the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the off position. The word OFF or the off symbol will come on in the passenger airbag status indicator located in the overhead console to let you know that the front outboard passenger frontal airbag is off, after the system check is completed. The airbag off light will come on and stay on to let
82 Seats and Restraints
you know that the front outboard passenger frontal airbag is off. See Airbag On-Off Light 0 136. The front outboard passenger airbag will remain off until you turn it back on again.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the front outboard passenger frontal airbag could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 135 for more information, including important safety information.
To turn the front outboard passenger frontal airbag on again, insert the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the on position.
The front outboard passenger frontal airbag is now enabled (may inflate). See Airbag On-Off Light 0 136.
Passenger Sensing System
If the vehicle has one of the following indicators, then the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position, unless there is an airbag on-off switch on the instrument panel endcap. If there is an airbag on-off switch, the vehicle does not
have a passenger sensing system. See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 80 for more information. The passenger airbag status indicator will light on the overhead console when the vehicle is started.
United States
Canada and Mexico The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 137.
The passenger sensing system turns off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. No other airbag is affected by the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front outboard passenger seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag should be allowed to inflate or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size.
Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the airbag is off. If securing a forward-facing child restraint in
(Continued)
Seats and Restraints 83
Warning (Continued)
the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure child restraints in the rear seat. Consider using another vehicle to transport the child when a rear seat is not available.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag if: . The front outboard passenger
seat is unoccupied. . The system determines an infant
is present in a child restraint. . A front outboard passenger
takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time.
84 Seats and Restraints
. There is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 137.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on the front outboard passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front outboard passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbag is active.
For some children, including children in child restraints, and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the front outboard passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or not there is an airbag for that person.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 135 for more information, including important safety information.
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag if the system determines that an infant
is present in a child restraint. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Center Front Seat) 0 106 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 102 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) 0 106.
Make sure the safety belt retractor is locked by pulling the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor when installing the child restraint,
even if the child restraint is equipped with a safety belt lock-off. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints 0 57.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child's size. It is better to secure child restraints in the rear seat. Consider using another
vehicle to transport the child when a rear seat is not available. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the on indicator is not lit. If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an Adult-Sized Occupant
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front outboard passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat or that the child restraint locking feature is engaged. If this happens, use the following
Seats and Restraints 85
steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the front outboard passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged. This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing system to turn the airbag off for some adult-sized occupants. If this happens, unbuckle the belt, let the belt go back all the way, and then buckle the belt again without pulling the belt out all the way.
86 Seats and Restraints
6. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit.
{ Warning
If the front outboard passenger airbag is turned off for an adult-sized occupant, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect that person in a crash, resulting in an increased risk of serious injury or even death. An adult-sized occupant should not ride in the front outboard passenger seat, if the passenger airbag off indicator is lit.
Additional Factors Affecting System Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See "Safety Belts" and "Child Restraints"
in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 87 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.
{ Warning
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system.
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information 0 481.
{ Warning
For up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Adding accessories that change the vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end, or side sheet metal, may keep the airbag system from working properly. The operation of the airbag system can also be affected by changing any parts of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel, any of the airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring.
Your dealer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, and airbag wiring.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position, which includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery, or trim; or with GM covers, upholstery, or trim designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort-enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly
Seats and Restraints 87
turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System 0 82.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see Different Size Tires and Wheels 0 416 for additional important information.
If a snow plow is added to the vehicle, the airbags should still work properly. The airbag systems were designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including snow plowing with vehicles that have the optional snow plow prep package (RPO VYU). Do not change or defeat the snow plow's "tripping mechanism." If you do, it can damage the snow plow and the vehicle, and may cause an airbag deployment.
If you have to modify your vehicle because you have a disability and you have questions about whether the modifications will affect the vehicle's airbag system, or if you have questions about whether the airbag system will be affected if the vehicle is modified for any other
88 Seats and Restraints
reason, call Customer Assistance. See Customer Assistance Offices 0 474.
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 135.
Caution
If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag coverings, have the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 75. See your dealer for service.
Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the airbag systems in the vehicle. A damaged airbag system may not properly protect you and your passenger(s) in a crash, resulting in serious injury or even death. To help make sure the airbag systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on when you are driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 135.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle safety belts. The manufacturer instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the fit test below:
. Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide, if available. See "Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides" under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 68. If a comfort guide is not available, or if the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.
. Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
. Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see "Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides" under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 68.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in a rear seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly.
Seats and Restraints 89
{ Warning
Never allow more than one child to wear the same safety belt. The safety belt cannot properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, they can be crushed together and seriously injured. A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time.
90 Seats and Restraints
{ Warning
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ Warning
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around a child's neck. If the shoulder belt is locked and tightened around a child's neck, the only way to loosen the belt is to cut it.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. Neither
the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ Warning
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's arms. An infant or child should be secured in an appropriate restraint.
Seats and Restraints 91
{ Warning
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front outboard seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
Child restraints are devices used to restrain, seat, or position children in the vehicle and are sometimes called child seats or car seats.
There are three basic types of child restraints:
. Forward-facing child restraints
. Rearward-facing child restraints
. Belt-positioning booster seats
The proper child restraint for your child depends on their size, weight, and age, and also on whether the child restraint is compatible with the vehicle in which it will be used.
92 Seats and Restraints
For each type of child restraint, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs.
{ Warning
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury in a crash, infants and toddlers should be secured in a rear-facing child restraint until age two, or until they reach the maximum height and weight limits of their child restraint.
{ Warning
A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
Rear-Facing Infant Seat A rear-facing child restraint provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
Forward-Facing Child Seat
A forward-facing child restraint provides restraint for the child's body with the harness.
Booster Seats
A belt-positioning booster seat is used for children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint. Boosters are designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system until the child is large enough for the vehicle safety belts to fit properly without a booster seat. See the safety belt fit test in Older Children 0 88.
Seats and Restraints 93
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96 for more information. Children can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
94 Seats and Restraints
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
In some areas of the United States and Canada, Certified Child Passenger Safety Technicians (CPSTs) are available to inspect and demonstrate how to correctly use and install child restraints. In the U.S., refer to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website to locate the nearest child safety seat inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with Transport Canada or the Provincial Ministry of Transportation office.
Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint secured in a rear seating position.
Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position.
If a child restraint is secured in the front outboard passenger seat, and the vehicle has a switch on the passenger side instrument panel endcap to manually turn off the front outboard passenger airbag, see Airbag On-Off Switch 0 80 and Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Center Front Seat) 0 106 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 102 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) 0 106 for more information, including important safety information.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system or airbag switch has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
{ Warning
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position. When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Seats and Restraints 95
Child restraints and booster seats vary considerably in size, and some may fit in certain seating positions better than others.
Depending on where you place the child restraint and the size of the child restraint, you may not be able to access adjacent safety belts or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child restraints. Adjacent seating positions should not be used if the child restraint prevents access to or interferes with the routing of the safety belt.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint system and secure the child restraint system properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to
96 Seats and Restraints
properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System)
The LATCH system secures a child restraint during driving or in a crash. LATCH attachments on the child restraint are used to attach the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. LATCH-compatible rear-facing and forward-facing child seats can be properly installed using either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's safety belts. Do not use both the safety belts and the LATCH anchorage system to secure a rear-facing or forward-facing child seat.
Booster seats use the vehicle's safety belts to secure the child in the booster seat. If the manufacturer recommends that the booster seat be secured with the LATCH system, this can be done as long as the booster seat can be positioned properly and there is no interference with the proper positioning of the lap-shoulder belt on the child.
Make sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never be attached using only the top tether.
The LATCH anchorage system can be used until the combined weight of the child plus the child restraint is 29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt alone instead of the LATCH anchorage system once the combined weight is more than 29.5 kg (65 lbs).
See Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Center Front Seat) 0 106 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 102 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) 0 106.
Child restraints built after March 2014 will be labeled with the specific child weight up to which the LATCH system can be used to install the restraint.
The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in the vehicle.
Seats and Restraints 97
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments. In this case, the safety belt must be used (with top tether where available) to secure the child restraint. See Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Center Front Seat) 0 106 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 102 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) 0 106.
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (2).
Top Tether Anchor
forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
The child restraint may have a single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Either will have a single attachment (2) to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (2) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the
98 Seats and Restraints Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations
Rear Seat
i : Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j : Seating positions with two lower
anchors.
To assist in locating the lower anchors on crew cab models, each seating position with lower anchors has two labels near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.
The top tether anchors are the loops near the top of the seatback for each rear seating position. These loops will be used to route the top tether through, as well as to secure the top tether to the vehicle. Be sure to use the anchor (loop) on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
Be sure to read the following instructions to properly install a child restraint using these loops.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 94 for additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System
{ Warning
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type child restraint properly using the anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual.
{ Warning
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor, except for the center top tether anchors in the crew cab models. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce the
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{ Warning
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around a child's neck. If the shoulder belt is locked and tightened around a child's neck, the only way to loosen the belt is to cut it.
(Continued)
Seats and Restraints 99
Warning (Continued)
Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, and tighten the belt behind the child restraint after the child restraint has been installed.
Caution
Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle's safety belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the rear seatback when the seat is occupied. Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
(Continued)
100 Seats and Restraints
Caution (Continued)
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position, before folding the seat.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint 0 94.
This system is designed to make installation of child restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use the vehicle's safety belts. Instead use the vehicle's anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. For forward facing child restraints, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor (loop), if your vehicle has one. Follow the child restraint instructions the vehicle LATCH anchor weight limits described at the beginning of this section, and the following steps:
Example -- Rear Driver Side Position
Example -- Rear Driver Side Position
2.1. For a top tether in the rear driver side position:
2.1.1. Raise the headrest.
2.1.2. Route the top tether (4) between the headrest posts, through the loop (3), behind the inboard headrest post, and under the center shoulder belt (2).
2.1.3. Then attach the top tether (4) to the top tether anchor (loop) (1) at the center rear seating position.
2.2. For a top tether in the rear center position:
2.2.1. Route the top tether (4) through the center loop (1), and behind the passenger side headrest post.
2.2.2. Then attach the top tether (4) to the top tether anchor (loop) at the rear passenger side seating position.
2.3. For a top tether in the rear passenger position:
2.3.1. Raise the headrest.
2.3.2. Route the top tether (4) between the headrest posts, through the loop on the passenger side and behind the inboard headrest post.
2.3.3. Then attach the top tether (4) to the top tether anchor (loop) (1) at the center rear seating position.
Seats and Restraints 101
3. Tighten the top tether per the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
When the top tether is properly tightened, the anchor (loop) may bend. This is normal and will not damage the vehicle.
If child restraints are installed in both outboard positions, both top tethers can be attached to the center loop. Top tethers can be attached for child restraints in all three rear seating positions at the same time, following the routing instructions above.
4. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the LATCH path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. There should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement for proper installation.
102 Seats and Restraints
Headrest Removal and Reinstallation
Removing Rear Headrests
For outboard rear seating positions, if the child restraint cannot be installed properly with the headrest in place, the headrest may be removed. See your dealer for assistance with removal, and store the removed headrests in a secure place. When the child restraint is removed, reinstall the headrest before the seating position is used.
Reinstalling Rear Headrests
To reinstall the headrest:
1. Insert the headrest posts into the holes in the top of the seatback with the longer chrome plated post toward the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Push the headrest all the way down until it contacts the top of the seatback.
Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the LATCH system is working properly after a crash, see your dealer to have the system inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
If the child restraint or vehicle seat position does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint 0 94.
Double Cab
1. Remove the headrest prior to installing a forward-facing child restraint in an outboard rear seating position. See "Headrest Removal and Reinstallation"
under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
Seats and Restraints 103
Position the release button on the buckle, away from the child restraint system, so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
104 Seats and Restraints
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
7. For forward-facing child restraints, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor (loop). Refer to the child restraint instructions, the vehicle LATCH anchor weight limits and instructions listed in Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96.
8. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it. Reinstall the headrest before the seating position is used. See "Headrest Removal and Reinstallation" under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96 for additional information on installing the headrest properly.
Crew Cab
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
Seats and Restraints 105
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle, away from the child restraint system, so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
106 Seats and Restraints
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96 for more information on using the top tether anchors.
7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
For outboard rear seating positions, if the child restraint cannot be installed properly with the headrest in place, the headrest may be
removed. See your dealer for assistance with removal, and store the removed headrest in a secure place. When the child restraint is removed, reinstall the headrest before the seating position is used. For reinstallation instructions, see "Headrest Removal and Reinstallation" under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96.
Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Center Front Seat)
{ Warning
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position.
Securing Child Restraints (With the Safety Belt in the Front Passenger Seat)
With Passenger Sensing System
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 94.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System 0 82 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 137 for more information on this, including important safety information.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
Even if the passenger sensing system, if equipped, has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System 0 82 for additional information.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
If a child restraint uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96 for top tether anchor locations.
Seats and Restraints 107
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
When using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position, follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the following instructions:
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. Move the seat upward or the seatback to an upright position, if needed, to get a tight installation of the child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system, if equipped, has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator in the passenger
108 Seats and Restraints
airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 137.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button, away from the child restraint system, so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt, if needed.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the child restraint manufacturer recommends using a top tether anchor, attach the top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96.
8. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the vehicle is equipped with a passenger sensing system, and when the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
Seats and Restraints 109
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see "If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint" under Passenger Sensing System 0 82 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
With Airbag On-Off Switch
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 94.
There may be a switch on the instrument panel endcap that you can use to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag. See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 80 for more information, including important safety information.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
110 Seats and Restraints
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the airbag switch has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the front outboard passenger frontal airbag could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 135 for more information, including important safety information.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
If a child restraint uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
When using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position, follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the following instructions:
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. Move the seat upward or the seatback to an upright position, if needed, to get a tight installation of the child restraint.
When the airbag off switch (if equipped) has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator in the airbag off light should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Airbag On-Off Light 0 136.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt, if needed.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Seats and Restraints 111
Position the release button, away from the child restraint system, so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
112 Seats and Restraints
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the child restraint manufacturer recommends using a top tether anchor, attach the top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96.
8. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
If you turned the airbag off with the switch (if equipped), turn on the front outboard passenger airbag
when you remove the child restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger airbag risk group. See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 80 for more information, including important safety information.
Heavy-Duty Crew Cab Only
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 94.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
airbag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
If a child restraint uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
When using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position, follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the following instructions:
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. Move the seat upward or the seatback to an upright position, if needed, to get a tight installation of the child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
Seats and Restraints 113
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button, away from the child restraint system, so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
114 Seats and Restraints
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
7. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 96 for more information on using the top tether anchors.
8. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Storage
Storage Compartments Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 115 Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 115 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 116 Center Console Storage . . . . . . 116 Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 117
Additional Storage Features Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Storage Compartments
{ Warning
Do not store heavy or sharp objects in storage compartments. In a crash, these objects may cause the cover to open and could result in injury.
Instrument Panel Storage
If equipped, there is storage under the climate control system.
Storage 115
To access, pull down on the handle. Card Holder If equipped, there is a card holder on the front instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Glove Box
To access the upper glove box, unlock with the key and pull up on the handle.
If equipped, there is a USB port in the upper glove box.
To access the lower glove box, pull down on the handle.
116 Storage
Cupholders
Front
There may be cupholders on the center front seat console armrest. Rear
Sunglasses Storage
Center Console Storage
If equipped, pull the rear seat armrest down to access the cupholders.
If equipped, sunglasses storage is on the overhead console. Press the fixed button on the cover and release to access.
Bench Seat
If equipped, pull the front center seat armrest down to access the storage area with cupholders.
Press the button and lift to open. There is a removable divider.
If equipped, there are dual USB ports, an accessory power outlet, and an auxiliary jack inside.
Floor Console Storage
Storage 117
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Tie-Downs
Bucket Seat
If equipped, press the latch and lift
to open. Depending on the options
there may be a tote compartment,
accessory power outlet, auxiliary
jack, and USB port(s) inside. There
are openings for power cords on the
edge of the storage area.
Power Outlets 0 124 USB Port
See
,
(Base Radio) 0 199 USB Port
or
(Base Radio with Touchscreen)
0 201
Auxiliary Jack 0 207
, and
.
If equipped with the uplevel radio,
see the infotainment manual.
If equipped with front seat floor console storage, unlock with the ignition key, press the button, and lift to open.
The vehicle may be equipped with cargo tie-downs.
Any of the nine holes inside the truck bed can be used for tie-downs.
The maximum load is 113 kg (250 lb) per tie-down.
118 Storage
Caution The truck bed walls will collapse if the tie-downs are overloaded.
To install: 1. Insert a tie-down loop
assembly until it is flush with the truck bed wall. 2. Turn the tie-down loop clockwise to tighten. The tie-down will be hard to turn until the toggle moves past the installation point on the toggle guide.
3. Fasten the tie-down firmly by hand only. Do not use tools.
To remove:
1. Remove the tie-down loop completely by turning counterclockwise while holding the backing plate against the truck bed wall.
2. Pull the backing plate away from the truck bed wall until a click is heard. This locks the toggle into position on the toggle guide.
3. Push the backing plate against the truck bed wall. This allows the toggle nut to spin.
4. Remove the backing plate, toggle guide, and toggle nut from the truck bed wall completely.
5. Reinstall the tie-down loop through the backing plate into the toggle nut for reuse.
Instruments and Controls
Controls Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 120 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 121 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 121 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 122 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Instruments and Controls 119
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 134 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 135 Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Charging System Light . . . . . . . 138 Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 138 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . 141 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . 141 Hill Descent Control Light . . . . 141 Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Light (2500/3500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light (1500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 142 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . 143 Traction Control System (TCS)/ StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 144 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 144 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . 145 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 145
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 145
Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Vehicle Messages Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Battery Voltage and Charging Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Brake System Messages . . . . . 151 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . 151 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . 151 Engine Cooling System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . 152 Engine Power Messages . . . . . 153 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . . 153 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 153 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Object Detection System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Ride Control System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Airbag System Messages . . . . 155 Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . . 155 Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Steering System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
120 Instruments and Controls
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Transmission Messages . . . . . . 157 Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . 160 Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . 160
Vehicle Personalization Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 160
Universal Remote System Universal Remote System . . . . 168 Universal Remote System Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Universal Remote System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down.
3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Tilt and Telescoping Steering Wheel
To adjust the tilt and telescoping steering wheel, if equipped: 1. Push the lever (1) down to
move the steering wheel forward or rearward. Lift the lever up to lock the wheel in place. 2. Pull the lever (2) toward you to move the steering wheel up or down, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Steering Wheel Controls
Instruments and Controls 121
: Press to reject an incoming
i
call or end a current call. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system when not on a call.
or : Press to go to the
op
previous or next menu option.
or : Press to go to the next or
wx
previous selection.
V : Press to select a highlighted
menu option.
1. Favorite: When on a radio source, press to select the next or previous favorite. When on a media source, press to select the next or previous track.
2. Volume: Press to increase or decrease the volume.
Heated Steering Wheel
If equipped, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
: For vehicles with OnStar® or a
gBluetooth® system, press to interact
with those systems. See OnStar Overview 0 486, Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base Radio) 0 221 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls Base Radio) 0 217 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 216 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 226, or "Bluetooth (Overview)" in the infotainment manual.
The favorite and volume switches are on the back of the steering wheel.
( : If equipped, press to turn it on or
off. A light next to the button displays when the feature is turned on.
The steering wheel takes about three minutes to start heating.
122 Instruments and Controls
Horn To sound the horn, press a on the
steering wheel.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper control is on the turn signal lever. The windshield wipers are controlled
by turning the band with z on it. 1 : Fast wipes. w : Slow wipes. 3 INT : Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. OFF : Turns the windshield wipers off.
8 : For a single wipe, turn to 8,
then release. For several wipes,
hold the band on 8 longer.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced. See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 384.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. An internal circuit breaker to the motor will stop the motor until it cools down.
Wiper Parking
If the ignition is put in OFF while the
wipers are on w, 1, or 3 INT,
they will immediately stop.
If the windshield wiper lever is then moved to OFF before the driver door is opened or within 10 minutes, the wipers will restart and move to the base of the windshield.
If the ignition is put in OFF while the wipers are performing wipes due to windshield washing, the wipers continue to run until they reach the base of the windshield.
Windshield Washer
{ Warning
In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.
L (Washer Fluid) : Push the m
paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the turn signal lever, to spray washer fluid and activate the wipers. The wipers will continue until the paddle is released or the maximum wash time is reached. When the paddle is released, additional wipes may occur depending on how long the windshield washer had been activated. See Washer Fluid 0 375 for information on filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). The compass receives
its heading and other information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speed information.
The compass system is designed to operate for a certain number of miles or degrees of turn before needing a signal from the GPS satellites. When the compass display shows CAL, drive the vehicle for a short distance in an open area where it can receive a GPS signal. The compass system will automatically determine when a GPS signal is restored and provide a heading again. See Compass Messages 0 151 for the messages that may be displayed for the compass.
Clock
Setting the Time and Date with Faceplate Controls
To set the time or date:
1. Select SETTINGS from the Home Page, then select Time and Date.
Instruments and Controls 123
2. Select the desired function.
3. Turn the MENU knob to increase or decrease the value.
4. Press the MENU knob to go to the next value. After the last value is selected, the system will update and return to the Settings menu. Press BACK
o
to go to the last menu and save the changes.
Auto Set requires an OnStar subscription.
If auto timing is set, the time displayed on the clock may not update immediately when driving into a new time zone.
To set the clock display:
1. Select SETTINGS from the Home Page, then select Time and Date.
2. Select Clock Display.
3. Turn the MENU knob to Off or On.
4. Press the MENU knob to select.
Press BACK to go to the last
o
menu and save the changes.
Setting the Time and Date with Touchscreen Controls
To set the time:
1. Touch the SETTINGS screen button from the Home Page, then touch Time and Date.
2. Touch Set Time and touch
«
or to increase or decrease
ª
hours, minutes, and AM or PM. Touch 1224 Hr for 12 or 24 hour clock.
3. Touch the } or 0 screen
button to go back to the previous menu.
Auto Set requires an OnStar subscription.
If auto timing is set, the time displayed on the clock may not update immediately when driving into a new time zone.
To set the date:
124 Instruments and Controls
1. Touch the SETTINGS screen button from the Home Page, then touch Time and Date.
2. Touch Set Date and touch
«
or to increase or decrease
ª
month, day, or year.
3. Touch the } or 0 screen
button to go back to the previous menu.
To set the clock display:
1. Touch the SETTINGS screen button and touch Time and Date.
2. Touch Clock Display and touch OFF or ON to turn the clock display off or on.
3. Touch the } or 0 screen
button to go back to the previous menu.
Power Outlets
Power Outlets 12 Volt Direct Current
Accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cell phone, MP3 player, etc.
The vehicle may have up to four accessory power outlets.
Vehicles with a Center Console
. One or two in front of the cupholders on the center console.
. One inside the center console.
. One on the rear of the center console.
Vehicles with Bench Seats
. One on the center stack below the climate control system.
. One or two in the storage area on the bench seat.
Lift the cover to access and replace when not in use.
The power outlets on the center stack and in front of the cupholders are powered at all times. The power outlets inside the storage area and on the rear of the console are powered when the ignition is in ON/ RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RAP is active.
{ Warning
Power is always supplied to the outlets. Do not leave electrical equipment plugged in when the vehicle is not in use because the vehicle could catch fire and cause injury or death.
Caution
Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the vehicle is off will drain the battery. Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 15 amp rating.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could overload vehicle or adapter fuses. If a problem is experienced, see your dealer.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 345.
Caution
Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, such as cell phone charge cords.
Instruments and Controls 125
Power Outlet 110/120 Volt Alternating Current
Base Shown, Uplevel Similar If equipped with this power outlet, it can be used to plug in electrical equipment that uses a maximum limit of 150 watts. For vehicles with a center console, the 110/120 volt power outlet is in front of the cupholders in the center console. For vehicles with bench seats, the 110/120 volt power outlet is on the center stack.
An indicator light on the outlet turns on to show it is in use. The light comes on when the ignition is in ON/RUN, equipment requiring less than 150 watts is plugged into the outlet, and no system fault is detected.
The indicator light does not come on when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or if the equipment is not fully seated into the outlet.
If equipment is connected using more than 150 watts or a system fault is detected, a protection circuit shuts off the power supply and the indicator light turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug the item and plug it back in or turn the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) off and then back on. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271.
The power outlet is not designed for the following, and may not work properly if they are plugged in:
. Equipment with high initial peak wattage, such as compressor-driven refrigerators and electric power tools.
126 Instruments and Controls
. Other equipment requiring an extremely stable power supply, such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets and touch sensor lamps.
. Medical equipment.
Wireless Charging
The vehicle may have wireless charging on top of the center console. See Center Console Storage 0 116. The system wirelessly charges one PMA or Qi compatible mobile device.
To check for phone or other device compatibility:
. In the U.S., see my.chevrolet.com/learn.
. In Canada, see gmtotalconnect.ca.
. Or, see your dealer for details.
{ Warning
Wireless charging can affect the operation of an implanted pacemaker or other medical devices. If you have one, it is recommended to consult with your doctor before using the wireless charging system.
The vehicle must be in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP). The wireless charging feature may not correctly indicate charging when the vehicle is in RAP. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271.
The operating temperature is 20 °C (4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for the charging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to 35 °C (95 °F) for the phone.
{ Warning
Remove all metal objects from the charging pad before charging your mobile device. Metal objects,
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
such as coins, keys, rings, or paper clips, between the phone and charging pad will become very hot. On the rare occasion that the charging system does not detect a metal object, and the object gets wedged between the phone and charger, remove the phone and allow the metallic object to cool before removing it from the charging pad, to prevent burns.
To charge a mobile device:
1. Remove all objects from the charging pad. The system may not charge if there are any objects on the charging pad.
2. Place the mobile device face
up on the @ symbol on the
charging pad.
3. The } will display on the V
on the infotainment screen. This indicates that the mobile device is properly positioned and charging. If a phone is placed on the charging pad
and } does not display,
remove the phone from the pad, turn 180 degrees and wait three seconds before placing/ aligning the phone on the pad again.
Instruments and Controls 127
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
128 Instruments and Controls Instrument Cluster
Base Cluster (English Shown, Metric Similar)
Instruments and Controls 129
Uplevel Cluster (English Shown, Metric Similar)
130 Instruments and Controls
Cluster Menu (Uplevel Cluster) There is an interactive display area in the center of the instrument cluster.
Use the right steering wheel control to open and scroll through the different items and displays. Press to access the cluster
o
applications. Use or to scroll
wx
through the list of available applications. Not all applications will be available on all vehicles. . Info App. This is where the
selected Driver Information Center (DIC) displays can be
viewed. See "Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)" in the Index.
. Audio
. Phone
. Navigation
. Settings
Audio
Press V to select the Audio app,
then press to enter the Audio
p
menu. In the Audio menu browse for music, select from the favorites, or change the audio source. In the main view, use or to change
wx
the station or go to the next or previous track.
Phone
Press V to select the Phone app,
then press to enter the Phone
p
menu. In the Phone menu, if there is no active phone call, view recent calls, scroll through contacts, select from the favorites, or change the
phone source. If there is an active call, mute the phone or switch to handset operation.
Navigation
Press V to select the Navigation
app, then press to enter the
p
Navigation menu. If there is no active route, you can resume the last route and turn the voice prompts on/off. If there is an active route, you can cancel the route.
Settings
Press V to select the Settings app.
Use or to scroll through items
wx
in the Settings menu.
Units : Press while Units is
p
displayed to enter the Units menu. Choose English or metric units by
pressing V while the desired item is
highlighted. A checkmark will be displayed next to the selected item.
Info Pages : Press while Info
p
Pages is displayed to enter the Info Pages menu and select the items to
be displayed in the Info app. See
"Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)" in the Index.
Speed Warning : The Speed Warning display allows the driver to set a speed that they do not want to exceed. To set the Speed Warning,
press when Speed Warning is
p displayed, or press V on the main
view to set the speed value. Press
or to adjust the value. Press
wV to
x
set
the
speed.
Once
the
speed
is set, this feature can be turned off
by pressing V while viewing this
page. If the selected speed limit is
exceeded, a pop-up warning is
displayed with a chime.
Software Information : Press
p
while Software Information is highlighted to display open source software information.
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle's speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
Instruments and Controls
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either kilometers or miles.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last reset.
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Fuel Gauge
Metric
English
131
132 Instruments and Controls
When the ignition is on, the fuel gauge indicates about how much fuel is left in the tank.
There is an arrow near the fuel gauge pointing to the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on.
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light comes on. There still is a little fuel left, but the vehicle should be refueled soon.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with the fuel gauge:
. At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gauge reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank's capacity to fill the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while turning a corner or speeding up.
. The gauge takes a few seconds to stabilize after the ignition is turned on, and goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off.
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Metric
English
The engine oil pressure gauge shows the engine oil pressure in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.
Oil pressure can vary with engine speed, outside temperature, coolant temperature, and oil viscosity.
A reading outside the normal operating range can be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure. Check the vehicle's oil as soon as possible. See "OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE" under Engine Oil Messages 0 152 and Engine Oil 0 359.
Caution
Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. Driving with the engine oil low can also damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Check the oil level as soon as possible. Add oil if required, but if the oil level is within the operating range and the oil pressure is still low, have the vehicle serviced. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil.
Instruments and Controls 133
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Metric
English
This gauge measures the temperature of the vehicle's engine coolant.
While driving under normal operating conditions, if the needle moves into the red warning area, the engine is too hot. Pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
134 Instruments and Controls
Voltmeter Gauge
When the ignition is on, this gauge indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, this gauge shows the condition of the charging system. The gauge can transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading. This is normal. If the vehicle is operating outside the normal operating range, the charging system light comes on. See Charging System Light 0 138 for more information. The voltmeter gauge may also read lower when in fuel economy mode. This is normal.
Readings outside the normal operating range can also occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power.
The vehicle can only be driven for a short time with the readings outside the normal operating range. If the vehicle must be driven, turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
Readings outside the normal operating range indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light There is a driver safety belt reminder light on the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind the driver to fasten their safety belt. Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle may continue several times if the driver remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving. If the driver safety belt is buckled, neither the light nor the chime comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light There may be a passenger safety belt reminder light near the passenger airbag status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System 0 82.
For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt reminder light, when the vehicle is started this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind passengers to fasten their safety belt. Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle continues several times if the passenger remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving. If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on.
Instruments and Controls 135
The front passenger safety belt reminder light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device. To turn off the reminder light and/or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an electrical problem with the airbag system. The system check includes the airbag sensor(s), passenger sensing system (if equipped), the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring, and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System 0 74.
The airbag readiness light comes on for several seconds when the vehicle is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also come on. See Airbag System Messages 0 155.
136 Instruments and Controls
Airbag On-Off Light
If the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch, it also has a passenger airbag status indicator located in the overhead console.
United States
the on or off symbol, will light to let you know the status of the front outboard passenger frontal airbag.
When the front outboard passenger frontal airbag is manually turned off using the airbag on-off switch on the instrument panel endcap, the OFF indicator light or the off symbol will come on and stay on as a reminder that the airbag has been turned off. This light will go off when the airbag has been turned on. See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 80 for more information, including important safety information.
Canada and Mexico
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will light for several seconds as a system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator ON or OFF, or either
{ Warning
If the front outboard passenger frontal airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government, that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Do not turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group identified by the national government. See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 80 for more information, including important safety information.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
example, the front outboard passenger frontal airbag could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 135 for more information, including important safety information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit, it means that the front outboard passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate). See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 80 for more information, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the airbag on-off switch. See your dealer for service.
Instruments and Controls 137
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If the vehicle has the passenger sensing system, the overhead console will have a passenger airbag status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System 0 82 for important safety information.
United States
Canada and Mexico When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol, to let you know the status of the front outboard passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the front outboard passenger frontal airbag is allowed to inflate.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong
(Continued)
138 Instruments and Controls
Warning (Continued)
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 135 for more information, including important safety information.
Charging System Light
The charging system light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show the light is working. It should go out when the engine is started. If the light stays on, or comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your dealer. Driving while this light is on could drain the battery.
When this light comes on, or is flashing, the Driver Information Center (DIC) also displays a message.
See Battery Voltage and Charging Messages 0 150.
If a short distance must be driven with the light on, be sure to turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light)
This light is part of the vehicle's emission control on-board diagnostic system. If this light is on while the engine is running, a malfunction has been detected and the vehicle may require service. The light should come on to show that it is working when the ignition is in ON/RUN and the engine is not running. See Ignition Positions 0 268.
Malfunctions are often indicated by the system before any problem is noticeable. Being aware of the light and seeking service promptly when it comes on may prevent damage.
Caution
If the vehicle is driven continually with this light on, the emission control system may not work as well, the fuel economy may be lower, and the vehicle may not run smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Caution
Modifications to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system, or the use of replacement tires that do not meet the original tire specifications, can cause this light to come on. This could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could also affect the vehicle's ability to pass an Emissions Inspection/ Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications 0 352.
If the light is flashing : A malfunction has been detected that could damage the emission control system and increase vehicle emissions. Diagnosis and service may be required.
To help prevent damage, reduce vehicle speed and avoid hard accelerations and uphill grades.
Instruments and Controls 139
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash, find a safe place to park. Turn the vehicle off and wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous guidelines and see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is on steady : A malfunction has been detected. Diagnosis and service may be required.
Check the following:
. If fuel has been added to the vehicle using the capless funnel adapter, make sure that it has been removed. See "Filling the Tank with a Portable Gas Can" under Filling the Tank 0 313. The diagnostic system can detect if the adapter has been left installed in the vehicle, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the adapter removed may turn off the light.
. Poor fuel quality can cause inefficient engine operation and poor driveability, which may go away once the engine is warmed up. If this occurs, change the fuel brand. It may require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. See Fuel 0 311.
If the light remains on, see your dealer. Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs If the vehicle requires an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test, the test equipment will likely connect to the vehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC).
The DLC is under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. Connecting devices that are
140 Instruments and Controls
not used to perform an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test or to service the vehicle may affect vehicle operation. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 345. See your dealer if assistance is needed.
The vehicle may not pass inspection if:
. The light is on when the engine is running.
. The light does not come on when the ignition is in ON/RUN while the engine is off.
. Critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed. If this happens, the vehicle would not be ready for inspection and might require several days of routine driving before the system is ready for inspection. This can happen if the 12-volt battery has recently been replaced or run down, or if the vehicle has been recently serviced.
See your dealer if the vehicle will not pass or cannot be made ready for the test.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle brake system consists of two hydraulic circuits. If one circuit is not working, the remaining circuit can still work to stop the vehicle. For normal braking performance, both circuits need to be working.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem. Have the brake system inspected right away.
Metric
English
This light should come on briefly when the engine is started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light stays on if the parking brake
does not fully release. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it means the vehicle has a brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push, or the pedal can go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing the Vehicle 0 436.
{ Warning
The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service.
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started. If the light does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. If the light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn off the vehicle. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. A chime may also sound when the light comes on steady. If the ABS light is the only light on, the vehicle has regular brakes, but the antilock brakes are not functioning.
Instruments and Controls 141
If both the ABS and the brake system warning light are on, the vehicle's antilock brakes are not functioning and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See your dealer for service.
See Brake System Warning Light 0 140 and Brake System Messages 0 151.
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
Tow/Haul Mode Light
For vehicles with the Tow/Haul Mode feature, this light comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode has been activated. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282.
Hill Descent Control Light
The four-wheel-drive light comes on when a vehicle with a manual transfer case is shifted into four-wheel drive and the front axle engages.
Some delay between the shifting and the light coming on is normal.
See Four-Wheel Drive 0 284 for more information.
If equipped, the Hill Descent Control light comes on when the system is ready for use. When the light flashes, the system is active.
See Hill Descent Control (HDC) 0 297.
142 Instruments and Controls
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Light (2500/3500 Series)
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light (1500 Series)
Vehicle Ahead Indicator
If equipped, this light comes on briefly while starting the vehicle. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced.
This light is green if LDW is on and ready to operate.
This light changes to amber and flashes to indicate that the lane marking has been crossed without using a turn signal in that direction.
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (2500/3500 Series) 0 307.
If available, this light comes on briefly while starting the vehicle.
If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced.
This light is green if LKA is available to assist.
LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking without using the turn signal in that direction. The LKA light will turn amber.
This light is amber and flashes as a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert, to indicate that the lane marking has been crossed.
See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) (1500 Series) 0 309.
If equipped, this indicator will display green when a vehicle is detected ahead and amber when you are following a vehicle ahead much too closely. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 304.
Traction Off Light
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light then turns off.
The traction off light comes on when the Traction Control System (TCS) has been turned off by pressing and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button.
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF light come on when StabiliTrak is turned off.
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
StabiliTrak® OFF Light
Instruments and Controls 143
This light comes on when the StabiliTrak system is turned off. If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction Control System (TCS) is also off.
If StabiliTrak and TCS are off, the system does not assist in controlling the vehicle. Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak systems, and the warning light turns off.
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
If the light is on and not flashing, the TCS and potentially the StabiliTrak system have been disabled. A Driver Information Center (DIC) message may display. Check the DIC messages to determine which feature(s) is no longer functioning and whether the vehicle requires service. See Ride Control System Messages 0 154.
If the light is on and flashing, the TCS and/or the StabiliTrak system is actively working.
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off.
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. It provides information about tire pressures and the TPMS.
144 Instruments and Controls
When the Light Is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated.
A Driver Information Center (DIC) tire pressure message may also display. See Tire Messages 0 157. Stop as soon as possible, and inflate the tires to the pressure value shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure 0 405.
When the Light Flashes First and Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute and then stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. If the problem is not corrected, the light will come on at every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 408.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light is near the fuel gauge and comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on as a check to show it is working. It also comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. The light turns off when fuel is added. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced.
Security Light
serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off. If the light stays on and the engine does not start, there could be a problem with the theft-deterrent system. See Immobilizer Operation 0 45.
High-Beam On Light
This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 0 173.
The security light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle
IntelliBeam® Light
This light comes on when the IntelliBeam system, if equipped, is enabled. See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 171.
Front Fog Lamp Light
For vehicles with fog lamps, this light comes on when the fog lamps are on. The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Fog Lamps 0 176 for more information.
Instruments and Controls 145
Lamps On Reminder
Information Displays
This light comes on when the exterior lamps are in use. See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 171.
Cruise Control Light
For vehicles with cruise control, the cruise control light is white when the cruise control is on and ready, and turns green when the cruise control is set and active. The light turns off when the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control 0 298.
Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level)
The DIC displays are shown in the center of the instrument cluster. The displays show the status of many vehicle systems. The trip odometer reset stem in the instrument cluster is used to access the DIC menu items.
DIC Menu Items
Turn the trip odometer reset stem to scroll through the following menu items:
. Digital Speedometer
. Trip
. Fuel Range
. Average Fuel Economy
. Tire Pressure
. Remaining Oil Life
. Transmission Fluid Temperature
. Trailer Brake
. Hourmeter
146 Instruments and Controls
. Unit
Digital Speedometer
The speedometer shows how fast the vehicle is moving in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). The speedometer cannot be reset.
Trip
Turn the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays. The current distance traveled, in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since the last reset for the trip odometer is shown. The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip odometer is displayed.
Fuel Range
This display shows the approximate distance the vehicle can be driven without refueling. The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Fuel range cannot be reset.
Average Fuel Economy
The Average Fuel Economy display shows the approximate average liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This number reflects only the approximate average fuel economy that the vehicle has right now, and will change as driving conditions change. This number is based on the number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. Reset this display by pressing the trip odometer reset stem.
Tire Pressure
Turn the trip odometer reset stem until a vehicle with the approximate pressures of all four tires displays. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi).
See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 407 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 408.
Remaining Oil Life
Turn the trip odometer reset stem until REMAINING OIL LIFE displays. An estimate of the oil's remaining useful life is shown. REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% means 99% of the current oil life remains.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See Engine Oil Messages 0 152. The oil should be changed as soon as possible. See Engine Oil 0 359. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule. See Maintenance Schedule 0 452.
The Oil Life display must be reset after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life display at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System 0 362.
Transmission Fluid Temperature
The temperature of the automatic transmission fluid displays in either degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
Trailer Brake
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, turn the trip odometer reset stem until TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT displays.
TRAILER GAIN shows the Trailer Gain setting. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected.
TRAILER OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is displayed as a bar graph. Dashes may appear in the TRAILER OUTPUT display if a trailer is not connected.
Hourmeter
This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run.
Instruments and Controls 147
Unit
This will change the displays on the instrument cluster and DIC to either metric or English (US) measurements. To change the units, press the trip odometer reset stem when UNITS is displayed to enter the Unit menu. Turn the trip odometer reset stem to switch between English and metric. Press the trip odometer reset stem when the desired setting is displayed.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Compass 0 122.
Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
The DIC displays are shown in the center of the instrument cluster in the Info app. See Instrument Cluster 0 128. The displays show the status of many vehicle systems. The controls for the DIC are on the right steering wheel control.
or : Press to move up or
wx
down in a list. In the main view, you can press up and down to move between different info app pages.
or : Press to move between
op
the interactive display zones in the cluster.
V : Press to open a menu or select
a menu item. Press and hold to reset values on certain screens.
DIC Info Page Options
The info pages on the DIC can be turned on or off through the Settings menu.
148 Instruments and Controls
1. Press to access the cluster
o
applications.
2. Press or to scroll to the
wx
Settings application.
3. Press V to enter the
Settings menu.
4. Scroll to Info Pages and press .
p
5. Press or to move
wx
through the list of possible information displays.
6. Press V while an item is
highlighted to select or deselect that item. When an item is selected, a checkmark will appear next to it.
DIC Info Pages
The following is the list of all possible DIC info page displays. Some may not be available for your particular vehicle. Some items may not be turned on by default but can be turned on through the Settings app. See "DIC Info Page Options" earlier in this section.
Speed : Shows the vehicle speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
Trip A or Trip B : Shows the current distance traveled, in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since the trip odometer was last reset.
This also shows the approximate average liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This number is calculated based on the number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. This number reflects only the approximate average fuel economy that the vehicle has right now, and will change as driving conditions change.
Press and hold V while this display
is active to reset the trip odometer and the average fuel economy. Trip A and Trip B can also be reset by
pressing and choosing reset.
p
Fuel Range : Shows the approximate distance the vehicle can be driven without refueling. LOW will be displayed when the
vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
Oil Life : Shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is displayed, that means 99% of the current oil life remains.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See Engine Oil Messages 0 152. The oil should be changed as soon as possible. See Engine Oil 0 359. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule. See Maintenance Schedule 0 452.
The Oil Life display must be reset after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life display at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, press and
hold V for several seconds while
the Oil Life display is active. See Engine Oil Life System 0 362.
Tire Pressure : Shows the approximate pressures of all four tires. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi). If the pressure is low, the value for that tire is shown in amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 407 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 408.
Fuel Economy : The center displays the approximate instantaneous fuel economy as a number and bar graph. Displayed above the bar graph is a running average of fuel economy for the most recently traveled selected distance. Displayed below the bar graph is the best average fuel economy that has been achieved for the selected distance. The selected distance is displayed at the top of the page as "last xxx mi/km." Next to the odometer, the Active Fuel Management displays the number of
Instruments and Controls 149
cylinders the vehicle is running on. See Active Fuel Management® 0 275.
Press to select the distance or
p
reset best value. Use and to
wx choose the distance and press V.
Press w and x to select "Reset Best Score." Press V to reset the
best average fuel economy. After reset, the momentary average fuel economy will display.
The display provides information on how current driving behavior affects the running average and how well recent driving compares to the best that has been achieved for the selected distance.
Timer : This display can be used as
a timer. To start the timer, press V
while this display is active. The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was
last reset. To stop the timer, press V
briefly while this display is active and the timer is running. To reset
the timer to zero, press and hold V
while this display is active, or press and select reset.
p
Speed Limit (If Equipped) : Shows sign information, which comes from a roadway database in the onboard navigation.
Engine Hours : Shows the total number of hours the engine has run.
Transmission Fluid Temperature : Shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
Trailer Brake (If Equipped) : On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the DIC.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected.
150 Instruments and Controls
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is displayed as a bar graph. Dashes may appear in the OUTPUT display if a trailer is not connected.
Off Road : Displays vehicle pitch and roll information, road wheel angle, and four-wheel drive (4WD) status.
Blank Page : Shows no information.
Vehicle Messages
Messages displayed on the DIC indicate the status of the vehicle or some action that may be needed to correct a condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another.
The messages that do not require immediate action can be acknowledged and cleared by
pressing V or the trip odometer
reset stem on the base cluster.
The messages that require immediate action cannot be cleared until that action is performed.
All messages should be taken seriously and clearing the message does not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages and some information about them.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
Battery Voltage and Charging Messages
BATTERY LOW START VEHICLE
When the vehicle's battery is severely discharged, this message will display and four chimes will sound. Start the vehicle immediately. If the vehicle is not started and the battery continues to discharge, the climate controls, heated seats, and audio systems will shut off and the vehicle may require a jump start. These systems will function again after the vehicle is started.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the battery voltage drops below expected levels and features are disabled. Turn off all unnecessary accessory features.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument cluster. See Charging System Light 0 138. Driving with this problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible. See your dealer.
TRANSPORT MODE ON
This message is displayed when the vehicle is in transport mode. Some features can be disabled while in this mode, including Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), remote start, and the vehicle alarm system. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service to turn transport mode off.
Instruments and Controls 151
Brake System Messages
BRAKE FLUID LOW
This message is displayed when the brake fluid level is low. See Brake Fluid 0 377.
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
This message may be displayed when there is a problem with the brake boost assist system. When this message is displayed, the brake boost assist motor might be heard operating and you might notice pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal under these conditions. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, this message displays and a chime may sound when there is a problem with the ITBC system.
When this message displays, power is no longer available to the trailer brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on. If this message still displays, either your vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your dealer.
See "Integrated Trailer Brake Control System" under Towing Equipment 0 335 for more information.
Compass Messages
Dashes may be displayed if the vehicle temporarily loses communication with the Global Positioning System (GPS).
Door Ajar Messages
DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime may sound if a door is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
152 Instruments and Controls
obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays and a chime may sound if the hood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
Engine Cooling System Messages
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH ENGINE TEMP
This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 0 133. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear, have the system repaired by your dealer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine.
ENGINE OVERHEATING IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 0 133.
When towing, use Tow/Haul mode to prevent damage to the engine or transmission. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
This message displays and a chime may sound if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
Engine Oil Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message. See Engine Oil Life System 0 362 for information on how to reset the message. See Engine Oil 0 359 and Maintenance Schedule 0 452.
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
On some vehicles, this message displays when the engine oil level may be too low. Check the oil level before filling to the recommended level. If the oil is not low and this message remains on, take the vehicle to your dealer for service. See Engine Oil 0 359.
ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the engine oil becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. Stop
and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 0 133.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Engine Oil 0 359.
Engine Power Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a chime may sound when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode. See Engine Overheating 0 372 for more information.
This message also displays when the vehicle's engine power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle's ability to
Instruments and Controls 153
accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible.
Fuel System Messages
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime may sound if the fuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gauge 0 131 and Fuel 0 311.
Key and Lock Messages
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter. See
"Battery Replacement" under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 36.
Lamp Messages
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Object Detection System Messages
FORWARD COLLISION ALERT OFF
This message displays when the Forward Collision Alert has been turned off.
FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED CLEAN WINDSHIELD
This message displays when the camera is blocked. Cleaning the outside of the windshield behind the rearview mirror may correct the issue. The Lane Departure Warning
154 Instruments and Controls
(LDW), Lane Keep Assist (LKA), and Forward Collision Alert (FCA) will not operate.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING UNAVAILABLE
This message displays when attempting to activate the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system when it is temporarily unavailable. The LDW system does not need service.
This message could be due to the camera being blocked. Cleaning the outside of the windshield behind the rearview mirror may correct the issue.
LANE KEEPING ASSIST UNAVAILABLE
This message displays when the Lane Keep Assist (LKA) and Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system is temporarily unavailable. The LKA system does not need service.
This message could be due to the camera being blocked. Cleaning the outside of the windshield behind the rearview mirror may correct the issue.
PARK ASSIST OFF
This message displays when the Parking Assist system has been turned off or when there is a temporary condition causing the system to be disabled.
SERVICE FRONT CAMERA
If this message remains on after continued driving, the vehicle needs service. Do not use the Lane Keep Assist (LKA), Lane Departure Warning (LDW), and Forward Collision Alert (FCA) features. Take the vehicle to your dealer.
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
This message displays if there is a problem with the Parking Assist system. Do not use this system to help you park. See your dealer for service.
Ride Control System Messages
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If this message displays, it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system. If you see this message, try to reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should see your dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive; however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System (TCS). When this message displays, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See your dealer for service. See Traction Control/ Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
STABILITRAK INITIALIZING
This message may come on if the StabiliTrak system has not fully initialized because of road conditions or the incorrect tire size. When the StabiliTrak system is fully initialized, the message will turn off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295. If this message continues to be displayed for multiple ignition cycles and on different road surfaces, see your dealer for service.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the traction control has been turned off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
TRACTION CONTROL ON
This message displays when the traction control is active. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
STABILITRAK OFF
This message displays when the StabiliTrak system has been turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Instruments and Controls 155
To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system, you should normally leave StabiliTrak on. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
STABILITRAK OFF may also display when the stability control has been automatically disabled. The following conditions can cause this message to appear:
. The system is overheating, which could occur if StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended period of time.
. The brake system warning light is on. See Brake System Warning Light 0 140.
. The stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions.
. An engine or vehicle-related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service. See your dealer.
. The transfer case is in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present.
Airbag System Messages
SERVICE AIRBAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
Safety Belt Messages
SHIFTER LOCKED. BUCKLE SEATBELT
This message displays if the vehicle is equipped with the Safety Belt Assurance System and the driver and front outboard passenger, if present, safety belts are not buckled. The vehicle will not shift out of P (Park). Buckle the safety belt(s) to unlock the shift lever.
This system may not allow the vehicle to shift out of P (Park) if an object -- such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
156 Instruments and Controls
or other electronic device -- is on the front outboard passenger seat. If this happens, remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt.
If the driver or front outboard passenger unbuckles their safety belt while driving, the safety belt reminder chime and light(s) will come on. See Safety Belt Reminders 0 134.
SHIFTER UNLOCKED. BRAKE TO SHIFT
This message displays when the Safety Belt Assurance System times out and allows the vehicle to be shifted out of P (Park) after 30 seconds following brake apply. See "Safety Belts" and "Child Restraints" in the Index for information about the importance of proper restraint use.
This system may not function properly if the airbag readiness light is on. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 135.
Security Messages
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not restart, so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine. See Immobilizer Operation 0 45.
Steering System Messages
STEERING ASSIST IS REDUCED DRIVE WITH CARE
This message may display if a problem occurs with the electric power steering system. If this message appears, steering effort may be slightly higher than normal. The vehicle is still safe to drive. Use caution while in reduced assist mode. If this message is persistent or appears repeatedly, take the vehicle to your dealer for service. See Steering 0 249.
SERVICE POWER STEERING (1500 Series)
This message displays when there is a problem with electric power steering. If this message displays and a reduction in steering performance or loss of power steering assistance is noticed. See your dealer. See Steering 0 249.
SERVICE POWER STEERING (2500/3500 Series)
This message displays when there is a problem with the power steering assist system. If this message displays the vehicle can be driven but should be repaired as soon as possible. See your dealer. See Steering 0 249.
Tire Messages
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
If equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays if a part on the system is not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light 0 143. Several conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 408. If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your dealer.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
If equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays when the system is relearning the tire positions on your vehicle. The tire positions must be relearned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection 0 411, Tire Rotation 0 412, Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 407, and Tire Pressure 0 405.
Instruments and Controls 157
TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
If equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle's tires is low. This message also displays with a vehicle picture to indicate the location of the low tire. The low tire pressure warning light will also come on. See Tire Pressure Light 0 143. You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tires 0 397, Vehicle Load Limits 0 259, and Tire Pressure 0 405. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147.
Transmission Messages
4WD OFF
If equipped with four-wheel drive, this message displays when the four-wheel-drive system is temporarily disabled due to an overheated condition. The vehicle will run in two-wheel drive when this message is present. Once the four-wheel-drive system cools down, the message turns off and the four-wheel-drive system returns to normal operation.
4WD SHIFT IN PROGRESS
This message will display while the four-wheel-drive system is shifting.
FOR 4WD LOW SHIFT TO NEUTRAL
If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 is
n
requested, and the vehicle speed is correct, but the transmission is not in N (Neutral), this message will display until the transmission is shifted to N (Neutral).
158 Instruments and Controls
FOR 4WD LOW SLOW TO XXX
If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 is
n
requested, but the vehicle speed is too high, this message will display until the correct vehicle speed is reached.
GRADE BRAKING ACTIVE
This message displays when grade braking has been activated while driving on downhill grades. This message will only appear the first time the feature is activated in an ignition cycle. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282, Automatic Transmission 0 277, and Cruise Control 0 298.
GRADE BRAKING OFF
This message displays when grade braking has been disabled with the Tow/Haul Mode button on the end of the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282, Automatic Transmission 0 277, and Cruise Control 0 298.
GRADE BRAKING ON
This message displays when grade braking has been enabled with the Tow/Haul Mode button on the end of the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282, Automatic Transmission 0 277, and Cruise Control 0 298.
SERVICE 4WD
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, this message may display if a problem occurs with the four-wheel-drive system. If this message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Make sure the key is in the LOCK/ OFF position for at least one minute, then restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the four-wheel-drive system needs service. See your dealer.
SHIFT DENIED
This message displays when the shift lever is in M (Manual Mode) and a transmission range has been selected that is unavailable at the current vehicle speed.
TO EXIT 4WD LOW SHIFT TO NEUTRAL
If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 is
n
requested, and the vehicle speed is correct, but the transmission is not in N (Neutral), this message will display until the transmission is shifted to N (Neutral).
TO EXIT 4WD LOW SLOW TO XXX
If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 is
n
requested, but the vehicle speed is too high, this message will display until the correct vehicle speed is reached.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays and a chime may sound if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level.
When towing, use Tow/Haul Mode to prevent damage to the engine or transmission. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282.
VEHICLE IN 4WD LOW
This message will display if the
vehicle is driven in 4 for about
n
10 minutes above 72 km/h (45 mph).
Instruments and Controls 159
Vehicle Reminder Messages
CHECK TRAILER WIRING
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, this message may display and a chime may sound when one of the following conditions exists:
. A trailer with electric brakes becomes disconnected from the vehicle.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stopped, this message clears itself after a short time.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving, this message stays on until the ignition is turned off.
. There is a short in the wiring to the electric trailer brakes.
When this message displays, power is no longer available to the trailer brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on. This message clears if the trailer is reconnected. This message also clears if you acknowledge it. If this message still displays, either the vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your dealer.
See "Integrated Trailer Brake Control System" under Towing Equipment 0 335.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when ice conditions are possible.
TRAILER CONNECTED
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, this message displays briefly when a trailer with electric or electric over hydraulic brakes is first connected to the vehicle.
160 Instruments and Controls
This message clears itself after several seconds. This message also clears if you acknowledge it. After this message clears, the TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT displays appear in the DIC.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147 and "Integrated Trailer Brake Control System" under Towing Equipment 0 335.
Vehicle Speed Messages
REDUCE SPEED FOR HILL DESCENT CONTROL
This message displays when attempting to enable Hill Descent Control (HDC) when the vehicle speed is too high. See Hill Descent Control (HDC) 0 297.
Washer Fluid Messages
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Washer Fluid 0 375 for more information.
Vehicle Personalization
Use the audio system controls to access the personalization menus for customizing vehicle features.
The following are all possible personalization features. Depending on the vehicle, some may not be available.
Base Radio Audio System Controls
MENU : Press to enter menus and select menu items. Turn to scroll through the menus.
BACK : Press to return to the
o
previous menu or exit.
Base Radio with Touchscreen Audio System Controls
{ : Press to access the Home
Page Menu.
Q or R : Touch to scroll through the
menus or setup items.
0 : Touch to exit or return to the
previous screen or menu.
Uplevel Radio Audio System Controls
1. Touch the desired feature to display a list of available options.
2. Touch to select the desired feature setting.
3. Press BACK on the
o faceplate or the 0 screen
button to return to the previous menu or exit.
Turn the vehicle to ON/RUN to access the Settings menu, then select SETTINGS from the Home page on the infotainment system display.
Personalization Menus
The following list of menu items may be available:
. Time and Date
. Language (Language)
. Rear Seat Reminder
. Teen Driver
. Valet Mode
. Radio
Instruments and Controls 161
. Vehicle . Bluetooth . Apple CarPlay . Android Auto . USB Auto Launch . Voice . Display . Rear Camera . Return to Factory Settings . Software Information
Detailed information for each menu follows.
Time and Date
Manually set the time and date. See Clock 0 123.
Language (Language)
Select Language, then select from the available language(s).
The selected language will display on the system, and voice recognition will reflect the selected language.
Rear Seat Reminder
This allows for a chime and a message `Look in Rear Seat' when the rear door has been opened before or during operation of the vehicle.
Select Off or On.
Teen Driver
See "Teen Driver" under "Settings" in the infotainment manual.
Valet Mode
This will lock the infotainment system and steering wheel controls. It may also limit access to vehicle storage locations (if equipped).
To enable valet mode:
1. Enter a four-digit code on the keypad.
2. Select Enter to go to the confirmation screen.
3. Re-enter the four-digit code.
Press LOCK or UNLOCK to lock or unlock the system. Press Back to go back to the previous menu.
162 Instruments and Controls
Radio
Select and the following may display:
. Manage Favorites
. Number of Favorites Shown
. Audible Touch Feedback
. Text Scroll
. Tone Settings
. Auto Volume
. Maximum Startup Volume
. Audio Cue Volume
Manage Favorites
This allows favorites to be edited. See "Manage Favorites" in "Radio Setup" under Home Page (Base Radio) 0 186 or Home Page (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 188 or "Manage Favorites" in "Settings" under "Radio" in the infotainment manual.
Number of Favorites Shown
Select to set the number of favorites to display.
Select the desired number or select Auto and the infotainment system will automatically adjust the number of favorites shown.
Audible Touch Feedback
This allows Audible Touch Feedback to be turned on or off.
Select Off or On.
Text Scroll
Select to see text scroll on the screen.
Select Off or On.
Tone Settings
Select to adjust the radio tone. See "Tone Settings" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Auto Volume
This feature adjusts the volume based on vehicle speed and ambient noise.
Select Off, Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, or High.
Maximum Startup Volume
This feature sets the maximum startup volume. If the vehicle is started and the volume is greater than this level, the volume is adjusted to this level. To set the maximum startup volume, turn the MENU knob or press + or to increase or decrease.
Audio Cue Volume
This feature sets the volume of audio files played at system startup and shutdown.
Select On, then press + or to increase or decrease the volume.
Vehicle
Select and the following may display:
. Climate and Air Quality
. Collision/Detection Systems
. Comfort and Convenience
. Lighting
. Power Door Locks
. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
Climate and Air Quality
Select and the following may display: . Auto Fan Max Speed . Auto Rear Defog
Auto Fan Max Speed
This feature will set the maximum auto fan speed.
Select Low, Medium, or High.
Auto Rear Defog
This feature will automatically turn on the rear defogger when it is cold outside.
Select Off or On.
Collision/Detection Systems
Select and the following may display: . Alert Type . Park Assist
Alert Type
This feature will set crash alerts to beeps or seat vibrations. This setting affects all crash alerts
Instruments and Controls 163
including Forward Collision, Lane Departure Warning, and Park Assist alerts.
Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.
Park Assist
If equipped, this feature can assist in backing up and parking the vehicle. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 302.
Select Off, On, or On with Towbar.
Comfort and Convenience
Select and the following may display:
. Auto Memory Recall
. Easy Exit Options
. Chime Volume
. Reverse Tilt Mirror
. Auto Mirror Folding
Auto Memory Recall
This feature automatically recalls the current driver's previously stored 1 or 2 button positions when entering the vehicle. See Memory Seats 0 61.
Select On or Off.
Easy Exit Options
This feature moves the seat rearward automatically allowing the driver more room to exit the vehicle. See Memory Seats 0 61.
Select On or Off.
Chime Volume
This allows the selection of the chime volume level.
Turn the MENU knob, touch + or to adjust the volume, or select Normal or High.
Reverse Tilt Mirror
When on, the driver and/or passenger mirrors will tilt downward when the vehicle is shifted to R (Reverse) to improve visibility of the ground near the rear wheels.
Select Off, On - Driver and Passenger, On - Driver, or On Passenger.
164 Instruments and Controls
Auto Mirror Folding
When on, the outside rearview mirrors will automatically fold or unfold when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock button is pressed and held.
Select Off or On.
Lighting
Select and the following may display:
. Vehicle Locator Lights
. Exit Lighting
Vehicle Locator Lights
This feature will flash the exterior lamps and allows some of the exterior lamps and most of the interior lamps to turn on briefly
when K on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed to locate the vehicle.
Select Off or On.
Exit Lighting
This allows the selection of how long the exterior lamps stay on when leaving the vehicle when it is dark outside.
Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds, or 120 Seconds.
Power Door Locks
Select and the following may display:
. Auto Door Unlock
. Delayed Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
This allows selection of which of the doors will automatically unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park) with an automatic transmission or when the vehicle is turned off with a manual transmission.
Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.
Delayed Door Lock
When on, this feature will delay the locking of the doors. To override the delay, press the power door lock switch on the door.
Select Off or On.
Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
Select and the following may display: . Remote Unlock Light Feedback . Remote Lock Feedback . Remote Door Unlock . Remote Start Auto Cool Seats . Remote Start Auto Heat Seats . Remote Window Operation . Passive Door Unlock . Passive Door Lock . Remote Left in Vehicle Alert
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
When on, the exterior lamps will flash when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Select Off or Flash Lights.
Remote Lock Feedback
This allows selection of what type of feedback is given when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Select Off, Lights and Horn, Lights Only, or Horn Only.
Remote Door Unlock
This allows selection of which doors
will unlock when pressing K on the
RKE transmitter.
Select All Doors or Driver Door.
Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
If equipped and turned on, this feature will turn the ventilated seats on when using remote start on warm days.
Select Off or On.
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
If equipped and turned on, this feature will turn the heated seats on when using remote start on cold days.
Select Off or On.
Remote Window Operation
This feature enables the window to open by using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 36.
Select Off or On.
Instruments and Controls 165
Passive Door Unlock
This allows the selection of what doors will unlock when using the button on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 36.
Select All Doors or Driver Door Only.
Passive Door Lock
This feature can be turned on or off, or can be used to select feedback when using the button on the driver door to lock the vehicle. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 0 36.
Select Off, On with Horn Chirp, or On.
Remote Left in Vehicle Alert
This feature sounds an alert when the RKE transmitter is left in the vehicle.
Select Off or On.
Bluetooth
Select and the following may display:
. Pair New Device
. Discoverable
. Device Management
. Ringtones
. Voice Mail Numbers
. Text Message Alerts
Pair New Device
Select to pair a new device. See "Pairing" under Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base Radio) 0 221 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls Base Radio) 0 217 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 216 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 226 or "Pairing" in "Infotainment Controls" under "Bluetooth" in the infotainment manual.
Discoverable
This allows the system to find a device.
Select Off or On.
166 Instruments and Controls
Device Management
Select to connect to a different phone source, disconnect a phone, or delete a phone.
Ringtones
Select to change the ring tone for the specific phone. The phone does not need to be connected to change the ring tones.
Voice Mail Numbers
This feature displays the voice mail number for all connected phones. To change the voice mail number, select EDIT. Type a new number, then select SAVE.
Text Message Alerts
This allows the feature to be turned on or off.
Select Off or On.
Apple CarPlayTM
Select and the following may display:
. Apple CarPlay . Manage Apple CarPlay Devices
Apple CarPlay
This feature allows Apple devices to be connected to the infotainment system through a USB port.
Select Off or On.
Manage Apple CarPlay Devices
Select to manage Apple devices. Apple CarPlay must be on for this feature to be accessed.
Android Auto
Select and the following may display: . Android Auto . Manage Android Auto Devices
Android Auto
This feature allows Android devices to be connected to the infotainment system through a USB port.
Select Off or On.
Manage Android Auto Devices
Select to manage Android devices. Android Auto must be on for this feature to be accessed.
USB Auto Launch
This allows Android and Apple CarPlay devices to automatically connect when plugged into the USB port.
Select Off or On.
Voice
Select and the following may display: . Prompt Length . Audio Feedback Speed
Prompt Length
This feature adjusts the voice prompt length.
Select Short or Long.
Audio Feedback Speed
This feature adjusts the audio feedback speed.
Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.
Voice Select and the following may display: . Prompt Length . Audio Feedback Speed
Prompt Length This feature adjusts the voice prompt length. Select Short or Long.
Audio Feedback Speed This feature adjusts the audio feedback speed. Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.
Display Select and the following may display: . Calibrate Touchscreen . Turn Display Off
Calibrate Touchscreen Select to calibrate the touchscreen, then follow the prompts.
Instruments and Controls 167
Turn Display Off
Select to turn the display off. Press anywhere on the display area or any faceplate button to turn the display on.
Rear Camera
Select and the following may display: . Guidance Lines . Rear Park Assist Symbols
Guidance Lines
Select to turn Off or On. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 302.
Rear Park Assist Symbols
Select to turn Off or On. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 302.
Return to Factory Settings
Select and the following may display: . Restore Vehicle Settings . Clear All Private Data . Restore Radio Settings
Restore Vehicle Settings This allows selection of restoring vehicle settings. Select Restore or Cancel.
Clear All Private Data This allows selection to clear all private information from the vehicle. Select Delete or Cancel.
Restore Radio Settings This allows selection to restore radio settings. Select Restore or Cancel.
Software Information Select to view the infotainment system current software information.
168 Instruments and Controls
Universal Remote System
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 482.
Universal Remote System Programming
If equipped, these buttons are in the overhead console. This system can replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. These
instructions refer to a garage door opener, but can be used for other devices.
Do not use the Universal Remote system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before programming the Universal Remote system. It may help to have another person assist with the programming process.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming. Erase the programming when vehicle ownership is terminated. See "Erasing Universal Remote System Buttons" later in this section.
To program a garage door opener, park outside directly in line with and facing the garage door opener receiver. Clear all people and objects near the garage door.
Make sure the hand-held transmitter has a new battery for quick and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Programming the Universal Remote System
For questions or help programming the Universal Remote system, call 1-800-355-3515 or see www.homelink.com.
Programming involves time-sensitive actions, and may time out causing the procedure to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
1. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to 3 in) away from the Universal Remote system buttons with the indicator light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied by the manufacturer of the garage door opener receiver.
2. At the same time, press and hold both the hand-held transmitter button and one of the three Universal Remote
system buttons to be used to operate the garage door. Do not release either button until the indicator light goes from a slow to a rapid flashing light. Then release both buttons.
Some garage door openers may require substitution of Step 2 with the procedure under "Radio Signals for Canada and Some Gate Operators" later in this section.
3. Press and hold the newly programmed Universal Remote system button for five seconds while watching the indicator light and garage door activation.
. If the indicator light stays on continuously or the garage door moves when the button is pressed, then programming is complete. There is no need to complete Steps 46.
. If the indicator light does not come on or the garage door does not move, a second button press may
Instruments and Controls 169
be required. For a second time, press and hold the newly programmed button for five seconds. If the light stays on or the garage door moves, programming is complete. . If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, then changes to a solid light and the garage door does not move, continue with programming Steps 46.
Learn or Smart Button 4. After completing Steps 13,
locate the Learn or Smart button inside the garage on the garage door opener receiver.
The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
5. Press and release the Learn or Smart button. Step 6 must be completed within 30 seconds of pressing this button.
6. Inside the vehicle, press and hold the newly programmed Universal Remote system button for two seconds and then release it. If the garage door does not move or the lamp on the garage door opener receiver does not flash, press and hold the same button a second time for two seconds, then release it. Again, if the door does not move or the garage door lamp does not flash, press and hold the same button a third time for two seconds, then release it.
The Universal Remote system should now activate the garage door.
Repeat the process for programming the two remaining buttons.
170 Instruments and Controls
Radio Signals for Canada and Some Gate Operators
For questions or programming help, call 1-800-355-3515 or see www.homelink.com.
Canadian radio-frequency laws and some U.S. gate operators require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for the Universal Remote system to pick up the signal during programming.
If the programming did not work, replace Step 2 under "Programming the Universal Remote System" with the following:
Press and hold the Universal Remote system button while pressing and releasing the hand-held transmitter button every two seconds until the signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Remote system. The Universal Remote system indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under "Programming the Universal Remote System" to complete.
Universal Remote System Operation
Using the Universal Remote System
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Remote system button for at least one-half second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Remote System Buttons
Erase all programmed buttons when vehicle ownership is terminated.
To erase:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash. This should take about 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Universal Remote System Button
To reprogram any of the system buttons:
1. Press and hold any one of the buttons. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 1 under "Programming the Universal Remote System."
Lighting
Exterior Lighting Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 171 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 175 Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . 176
Interior Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Lighting Features Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Battery Load Management . . . 179 Battery Power Protection . . . . . 180
Lighting 171
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls
The exterior lamp control is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
O : Turns off the automatic
headlamps and Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp control to the off position again to turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on. For vehicles first sold in Canada, off will only work when the vehicle is in P (Park). AUTO : Automatically turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights,
172 Lighting
roof marker lamps (if equipped), front/rear sidemarker lamps, and license plate lamps.
When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in AUTO, the headlamps turn off. When the key is removed, they automatically turn on for a set time. The time of the delay can be changed using the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147.
; : Turns on the parking lamps
including all lamps, except the headlamps.
2 : Turns on the headlamps
together with the parking lamps and instrument panel lights.
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes before turning off to prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the headlamp control
off and then back to the headlamp on position to make the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes. To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, the ignition must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position.
# : If equipped, turns on the fog
lamps. See Fog Lamps 0 176. IntelliBeam® System If equipped, this system turns the vehicle's high-beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions. The system turns the high-beam headlamps on when it is dark enough and there is no other traffic present.
This light comes on in the instrument cluster when the IntelliBeam system is enabled.
Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam
To enable the IntelliBeam system, with the turn signal lever in the neutral position, turn the exterior lamp control to AUTO. The blue high-beam on light appears on the instrument cluster when the high beams are on.
Driving with IntelliBeam
The system only activates the high beams when driving over 40 km/h (25 mph).
There is a sensor near the top center of the windshield that automatically controls the system. Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.
The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the automatic control, until one of the following situations occurs:
. The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps.
. The system detects a preceding vehicle's taillamps.
. The outside light is bright enough that high-beam headlamps are not required.
. The vehicle's speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph).
. The IntelliBeam system is disabled by the high/low-beam changer or the flash-to-pass feature. If this happens, the high/ low-beam changer must be activated two times within two seconds to reactivate the IntelliBeam system. The instrument cluster light will come on to indicate the IntelliBeam is reactivated. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 0 173 and Flash-to-Pass 0 174.
The high beams may not turn off automatically if the system cannot detect another vehicle's lamps because of any of the following:
. The other vehicle's lamps are missing, damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.
. The other vehicle's lamps are covered with dirt, snow, and/or road spray.
. The other vehicle's lamps cannot be detected due to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist, or other airborne obstructions.
. The vehicle's windshield is dirty, cracked, or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the light sensor.
. The vehicle is loaded such that the front end points upward, causing the light sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps.
. Driving on winding or hilly roads.
The automatic high-beam headlamps may need to be disabled if any of the above conditions exist.
Lighting 173
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder
A reminder chime sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on, the ignition is off, and a door is open. To disable the chime, turn the lamps off.
Headlamp High/ Low-Beam Changer $ : Push the turn signal lever
toward the instrument panel to change the headlamps from low to high beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward you and release it to return to low-beam headlamps.
When the high-beam headlamps are on, this indicator light on the instrument cluster will also be on.
174 Lighting
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass. It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then release it.
If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. Depending on the type of headlamp, they will either turn off after a short duration or stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you. The high-beam indicator on the instrument cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to normal operation.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of the vehicle during the day. Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system comes on when the following conditions are met:
. The ignition is on.
. The exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
. The transmission is not in P (Park).
. The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL system is on, only the DRL are on. The taillamps, sidemarker lamps, instrument panel lights, and other lamps will not be on.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp system switches from DRL to the headlamps.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior lamp control to the off position and then release. For vehicles first sold in Canada, off will only work when the vehicle is in P (Park).
Automatic Headlamp System
When the exterior lamp control is set to AUTO and it is dark enough outside, the headlamps come on automatically.
There is a light sensor on top of the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor, otherwise the headlamps will come on when they are not needed. The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel. If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system comes on immediately. If it is light outside when the vehicle
leaves the garage, there is a slight delay before the automatic headlamp system changes to the DRL. During that delay, the instrument cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel Illumination Control 0 177.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will turn off or may change to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
The automatic headlamp system turns off when the exterior lamp
control is turned to O or the ignition
is off.
Lights On with Wipers
If the windshield wipers are activated in daylight with the engine on, and the exterior lamp control is in AUTO, the headlamps, parking lamps, and other exterior lamps come on. The transition time for the lamps coming on varies based on wiper speed. When the wipers are
not operating, these lamps turn off.
Move the exterior lamp control to O or ; to disable this feature. Hazard Warning Flashers
| : Press this button to make the
front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle's turn signals will not work.
Lighting 175
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Move the turn signal lever all the way up or down to signal a turn. Raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. This causes the turn signals to automatically flash three times. It will flash six times if Tow/ Haul Mode is active. Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second will cause the turn signals to flash until the lever is released.
176 Lighting
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be burned out. If equipped with LED turn signals, see your dealer.
Replace any burned out bulbs. If a bulb is not burned out, check the fuse. See Fuses 0 390.
Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on for more than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime sounds at each flash of the turn signal. The message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the Driver Information Center (DIC). To turn the chime and message off, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Fog Lamps
If equipped, the control is on the center of the exterior lamp control, to the left of the steering column. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the fog lamps to come on.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on
or off. A light will come on in the instrument cluster. When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps automatically turn on. When the headlamps are changed to high beam, the fog lamps go off. When the high-beam headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on with the fog lamps.
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp
If equipped, this button includes wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to install an auxiliary roof lamp.
This button is on the overhead console. When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof-mounted lamp, pressing the bottom of the button will activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light at the bottom of
this button. Pressing the top of the button will turn off the roof-mounted lamp and indicator.
The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at 30 amps, so the total current draw of the attached lamps should be less than this value. The attachment points for the roof lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires above the overhead console: a dark green with blue stripe switched power wire and a black ground wire.
For information on roof-mounted emergency lamp installation, see www.gmupfitter.com or contact your dealer.
If the vehicle has this button, the vehicle may have the snow plow prep package. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 345.
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination Control
This feature controls the brightness of the steering wheel and instrument panel lights. The instrument panel illumination control is next to the exterior lamp control.
D : Move the thumbwheel up or
down to brighten or dim the lights.
Lighting 177 Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp provides more light in the cargo area or on the sides of the vehicle, if needed. The lights inside the pickup box and/or on the outside rearview mirrors also turn on, if equipped. Press the switch down to turn the cargo lamp on or off. An indicator light will turn on when the lamp is turned on, if equipped. The shift lever must be in the P (Park) position to operate the cargo lamp. The lights on the outside rearview
178 Lighting
mirrors turn on if the shift lever is in the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or P (Park) position.
Dome Lamps
ON : Turns all dome lamps on.
Reading Lamps
Press m or n next to each reading
lamp to turn it on or off.
There are dome lamps in the overhead console and the headliner, if equipped.
To change the dome lamp settings, press the following:
OFF : Turns the lamps off, even when a door is open.
DOOR : The lamps come on automatically when a door is opened.
There are reading lamps in the overhead console and the headliner, if equipped. To operate, the ignition must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position, or using Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
Some exterior lamps and the interior lamps turn on briefly at night, or in
areas with limited lighting, when K
is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is opened, the interior lamps come on if the dome lamp control is in the DOOR position. After about 30 seconds the exterior lamps turn off. Entry lighting can be disabled manually by changing the ignition out of the OFF position, or by
pressing the RKE transmitter Q
button.
This feature can be changed. See "Vehicle Locator Lights" under Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Exit Lighting
Some exterior lamps and the interior lamps come on at night, or in areas with limited lighting when the key is removed from the ignition. The exterior and interior lamps remain on for a set amount of time and then
automatically turn off. The interior lamps do not come on if the dome lamp control is in the Off position.
The exterior lamps turn off immediately by turning the exterior lamps control off.
This feature can be changed. See Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Battery Load Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM), which estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery.
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. The voltmeter gauge or the voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), if equipped, may show the voltage
Lighting 179
moving up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories.
180 Lighting
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver. If so, a DIC message might be displayed and it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See Battery Voltage and Charging Messages 0 150.
Battery Power Protection
This feature shuts off the dome and reading lamps, if they are left on for more than 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. The cargo lamp shuts off after 20 minutes. This prevents the battery from running down.
Infotainment System
Introduction Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . 182 Overview (Base Radio with Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Overview (Base Radio) . . . . . . . 184 Home Page (Base Radio) . . . . 186 Home Page (Base Radio with Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Radio AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Satellite Radio (Base Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Satellite Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 195 Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 196
Audio Players Avoiding Untrusted Media Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 USB Port (Base Radio) . . . . . . . 199 USB Port (Base Radio with Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Voice Recognition Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Phone Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . . 216 Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio) . . . . . . 217 Bluetooth (Voice Recognition Base Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio with Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Apple CarPlay and Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Trademarks and License Agreements
Trademarks and License Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Infotainment System 181
Introduction
Infotainment
Base radio information is included in this manual. See the infotainment manual for information on other available infotainment systems.
Read the following pages to become familiar with the Base Radio features.
{ Warning
Taking your eyes off the road for too long or too often while using any infotainment feature can cause a crash. You or others could be injured or killed. Do not give extended attention to infotainment tasks while driving. Limit your glances at the vehicle displays and focus your attention on driving. Use voice commands whenever possible.
182 Infotainment System
The infotainment system has built-in features intended to help avoid distraction by disabling some functions when driving. These functions may gray out when they are unavailable. Many infotainment features are also available through the instrument cluster and steering wheel controls.
Before driving:
. Become familiar with the operation, faceplate buttons, and screen buttons.
. Set up the audio by presetting favorite stations, setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers.
. Set up phone numbers in advance so they can be called easily by pressing a single button or by using a single voice command if equipped with Bluetooth phone capability.
See Defensive Driving 0 248.
To play the infotainment system with the ignition off, see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock® is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
Overview (Base Radio with Touchscreen)
Infotainment System 183
1. {
. Press to go to the Home Page. See Home Page (Base Radio) 0 186 or Home Page (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 188.
2. 7
. Radio: Press and release to go to the previous station or channel. Press and hold to fast seek the next strongest previous station or channel.
. USB/Bluetooth Music/ Pictures: Press and hold to go to the previous content. Press and hold to fast rewind.
3. O
. Press to turn the power on.
. Press and hold to turn the power off.
. Press to mute the system when on.
. Turn to decrease or increase the volume.
184 Infotainment System
4. 6
. Radio: Press and release to go to the next station or channel. Press and hold to fast seek the next strongest station or channel.
. USB/Bluetooth Music/ Pictures: Press and hold to go to the next content. Press and hold to fast forward.
5.
#
. Press and release to access the phone screen, answer an incoming call, or access the device home screen. Press and hold to access Press to Talk.
Overview (Base Radio)
Infotainment System Overview
The infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons on the faceplate and steering wheel controls, if equipped. See Steering Wheel Controls 0 121.
Radio with CD
Radio with TONE
1.
q
. Press to scroll down through the favorite pages for each source.
2. Favorites/Soft Keys
. Press to select favorite stations.
. Press and hold to save favorite stations.
. Press to select a screen button when displayed.
3.
r
. Press to scroll up through the favorite pages for each source.
4. MENU
. Press to access the menu for the current audio source.
. Press to select the highlighted menu option.
. Turn to scroll through a list.
. Turn to manually select a station.
Infotainment System 185
5. CD Slot (If Equipped)
6. BACK
o
. Press to return to the previous screen in a menu.
7. {
. Press to go to the Home Page from any point in the system. See "Home Page" following.
8. X (If Equipped) or TONE (If
Equipped)
. Press X to eject the CD (if
equipped).
. Press TONE to open the Tone Settings menu (if equipped).
9. g or l
.
gCD
(If Equipped): Press to seek the beginning
of
the current or previous
track. If the track has
played for less than
five seconds, it seeks the
previous track. If longer
than five seconds, the
186 Infotainment System
current track will start from
the beginning. Press l to
seek the next track.
. AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If
Equipped): Press g or l
to seek to the previous or next strong station.
. CD (If Equipped): Press
and hold g to quickly
reverse through a track. Release the button to return to playing speed. Press and
hold l to fast forward
through a track. Release the button to return to playing speed.
10. RADIO
. Press to change the audio source between AM, FM, or SiriusXM, if equipped.
11. MEDIA
. Press to change the audio source between CD, USB, AUX, and Bluetooth Audio, if equipped.
12. O
. Press to turn the audio on.
. Press and hold to turn it off.
. When on, press to mute the system. Press again to unmute.
. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
Home Page (Base Radio)
Home Page Features
The infotainment system displays a Home Page that makes it easy to access all of the applications. Turn the MENU knob to highlight feature icons. Press the MENU knob to access the feature's options.
Various functions are disabled when the vehicle is moving.
AUDIO : Select the AUDIO screen icon to display the active source page. The sources available are AM, FM, SiriusXM® (if equipped), USB/iPod, AUX Input, and Bluetooth Audio (if equipped). See AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189, Satellite Radio (Base Radio) 0 193 or Satellite Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 193, , Auxiliary Jack 0 207, and Bluetooth Audio 0 208.
PHONE : Select the PHONE screen icon to display the Phone main page. See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base Radio) 0 221 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls Base Radio) 0 217 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 216 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 226.
NAV (Navigation, If Equipped) : Select the NAV screen icon to display the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation. See OnStar Overview 0 486, if equipped.
SETTINGS : Select the SETTINGS screen icon to display the Settings main page. See "Setting Radio Preferences" following.
Setting Radio Preferences
Select the SETTINGS screen icon to display the Settings menu and the following may display:
Time and Date : See Clock 0 123.
Language (Current Language) : This will set the display language in the radio and instrument cluster. Select to display a list of languages.
Select BACK to go back to the
o
previous menu.
Valet Mode:
Using the circular numeric keypad, enter a four-digit code:
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight a number.
2. Press the MENU knob to select it. Do this for each one of the four digits. Select Enter to go to the confirmation screen.
3. Re-enter the four-digit code. Select LOCK to lock the system.
4. Enter the four-digit code to unlock the system.
Select BACK to go back to
o
the previous menu.
Radio : See "Radio Setup" later in this section.
Vehicle : See Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Display : Press the MENU knob to turn the display on or off.
Return to Factory Settings : See "Return to Factory Settings" later in this section.
Software Information (If Equipped) : Press the MENU knob to select Save Vehicle Info to USB. Press the MENU knob again to start downloading the vehicle information to the USB.
Infotainment System 187
Radio Setup
Press the RADIO button and the following may display:
Manage Favorites:
. Turn the MENU knob and press to select a favorite.
. To delete a favorite, press the button just below the DELETE screen button.
. To move a favorite, press the MOVE screen button. Turn the MENU knob to select a new location, then press the DROP screen button to select the new location.
. Select BACK to go back to
o
the previous menu.
Number of Favorites Shown : Select Auto and the system will automatically adjust the number of favorite pages when favorites are added and removed, or select a number from 525 to manually adjust the number of favorites shown.
188 Infotainment System
Audible Touch Feedback (If Equipped) : Select Audible Touch Feedback to turn feedback off or on.
Auto Volume (If Equipped) : This feature adjusts the volume based on vehicle speed. The options are Off, Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, or High. Select the desired volume.
Maximum Startup Volume : This feature sets the maximum startup volume. If the vehicle is started and the volume is greater than this level, the volume is adjusted to this level. To set the maximum startup volume, Turn the MENU knob to increase or decrease startup volume.
Rear Camera (If Equipped)
From the Rear Camera screen button, the following may display:
Return to Factory Settings
Select Return to Factory Settings and the following may display:
Restore Vehicle Settings : This option will restore factory vehicle personalization settings. Select Restore Vehicle Settings. A screen
displays stating all vehicle customization settings will be restored to the factory settings. Select Cancel or Confirm.
Clear All Private Data (If Equipped) : This option clears all private information from the vehicle. Select Clear All Private Data. Select Cancel or Confirm.
Restore Radio Settings : This option will restore factory radio settings. Select Restore Radio Settings. A screen displays stating all personalized radio settings will be restored back to the factory settings. Select Cancel or Confirm.
English and Metric Unit Conversion
To change the display units between English and metric units, see Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147 or Instrument Cluster 0 128.
Home Page (Base Radio with Touchscreen)
Touchscreen Buttons Touchscreen buttons show on the screen when available. When a function is unavailable, the button may gray out. When a function is selected, the button may highlight. Home Page Features
Press { to go to the Home Page.
Audio : Touch to select AM, FM, SiriusXM® (if equipped), USB/iPod/ Bluetooth Audio, or AUX. Gallery : Touch to view a picture or movie.
Phone : Touch to activate the phone features (if equipped). See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base Radio) 0 221 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio) 0 217 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 216 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 226.
Projection : Touch to access supported devices when connected. See USB Port (Base Radio) 0 199 or USB Port (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 201.
Settings : Touch to access the Personalization menu. See Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Climate : Touch to access the Climate menu. See Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 240.
OnStar : If equipped, touch to access the OnStar menu. See OnStar Overview 0 486.
Software Updates
See the website for more information.
Website Information
In the U.S., see www.chevrolet.com
In Canada, see www.chevrolet.gm.ca
In Mexico, see www.chevrolet.com.mx
Infotainment System 189
Radio
AM-FM Radio (Base Radio)
Playing the Radio
While on the audio main page, press the RADIO button repeatedly to cycle through the available sources AM, FM, and SiriusXM® (if equipped) or press the MEDIA button repeatedly to cycle through the available sources Bluetooth® Audio (if equipped), USB, and AUX.
The steering wheel controls can also be used to adjust the volume. See Steering Wheel Controls 0 121.
AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If Equipped)
To select AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if equipped), press the RADIO button to toggle to the desired broadcast source.
190 Infotainment System
Press the MENU knob and the following radio settings may display:
Tone Settings:
. Bass, Midrange, and Treble: Turn the MENU knob and highlight. Press the MENU knob to select. Turn the MENU knob to adjust.
. Balance: Turn the MENU knob to highlight. Press the MENU knob to select. Turn the MENU knob left for more sound from the left speakers or right for more sound from the right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the left and right speakers.
. Fade: Turn the MENU knob to highlight. Press the MENU knob to select. Turn the MENU knob to the left for more sound from the front speakers and to the right for more sound from the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the front and rear speakers.
. DSP: If equipped with a Bose Surround® sound system, it will have three DSP modes including:
Normal: Adjusts the audio to provide the best sound for all seating positions.
Driver: Adjusts the audio to provide the best sound for the driver.
Centerpoint: Creates a surround sound from nearly any audio source.
. EQ (Equalizer): If equipped with a Bose sound system, turn the MENU knob to highlight. Turn the MENU knob to scroll through the options. Press the MENU knob to select. Press
the BACK button to go to the
o
previous menu.
Station List : Select to display a list of AM or FM stations.
Press BACK to go to the
o
previous menu.
Auto Volume : If equipped, this feature adjusts the volume based on the vehicle speed. Select the level between Off, Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, and High.
Press BACK to go to the
o
previous menu.
EQ (Equalizer) Settings : In certain configurations, the available choices are Manual and Talk.
Options for SiriusXM Only (If Equipped)
SXM View : SXM view allows the channel list to be viewed by channel name, artist playing on channel, or song playing on channel. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press the MENU knob to select.
Press BACK to go to the
o
previous menu.
Channel List : Select to display a list of SiriusXM channels. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press the MENU knob to select.
Press BACK to go to the
o
previous menu.
Also see the radio settings common for all sources earlier in this section.
Finding a Station
Seeking a Station
Press g or l to search for the
previous or next strongest station.
Tuning a Station
Turn the MENU knob to manually find a station.
Storing Radio Station Presets
Up to 25 preset stations from all bands can be stored in the favorite lists in any order. Up to five stations can be stored in each favorite page and the number of favorites can be set.
AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If Equipped) : While on the active source main page, such as AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if equipped), press and hold a favorites/soft key button on the faceplate.
Mixed-Audio Favorites
Media (if equipped) and Broadcast favorites can be stored.
To display the favorites page, press or on the radio faceplate.
qr
To manage favorites, see "Manage Favorites" under Home Page (Base Radio) 0 186 or Home Page (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 188.
AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen)
Playing the Radio
Audio Source Menu
{ : Press to go to the Home Page. O : Press to turn on, mute,
or unmute the system. Press and hold to turn off the system.
Selecting a Band
Press {, then touch AUDIO,
Source, then select AM, FM, or SXM, if equipped. The last station that was playing starts playing again.
Infotainment System 191
System Settings
Auto Volume
This feature automatically adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise.
The level of volume compensation can be selected, or the feature can be turned off.
1. Touch MENU from a source screen.
2. Select Auto Volume.
3. Select the desired setting.
4. Touch 3 to go back to the
source screen.
Tone Settings
The tone settings can be set for each radio band and each audio player source.
Preset Tone Settings . Touch MENU. . Touch Tone Settings. . Select a preset tone setting. . Bass, Midrange, or Treble:
Touch or +.
192 Infotainment System
. Fader or Balance: Adjust the front/rear or left/right speakers by dragging the dot in the vehicle image on the screen.
Custom Tone Settings
. Touch MENU.
. Touch Tone Settings.
. Touch Custom.
. Bass, Midrange, or Treble: Touch or +.
. Fader or Balance: Adjust the front/rear or left/right speakers by dragging the dot in the vehicle image on the screen.
Touch 3 to go back to the source
screen.
Selecting an Auxiliary Device
Connect the auxiliary device to the AUX input terminal. Play will begin when the system has finished reading the information on the device.
If the AUX device is already
connected, press {, AUDIO,
Source, then select the device.
Selecting a Station
Seek Tuning If the radio station is not known:
Press 7 or 6 to automatically
search for available radio stations.
Manual Tuning
Continue touching t or u to
manually change the radio station.
Direct Tune From the AM or FM menu: . Touch Tune. . Enter the station number.
. Touch Go or t or u to go to
the pervious or next station.
Favorite
. Touch S or T to scroll through
the favorites. . Touch on the station to select it.
Station List . From the AM or FM menu,
touch MENU. . Select Station List.
. Touch Q or R to scroll through
the list. Touch the station to select it.
Update Station List
. From the AM or FM menu, touch MENU, then touch Update Station List. The broadcasting list updating will begin.
. During the AM or FM broadcasting list update, touch Cancel to stop the updates.
Storing a Station as a Favorite
Stations from all bands can be stored in any order in the favorite pages.
Up to 25 stations can be stored.
Storing Stations
To store the station to a position in the list, touch the corresponding button 15 until a beep is heard.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Touch S or T to select the
desired page of saved favorites.
3. Touch and hold down any of the preset buttons to save the current radio station to that button of the selected favorites page.
To change a preset button, tune to the new desired radio station and touch and hold the preset button.
Satellite Radio (Base Radio)
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Service (If Equipped)
Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM satellite radio subscription can receive SiriusXM programming.
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast to coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service fee is required to receive the SiriusXM service. See www.siriusxm.com or call
1-888-601-6296 (U.S.); or see www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
When SiriusXM is active, the channel name and number, category name, song title, and artist display on the screen.
Browsing SiriusXM Channels (If Equipped)
To browse the SiriusXM channels:
1. Press the MENU knob.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight SXM Channel List.
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the desired SXM Channels.
Satellite Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen)
Vehicles with an SXM Satellite Radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription can receive SiriusXM programming.
Infotainment System 193
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service (If Equipped)
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast to coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service fee is required to receive the SiriusXM service. For more information, contact SiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), and www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
Listening to SiriusXM Radio (If Equipped)
1. Press {.
2. Touch AUDIO.
3. Touch Source.
4. Touch SXM and the most recent listened to SiriusXM channel will display.
Touch 0 to return to the
HOME menu.
194 Infotainment System
Selecting a Category
From Menu, touch Categories, then touch the desired category or from
Categories, touch Q or R to find the
desired channel. Touch the channel to select it.
Selecting a Channel
Touch u or t and the previous or
next channel will be selected.
Touch and hold u or t to jump
four channels backward or forward, then release the button at the desired channel.
Using the Preset Buttons
Up to seven favorites pages can be saved, and each page can store up to five channels.
To change a preset button, tune to the new desired channel and hold the button.
Listening to Preset Channels
1. Continue touching S or T to
select the desired favorites page.
2. Touch the preset button to listen to the channel saved to that button.
Using the SiriusXM Menu
Operation
1. Touch MENU on the SXM radio screen.
2. Touch the menu to select the desired item or to display the detail menu item.
3. Touch 0 to return to the
previous menu.
Channel List
1. Touch Channel List from the SXM menu. The channel list is displayed.
2. Touch Q or R to find the
desired channel. Tune to the channel by selecting it.
Tone Settings
From the tone settings menu, the sound features can be set up for SiriusXM audio and each audio player's functions.
1. Touch Tone Settings. The tone settings screen is displayed. See "Tone Settings" under "Base Radio with Touchscreen" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
2. Touch OK.
Auto Volume
1. Touch Auto Volume. See "Auto Volume" under "Base Radio with Touchscreen" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
2. Touch OK.
Categories
1. Touch Categories.
2. Touch Q or R to find the
desired category. Touch the category to select it.
Explicit Content Filter
When on, only a filtered list of channels will be received. When off, all regular SXM programming subscribed to will be received.
1. Touch SXM Explicit Filter.
2. Select On or Off.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as phone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
FM
FM signals only reach about 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference, some static can occur,
especially around tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
If equipped, SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service provides digital radio reception. Tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the SiriusXM signal for a period of time.
Infotainment System 195
Cell Phone Usage
Cell phone usage, such as making or receiving phone calls, charging, or just having the phone on may cause static interference in the radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off if this happens.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna will go through most car washes as long as it is securely attached. If the antenna becomes slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If it is badly bent, replace it.
Occasionally check that the antenna is tight at the base. If tightening is required, protect the paint from damage.
196 Infotainment System
Multi-Band Antenna
The multi-band antenna is on the roof of the vehicle. The antenna is used for OnStar, the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service System, and GPS (Global Positioning System), if the vehicle has these features. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for clear reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, and it is open, reception can also be affected.
Items on the roof of the vehicle can interfere with the performance of the radio system and OnStar (if equipped). Make sure the multi-band antenna is not obstructed.
Audio Players
Avoiding Untrusted Media Devices
When using media devices such as CDs, DVDs, Blu-Ray Discs®, SD cards, USB drives, and mobile devices, consider the source. Untrusted media devices could contain files that affect system operation or performance. Avoid use if the content or origin cannot be trusted.
CD Player
If the vehicle is equipped with a CD player, it can be used for CD and MP3 audio.
With the vehicle on, insert a disc into the slot, label side up. Press the MEDIA button to select CD as a source.
The system is capable of playing most:
. Audio CDs
. CD-R
. CD-RW
. MP3 or unprotected WMA formats
When playing any compatible recordable disc, the sound quality can be reduced due to disc quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, or the way the disc has been handled.
There can be increased skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the disc for damage or try a known good disc.
To avoid damage to the CD player:
. Do not use scratched or damaged discs.
. Do not apply labels to discs. The labels could get caught in the player.
. Insert only one disc at a time.
. Keep the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
. Use a marking pen to label the top of the disc.
Loading and Ejecting Discs
To load a disc:
1. Turn the vehicle on.
2. Insert a disc into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in the rest of the way. If the disc is damaged or improperly loaded, there is an error and the disc ejects.
Playing an Audio CD
Press the MEDIA button on the faceplate until CD is selected.
On the CD main page, either a track number displays at the beginning of each track, or Song, Artist, and Album information displays when available.
Use the following screen controls to play the disc:
t: While on the CD main page:
. Press to seek to the beginning of the current or previous track. If the track has been playing for less than five seconds, it seeks
to the previous track. If longer than five seconds, the current track starts from the beginning.
. Press and hold to fast reverse through a track. Release the button to return to playing speed. Elapsed time displays.
u: While on the CD main page:
. Press to seek to the next track.
. Press and hold to fast forward through a track. Release the button to return to playing speed. Elapsed time displays.
j / : While on the CD main page, r
press to pause. Press again to resume.
Z: Press Z to play the songs in
random order. Press again to turn off.
If a Blu-ray Disc® or DVD disc is loaded into the disc player and the CD screen button is selected, a message comes on the screen to use the Video application. The Video application is only available on vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE).
Infotainment System 197
CD Menu
While on the CD main page, press the MENU knob to display the CD menu and the following may display:
Browse : Select to display the files or songs on the CD.
Tone Settings : Select to adjust Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See "Tone Settings" under AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Auto Volume : If equipped, this feature adjusts the volume based on the vehicle speed. Select the level between Off, Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, and High. Press BACK to go to the previous menu.
DSP : If equipped, this feature adjusts the pre-defined settings. See "DSP" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
198 Infotainment System
EQ (Equalizer) : If equipped, this feature adjusts the equalizer settings. See "EQ (Equalizer)" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Error Messages
If Disc Error displays and/or the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
. The disc has an invalid or unknown format.
. The disc is very hot. Try the disc again when the temperature returns to normal.
. The road is very rough. Try the disc again when the road is smoother.
. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
. The air is very humid. Try the disc again later.
. There was a problem while burning the disc.
. The label is caught in the CD player.
If Disc Player Error displays, it could be for one of the following reasons:
. The player temperature is too high.
. There are load or eject errors.
If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason, try a known good CD.
If any error continues, contact your dealer.
Playing an MP3 CD
To play an MP3 CD, follow the same instructions as "Playing an Audio CD."
The following guidelines must be met when creating an MP3 disc, otherwise the CD might not play:
. Sampling rate: 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256, and 320 kbps.
. Maximum number of folders: eight folders with 255 files per folder.
. Maximum of 1,000 files on a disc.
. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders.
Empty Folders
If a root directory or folder is empty or contains only folders, the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains a compressed audio file. The empty folder(s) are not displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When the CD only contains compressed audio files without any folders, all files are under the root folder.
USB Port (Base Radio)
Playing from a USB
A USB mass storage device or Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) device can be connected to the USB port.
The vehicle may have USB ports in the front of the center console, armrest, or one in the upper glove box. See Center Console Storage 0 116 and Glove Box 0 115.
USB MP3 Player and USB Drives
. The USB MP3 players and USB drives connected must comply with the USB Mass Storage Class specification (USB MSC).
. Hard disk drives are not supported.
. Supported file system is FAT32.
To play a USB device:
. Connect the USB.
. Press MEDIA on the faceplate until the connected device is shown.
While the USB source is active, press the corresponding faceplate button for the icons on the screen to operate USB function:
.t
.u . j/
r
.Z
For information on how to use the screen icons, see "Playing an Audio CD."
USB Menu
Press MENU to display the USB menu and the following may display:
Browse : Select to display the files and folders on the USB device.
Tone Settings : Select to adjust Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See "Tone Settings" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Infotainment System 199
Auto Volume : If equipped, see "Auto Volume" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
EQ (Equalizer) : If equipped, this feature adjusts the equalizer settings. See "EQ (Equalizer) Settings" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Playing from an iPod®/iPad®/ iPhone®
This feature supports the following devices:
. iPod nano® (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th generation)
. iPod with video (5.0 and 5.5 generation)
. iPod classic® (6th generation)
. iPod touch® (1st and 2nd generation)
. iPad
. iPhone 3G, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4
200 Infotainment System
There may be problems with operation and function in the following situations:
. When connecting a device with a more recent version of the firmware installed than is supported by the infotainment system.
. When connecting a device on which firmware from other providers is installed.
To connect and control a device:
1. Connect one end of the standard USB cable to the device's dock connector.
2. Connect the other end to a USB port in the center console. See Center Console Storage 0 116.
3. Press MEDIA to select the source.
The music information displays on the radio's display and begins playing through the vehicle's audio system.
The device battery recharges automatically while the vehicle is on. When the vehicle is off while a device is connected using the USB cable, the device battery stops charging and the device will automatically turn off.
If the device is an unsupported model, it can still be listened to in the vehicle by connecting to the auxiliary input jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.
Menu
Press MENU to display the device Menu and the following may display:
Browse : Select to display the files or songs on the device. See "Browse Device Media" later in this section.
Tone Settings : Select to adjust Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See "Tone Settings" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Auto Volume : If equipped, see "Auto Volume " in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
EQ (Equalizer) : If equipped, this feature adjusts the Equalizer settings. See "EQ (Equalizer)" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Browse Device Media
Use the following to browse:
Playlists:
1. Turn MENU to highlight and press to view the playlists stored on the device.
2. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select a playlist name to view a list of all songs in the playlist.
3. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select the song from the list to begin playback.
Artists:
1. Turn MENU to highlight and press to view the artists stored on the device.
2. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select an artist name to view a list of all albums by the artist.
3. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select an album name to view a list of all songs on the album.
4. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select the song from the list to begin playback.
Albums:
1. Turn MENU to highlight and press to view the albums stored on the device.
2. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select an album name to view a list of all songs on the album.
3. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select the song from the list to begin playback.
Genres:
1. Turn MENU to highlight and press to view the genres stored on the device.
2. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select a genre name to view a list of artists of that genre.
3. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select to view albums by that artist.
4. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select an album to view songs.
5. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select the song from the list to begin playback.
Songs:
1. Turn MENU to highlight and press to view a list of all songs stored on the device.
2. Turn MENU to highlight and press to select the song from the list to begin playback.
Infotainment System 201
USB Port (Base Radio with Touchscreen)
Using the USB Port
The infotainment system can play music by connecting an auxiliary device to the USB port.
USB Support
If equipped, the USB connector is in the center stack below the climate controls, and uses the USB 2.0 standard.
USB Supported Devices . USB Flash Drives . Portable USB Hard Drives
Not all iPods and USB drives are compatible with the USB port.
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple® for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated using the latest iTunes® application. See www.apple.com/ itunes.
For help with identifying your iPod, go to www.apple.com/support.
202 Infotainment System
The USB port can play both lower and upper case .mp3, .wma, .ogg, and .wav files stored on a USB storage device.
Supported Apple® Devices
To view supported devices in U.S., see www.my.chevrolet.com\learn.
To view supported devices in Canada, see www.chevroletowner.ca.
To view supported devices in Mexico, see your dealer for details.
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
The infotainment system supports: . FAT16. . FAT32. . exFAT.
Connecting a USB Storage Device or iPod/iPhone
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device to the USB port.
To connect an iPod/iPhone, connect one end of the device's cable to the iPod/iPhone and the other end to the USB port.
The iPod/iPhone charges while it is connected to the vehicle if the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN. See Ignition Positions 0 268. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod/iPhone automatically powers off and will not charge or draw power from the vehicle's battery.
For more information on USB usage, see "Audio System Information" following.
Audio System Information
The infotainment system can play the music files contained in the USB storage device or iPod/iPhone products.
Using MP3/WMA/OGG/WAV Files
. Music files with .mp3, .wma, .ogg, and .wav file name extensions can be played.
. MP3 files that can be played: Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps. Sampling frequency: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, and 16 kHz.
. Files with a bit rate above 128 kbps will result in higher quality sound.
. ID3 Tag information for MP3 files, such as the album name and the artist, can be played.
. To display album title, track title, and artist information, the file should be compatible with the ID3 Tag V1 and V2 formats.
Using USB Storage Devices and iPod/iPhone
. Use a USB or flash memory type storage device. Do not connect using a USB adaptor.
. Do not connect and reconnect the USB device repeatedly in a short time, as this may cause static electricity and problems using the device.
. Use a USB device with a metal connecting terminal.
. Connection with i-Stick Type USB storage devices may be faulty due to vehicle vibration.
. Do not touch the USB connecting terminal.
. Only USB storage devices formatted in FAT16/32 or exFAT file systems are recognized. NTFS and other file systems are not recognized.
. The time it takes to process files will depend on the USB storage device type and capacity, and the type of files stored.
. Some USB storage device files may not be compatible.
. Up to two USB devices and one iPod can be played through a USB hub. All devices may not be supported, depending on the performance of the USB hub. If there is not enough power supply, it may not operate normally.
. Do not disconnect the USB storage device while it is playing. This may cause damage to the product or affect the performance of the USB device.
. Disconnect the USB storage device when the ignition is turned off. If the ignition is turned on while the USB device is connected, the USB device may be damaged or may not operate normally.
. USB storage devices can only be connected for playing music, viewing photo files, or upgrading.
. Do not use the USB terminal to charge USB accessory equipment. The heat generated may cause performance issues or damage.
. Music files to which Digital Right Management (DRM) is applied cannot be played.
. USB storage device that are in capacity with a limit of 5,000 files, such as music, photo, video, 15 stages of folder
Infotainment System 203
structure. Normal usage cannot be guaranteed for a storage device that exceeds this limit. The iPod/iPhone can play all music files that are supported. The music file lists will only display up to 5,000 files on the screen. These files are sorted in alphabetical order.
. Some iPod/iPhone product models may not support the connectivity or functionality of this product.
. Only connect the iPod/iPhone with connection cables supported by iPod/iPhone products. Other connection cables cannot be used.
. The iPod/iPhone may be damaged if it is connected to the vehicle with the ignition on. When not in use, disconnect the iPod/iPhone.
. When the iPod/iPhone is connected to the USB port by using the iPod/iPhone cable, the Bluetooth music is not supported.
204 Infotainment System
. The iPod/iPhone playback functions and the information displayed may be different when played on the infotainment system.
. If a non-readable USB device is connected, an error message displays and the system will switch to the previous audio function.
. Refer to the table for the classification items related to the search function provided by the iPod/iPhone.
USB Player
Playing Music from a USB Device
. Connect the USB device to the USB port.
. Play will start automatically after the system has finished reading the USB device.
If the USB device is already connected:
. Press {.
. Touch AUDIO.
. Touch Source.
. Touch USB.
To stop the USB device and select another media source, touch Source, then select the other source.
To remove the USB device, select another function, then remove the USB device.
Pause
. Touch j to pause.
. Touch to resume.
r
Changing to Next/Previous Files
. Touch l to change to the
next file.
. Touch g within five seconds of
the playback time to play the previous file.
Returning to the Beginning of the Current File
Touch g after five seconds of the
playback time.
Scanning Forward or Backward
Touch and hold g or l during
playback to rewind or fast forward. Release the button to resume playback at normal speed.
Playing a File Randomly
Touch Z during playback.
. ON: Plays all files randomly. . OFF: Returns to normal
playback. Using the USB Music Menu . Touch Menu during playback.
. Touch the desired menu. Browse Music
1. Touch Browse Music. 2. Touch the desired music.
Tone Settings
. Touch Tone Settings. The Tone Settings menu is displayed. See "Tone Settings" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Auto Volume
. Touch Auto Volume. The Auto Volume menu is displayed. See "Auto Volume" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Traffic Program (If Equipped)
. Touch On or Off.
MTP (Media Transfer Protocol)
. Connect a MTP supported device.
. Play will start automatically after the system has finished reading the MTP device.
. If a non-readable MTP device is connected, an error message displays and the system will switch to the previous audio function.
Infotainment System 205
iPod/iPhone Player
This feature is limited to models supporting the iPod/iPhone connection.
Playing Music Files
. Connect the iPod/iPhone to the USB port.
. Play will start from the previously played point after the system has finished reading the USB device.
. If a non-readable USB device is connected, an error message displays and the system will switch to the previous audio function.
If the iPod/iPhone is already connected:
1. Press {.
2. Touch AUDIO.
3. Touch Source.
4. Touch iPod.
To stop the device and select another media source, touch Source, then select the other source.
206 Infotainment System
To remove the device, select another function, then remove the device.
Pause
. Touch j to pause.
. Touch to resume.
r
Changing to Next/Previous Song
. Touch l to change to the
next song.
. Touch g within two seconds of
the playback time to play the previous file.
Returning to the Beginning of the Current File
Touch g after two seconds of the
playback time.
Scanning Forward or Backward
Touch and hold g or l during
playback to rewind or fast forward. Release the button to resume playback at normal speed.
Playing a File Randomly
Touch Z during playback.
. ON: Plays all files randomly.
. OFF: Returns to normal playback.
Using the iPod Menu
. Touch Menu during playback.
. Touch the appropriate play mode.
Browse Music
1. Touch Browse Music.
2. Touch the desired music.
Tone Settings
. Touch Tone Settings. The Tone Settings menu is displayed. See "Tone Settings" under "Base Radio with Touchscreen" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Auto Volume
. Touch Auto Volume. The Auto Volume menu is displayed. See "Auto Volume" under "Base Radio with Touchscreen" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Picture System Information
The infotainment system can view picture files stored on a USB storage device and devices that support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP).
. Supported file extensions: .jpg, .bmp, .png, .gif.
. Animated GIF files are not supported.
. Some files may not operate due to a different recording format or the condition of the file.
Viewing Pictures
1. Connect the USB device to the USB port.
2. Touch the screen to open to full screen. Touch the screen again to return to the previous screen.
If the USB device is already connected:
1. Press {.
2. Touch GALLERY.
Some features are disabled while the vehicle is in motion.
Viewing a Slide Show
1. Touch from the picture
z
screen.
2. Touch the screen to cancel the slide show during the slide show playback.
Viewing a Previous or Next Picture
Touch S or T from the picture
screen.
Rotating a Picture
Touch from the picture screen.
w
Enlarging a Picture
Touch from the picture screen.
x
Using the USB Picture Menu
1. Touch MENU from the picture screen.
2. Touch the appropriate menu:
. Slide Show Time: Allows selection of the slide show interval.
. Clock, Temp. Display: Allows selection of On or Off to show the clock and temperature on the full screen.
. Display Settings: Adjusts for Brightness and Contrast.
3. Touch 0 to exit.
Auxiliary Jack
This vehicle may have an AUX jack in the center console or armrest. See Center Console Storage 0 116.
Infotainment System 207
Possible auxiliary audio sources include:
. Laptop computer
. Audio music player
This jack is not an audio output. Do not plug headphones into the auxiliary input jack. Auxiliary devices should be set up while the vehicle is in P (Park).
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable from the auxiliary device to the auxiliary input jack.
If an auxiliary device has already been connected, but a different source is currently active, press the MEDIA faceplate button repeatedly to scroll through all of the available audio source screens, until the AUX source screen is shown.
Base Radio
Playing from the AUX Jack
An auxiliary device is played through the audio system and controlled through the device itself.
208 Infotainment System
AUX Menu
Press the MENU knob to display the AUX menu and the following may display:
Tone Settings : Select to adjust Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See "Tone Settings" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Auto Volume : If equipped, see "Playing an Audio CD."
DSP : If equipped, this feature adjusts the pre-defined settings. See "DSP" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
EQ (Equalizer) : If equipped, this feature adjusts the pre-defined equalizer settings. See "EQ (Equalizer)" in AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Base Radio with Touchscreen
Play will begin when the system has finished reading the information on the device.
Playing Music
To play the music from the device, if the device is already connected:
1. Press {.
2. Touch AUDIO.
3. Touch Source.
4. Touch AUX.
To adjust the tone settings. See "Audio Settings" in "System Settings" under AM-FM Radio (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 191 or AM-FM Radio (Base Radio) 0 189.
Bluetooth Audio
If equipped, music may be played from a paired Bluetooth device. See "Pairing" under Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base Radio) 0 221 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls Base Radio) 0 217 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 216 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 226 for help pairing a device.
Volume and song selection may be controlled by using the infotainment controls or the phone/device. If Bluetooth Audio is selected and nothing is heard, check the volume setting on both the phone/device and the infotainment system.
Launch music by pressing the MEDIA screen button on the Home Page.
To play music via Bluetooth:
1. Power on the device, and pair to connect the device.
2. Once paired, go into the audio application from the Home Page or via the application tray. Select MEDIA until Bluetooth displays.
Bluetooth Audio Menu
Press the MENU screen button to display the Bluetooth Audio menu. The following may be available:
Tone: Turn the MENU knob to adjust the tone settings.
Press BACK to go back to the
o
previous menu.
Manage Bluetooth Devices: Select to go to the Bluetooth page to add or delete devices.
When selecting Bluetooth Audio, the radio may not be able to launch the audio player on the connected device to start playing. When the vehicle is not moving, use the phone to begin playback.
All devices launch audio differently. When selecting Bluetooth Audio as a source, the radio may show as paused on the screen. Press play
on the device or press to begin
r
playback.
Some phones support sending Bluetooth music information to display on the radio. When the radio receives this information, it will check to see if any is available and display it. For more information about supported Bluetooth features, see www.gm.com/bluetooth for U.S. and Canada only.
Infotainment System 209
Voice Recognition
If equipped, voice recognition allows for hands-free operation within the audio and phone applications. This feature can be started by pressing
either the button on the steering
g
wheel or by selecting the on the
g
screen display.
However, not all features within these areas are supported by voice commands. Generally, only complex tasks that require multiple manual interactions to complete are supported by voice commands.
For example, tasks that take more than one or two button presses such as selecting a song or artist to play from a media device would be supported by voice commands. Other tasks, like adjusting the volume or seeking up or down are audio features that are easily performed by pressing one or two buttons, and are not supported by voice commands.
In general there are flexible ways to speak commands for completing the tasks. Most of them, except
210 Infotainment System
destination entry and voice keypad, can be completed in a single command. If the task takes more than one command to complete, the first command would be to indicate the kind of task that is to be performed. The system replies with prompts that lead through a dialog to enter the necessary information.
Voice recognition can be used when the ignition is on or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271.
Using Voice Recognition
Voice recognition becomes available once the system has been initialized. This begins when the ignition is turned on. Initialization may take a few moments.
1. Press on the steering wheel
g
control to activate voice
recognition, or select on the
g
infotainment screen on the center stack.
. If voice recognition is started from the steering wheel control, the
instrument cluster displays the selections and visual dialog content.
. If voice recognition is started from the infotainment screen, the selections and visual dialog content are displayed on both the center stack display and the instrument cluster display.
2. The audio system mutes and the system plays a prompt followed by a beep.
3. Wait until after the beep completes, then clearly speak one of the commands described in this section.
Press to interrupt any voice
g
recognition system prompt. For example, if the prompt seems to be taking too long to finish,
press again and the beep
g
should happen right away.
There are two voice prompt modes supported:
. Long verbal prompts: The longer prompts provide more information regarding the supported actions.
. Short prompts: The short prompts provide simple instructions about what can be stated.
If a command is not spoken, the voice recognition system says a help prompt.
Prompts and Screen Displays
While a voice recognition session is active, there will be corresponding buttons on screens displayed. Manual interaction in the voice recognition session is permitted. Interaction during a voice session may be completed entirely using voice commands, or some selections may expedite a session. If a selection is made using a manual control, the dialog will progress in the same way as if the selection was made through a voice command. Once the system is able
to complete the task, or the session is terminated, the voice recognition dialog stops.
An example of this type of manual intervention is pressing on an entry of a displayed number list instead of speaking the number associated with the entry desired.
Canceling Voice Recognition
. Press the Home screen button to terminate the voice recognition session which was
initiated by pressing on the
g
infotainment screen on the center stack.
. Press or say "Cancel" or "Exit" to terminate the voice recognition session and display the screen from which voice recognition was initiated.
. Press on the steering wheel
i
controls to terminate the voice session and display the screen from which voice recognition was initiated.
Helpful Hints for Speaking Commands
Voice recognition can understand commands that are either naturally stated in sentence form (English only), or direct commands that state the application and the task.
For languages that do not support natural language commands in sentence form, use the direct commands shown as examples on the display screen.
For best results:
. Listen for the prompt and wait for the beep before saying a command or reply.
. Say "Help" or look at the screen display for commands.
. Voice recognition system prompt can be interrupted during a
prompt by pressing again.
g
For example, if the prompt seems to be taking too long to finish, or if what is being prompted causes a need for an
immediate reply, press again
g
and wait for the beep.
Infotainment System 211
. Speak the command naturally, not too fast, not too slow. Use direct commands without a lot of extra words.
. Usually Phone and Audio commands can be spoken in a single command.
For example, "Call Dave Smith at work," "Play" followed by the artist or song name, or "Tune" followed by the radio station number.
There is no need to memorize specific command words. Direct commands might be more clearly understood by the system. An example of a direct command would be "Call 555-1212." Examples of these direct commands are displayed on most of the screens while a voice session is active. If "Phone" or "Phone Commands," is stated, the system understands that a phone call is requested and will respond with questions until enough details are gathered.
212 Infotainment System
If the phone number has been saved with a name and a place, the direct command should include both, for example "Call Dave Smith at work."
Using Voice Recognition for List Options
When a list is displayed, a voice prompt will ask to confirm or select an option from that list. A selection can be made by manually selecting the item, or by speaking the line number for the item to select.
When a screen contains a list, options may be available but not displayed. The list on a voice recognition screen functions the same as a list on other screens. Scrolling can be used to help display other entries from the list.
Manually scrolling or paging the list on a screen during a voice recognition session suspends the current voice recognition event and plays the prompt "Make your selection from the list using the manual controls or press the Back button to try again."
If manual selection takes more than 15 seconds, the session terminates and prompts that it has timed out. The screen returns back to the screen where voice recognition was initiated.
The Back Command
Say "Back" or press the Back button to go to the previous screen.
If in voice recognition, and "Back" is stated all the way through to the initial screen, then "Back" is stated one more time, the voice recognition session will cancel.
Help
Say "Help" on any voice recognition screen and the help prompt for the screen is played. Additionally, a pop-up displays a text version of the help prompt. Depending on how voice recognition was initiated, the Help pop-up will either display on the instrument cluster or the infotainment screen. Press the Dismiss button to make the pop-up go away.
Pressing while the help prompt is
g
playing will terminate the prompt and a beep will be heard. Doing this will stop the help prompt so that a voice command can be used.
Voice Recognition for the Radio
Select the screen button to
g
launch audio voice recognition. If the voice button is pressed in a radio screen, the voice commands for radio and media features are available.
"Switch to AM" : Switch bands to AM and tune to the last AM radio station.
"Switch to FM" : Switch bands to FM and tune to the last FM radio station.
"Switch to SXM" : Switch bands to SiriusXM (if equipped) and tune to the last SiriusXM channel.
"Tune to <AM frequency> AM" : Tune to the radio station whose frequency is identified in the command (like "nine fifty").
"Tune to <FM frequency> FM" : Tune to the radio station whose frequency is identified in the command (like "one o one point one").
"Tune to SXM <SXM channel number>" : Tune to the SiriusXM (if equipped) radio station whose channel number is identified in the command.
"Tune to SXM <SXM channel name>" : Tune to the SiriusXM (if equipped) radio station whose channel name is identified in the command.
Voice Recognition for Audio My Media
If browsing My Media when the voice button is selected, the voice recognition commands for My Media features are available.
"Play Artist" : Begin a dialog to enter a specific Artist name.
"Play Artist <artist name>" : Begin playback of the media selection identified in the command.
"Play Album" : Begin a dialog to enter a specific album name.
"Play Album <album name>" : Begin playback of the identified album name in the command.
"Play Song" : Begin a dialog to enter a specific song name.
"Play Song <song name>" : Begin playback of the identified song name in the command.
"Play Genre" : Begin a dialog to enter a specific genre.
"Play Genre <genre name>" : Begin playback of the media selection identified in the command.
"Play Playlist" : Begin a dialog to enter a specific playlist name.
"Play Playlist <playlist name>" : Begin playback of the identified playlist in the command.
"Play <device name>" : Play music from a specific device identified by name. The device name is the name displayed on the screen when the device is first selected as an audio source.
Infotainment System 213
"Play Chapter" : Begin a dialog to enter a specific name.
"Play Chapter <chapter name>" : Begin playback of the media selection identified in the command.
"Play Audiobook" : Begin a dialog to enter a specific name.
"Play Audiobook <audiobook name>" : Begin playback of the media selection identified in the command.
"Play CD Track <track number>" : Begin playback of the CD at the track identified in the command.
"Play Episode" : Begin a dialog to enter a specific name.
"Play Episode <episode name>" : Begin playback of the media selection identified in the command.
"Play Podcast" : Begin a dialog to enter a specific name.
"Play Podcast <podcast name>" : Begin playback of the media selection identified in the command.
214 Infotainment System
"Play Video" : Begin a dialog to enter a specific name.
"Play Video <video name>" : Begin playback of the media selection identified in the command.
"My Media" : Begin a dialog to enter the desired media content.
Handling Large Amounts of Media Content
It is expected that large amounts of media content will be brought into the vehicle. It may be necessary to handle large amounts of media content in a different way than smaller amounts of media. The system may limit the options of voice recognition by not allowing selection of song titles by voice at the highest level if the number of songs exceeds the maximum limit.
Voice command option changes through media content limits are:
. Song files including other individual files of all media types such as audiobook chapters, podcast episodes, and videos.
. Album type folders including types such as albums and audiobooks.
There are no restrictions if the number of song files and albums is less than 4,000. When the number of song files connected to the system is between 4,000 and 8,000, the content cannot be accessed directly with one command like "Play <song name>."
The restriction is that the command "Play Song" must be spoken first; the system will then ask for the song name. The reply command would be to say the name of the song to play.
Similar limits exist for album content. If there are more than 4,000 albums, but less than 8,000, the content cannot be accessed directly with one command like, "Play <album name>." The command "Play Album" must first be spoken; the system will then ask for the album name. The reply would be to say the name of the album to play.
Once the number of songs has exceeded approximately 8,000, there is no support for accessing the songs directly through voice commands. There will still be access to the media content by using commands for playlists, artists, and genres.
The access commands for playlists, artists, and genres are prohibited after the number of this type of media exceeds 4,000.
The system will provide feedback the first time voice recognition is initiated if it has become apparent that any of these limits are reached during a device initializing process.
Voice Recognition for the Phone
"Call <contact name>" : Initiate a call to an entered contact. The command may include location if the contact has location numbers stored.
"Call <contact name> At Home," "At Work," "On Mobile," or "On Other" : Initiate a call to an entered contact and location at home, at work, on mobile device, or on another phone.
"Call <phone number>" : Initiate a call to a standard phone number seven or 10 digits in length, and also 911, 411, or 611.
"Pair Phone" : Begins the Bluetooth pairing process. Follow instructions on the radio display.
"Switch Phone" : Select a different phone for outgoing calls.
"Voice Keypad" : Begins a dialog to enter special numbers like international numbers. The numbers can be entered in groups of digits with each group of digits being repeated back by the system. If the group of digits is not correct, the
command "Delete" will remove the last group of digits and allow them to be re-entered. Once the entire number has been entered, the command "Call" will start dialing the number.
"Voice Mail" : Initiate a call to voice mail numbers.
Voice Recognition for OnStar (If Equipped)
"OnStar" : Begin OnStar Voice Recognition.
Bluetooth Speech Recognition (If Equipped)
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the speech recognition commands on the cell phone. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature.
Infotainment System 215
Activating this function will start the Bluetooth Speech Recognition on a connected phone.
The steering wheel controls are used to operate this function.
Press and hold to activate.
g
A voice session begins so that voice commands can be given to Siri® or many other controls provided by the cell phone.
Press @ to exit or press to i
close and return to the previous application prior to the start of Voice Pass-Thru.
216 Infotainment System
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview)
Instructions for using the cell phone may differ between infotainment systems. The base radio and base radio with touchscreen instructions are included in this manual. See the infotainment manual for instructions on the uplevel radios.
Bluetooth-capable systems can interact with many cell phones, allowing:
. Placement and receipt of calls in a hands-free mode.
. Sharing of the cell phone's address book or contact list with the vehicle.
To minimize driver distraction, before driving, and with the vehicle parked:
. Become familiar with the features of the cell phone. Organize the phone book and contact lists clearly and delete
duplicate or rarely used entries. If possible, program speed dial or other shortcuts.
. Review the controls and operation of the infotainment system.
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. The system may not work with all cell phones. See "Pairing" in this section.
. If the cell phone has voice dialing capability, learn to use that feature to access the address book or contact list.
. See "Deleting a Paired Phone" and/or "Deleting a Bluetooth Device" in this section.
{ Warning
When using a cell phone, it can be distracting to look too long or too often at the screen of the phone or the infotainment system. Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth-capable cell phone with a Hands-Free Profile to make and receive phone calls. The infotainment system and voice recognition are used to control the system. The system can be used while in ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support all functions and not all phones work with the Bluetooth system. For U.S. and Canada only, see www.gm.com/ bluetooth for more information about compatible phones.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons on the instrument panel, faceplate, and the steering wheel to operate the Bluetooth system.
Steering Wheel Controls
: Press to answer incoming calls,
g
confirm system information, and start voice recognition.
: Press to end a call, reject a
i
call, or cancel an operation. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system.
Infotainment System Controls
For information about how to navigate the menu system using the infotainment controls, see Overview (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 183 or Overview (Base Radio) 0 184.
MENU : Turn to scroll through a list. Press to select the highlighted list option.
{ : Press to go to the Home Page.
See Home Page (Base Radio) 0 186 or Home Page (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 188.
PHONE or : Select to enter the
#
phone main menu. See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base Radio) 0 221 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio) 0 217 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 216 or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 226.
Voice Recognition
If equipped, the voice recognition system uses commands to control the system and dial phone numbers.
Noise : The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise, such as noise from open windows or loud talking inside the vehicle.
When to Speak : A tone sounds to indicate that the system is ready for a voice command. Wait for the tone and then speak.
How to Speak : Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice.
Audio System
When using the Bluetooth system, sound comes through the vehicle's front audio system speakers and
oOvekrnroidbesduthriengauadcioalsl ytostcehma.nUgesethtehe
volume level. The system maintains a minimum volume level.
Infotainment System 217
Bluetooth Audio Quality
Turn off the Echo and Noise cancellation feature on your phone, if supported, for the best hands-free performance.
See www.gm.com/bluetooth for U.S. and Canada only.
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio)
For information about how to navigate the menu system using the infotainment controls, see Overview (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 183 or Overview (Base Radio) 0 184.
Switching to Handset or Hands-Free Mode
To switch between handset mode and hands-free mode, use the OnStar command, "transfer call."
Pairing
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must be paired to the Bluetooth system and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See
218 Infotainment System
your cell phone manufacturer's user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not connected, calls can be made using OnStar Hands-Free Calling, if available. See OnStar Overview 0 486, if equipped.
Pairing Information
. Up to five cell phones can be paired to the Bluetooth system.
. The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving.
. Pairing only needs to be completed once per phone, unless the pairing information on the cell phone changes or the cell phone is deleted from the system.
. Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the Bluetooth system at a time.
. If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the first available paired cell phone in the order that they were newly paired to the system. To connect
to a different paired phone, see "Connecting to a Different Phone" later in this section.
Pairing a Phone or Device
1. From the Home Page, turn the MENU knob to access the PHONE screen button, then press the MENU knob to select the PHONE screen button. If a device has been previously paired, the main Phone menu will be shown. If no devices have been paired, Step 2 can be skipped.
2. Turn the MENU knob and press to select Manage Phones.
3. Press the button just below the PAIR screen button. A four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN) appears on the display. The PIN is used in Step 5.
4. Start the pairing process on the cell phone to be paired to the vehicle. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide for information on this process.
5. Locate the device named "Your Vehicle" in the list on the cell phone. Follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the PIN provided in Step 3. If a six digit code is shown on the phone and the vehicle screen, confirm the codes are the same. The system recognizes the new connected phone after the pairing process is complete.
6. If the phone prompts to accept connection or allow phone book download, select Always Accept and Allow. The phone book may not be available if not accepted.
7. Repeat Steps 16 to pair additional phones or devices.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. To list all paired devices, from the Home Page turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button.
2. Turn the MENU knob and press to select Manage Phones.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. From the Home Page, turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button.
2. Turn the MENU knob and press to select Manage Phones.
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the phone to be deleted.
4. Press the button below the DELETE screen button to delete the highlighted device.
5. A confirmation screen is displayed. Press the button just below the DELETE screen button to confirm deletion.
Connecting to a Different Phone
1. From the Home Page, turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button.
2. Turn the MENU knob and press to select Manage Phones.
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the phone to be connected.
4. Press the button just below the CONNECT screen button to connect to the highlighted device.
Phone Menu
Once a phone is connected and selected, the following may display:
Recent Calls : Turn the MENU knob to highlight Recent Calls and press to select.
Contacts : Turn the MENU knob to highlight Contacts and press to select.
Keypad : Turn the MENU knob to highlight Keypad and press to select.
Active Call : Turn the MENU knob to highlight Active Call and press to select and display the active call screen.
Infotainment System 219
Manage Phones : Turn the MENU knob to highlight Manage Phones and press to select.
Making a Call Using Contacts and Recent Calls
For cell phones that support the Contacts and Recent Calls feature, the Bluetooth system can use the contacts stored on your cell phone to make calls. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide or contact your wireless provider to find out if this feature is supported by your phone.
If the phone prompts to allow phone book download during the pairing process, select Always Accept and Allow. The phone book may not be available if not accepted.
When a cell phone supports the phone book feature, the Contacts and Recent Calls menus are automatically available.
The Contacts menu allows you to access the phone book stored in the cell phone to make a call.
220 Infotainment System
The Recent Calls menu allows you to access the phone numbers from the Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and Missed Calls menus on the cell phone to make a call.
To make a call using the Contacts menu:
1. From the Home Page, turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Contacts and press to select.
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the letter group and press to select.
4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the contact and press to select.
5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the desired number, then press the MENU knob to call the contact.
To make a call using the Recent Calls menu:
1. From the Home Page, turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Recent Calls and press to select.
If necessary, select between Missed, Recent, and Sent calls by pressing the button below the appropriate screen button.
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the contact or the phone number.
4. Press the MENU knob to call the contact.
Making a Call Using the Keypad
To make a call:
1. From the Home Page, turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button.
2. Turn the MENU knob and press to select Keypad.
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the first digit and press to select. Continue this process through the number. To call, press the button just below the CALL screen button.
Accepting or Declining a Call
When an incoming call is received, the infotainment system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Accepting a Call
To accept a call, do one of the following:
. Press the button just below the ANSWER screen button.
. Press on the steering wheel
g
controls.
Declining a Call
To decline a call, do one of the following:
. Press the button just below the IGNORE screen button.
. Press on the steering wheel
i
controls. . Do nothing.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Accepting a Call Waiting Call
To accept a call waiting call, do one of the following: . Press the button just below the
SWITCH screen button.
. Press on the steering wheel
g
controls.
Declining a Call Waiting Call
To decline a call waiting call, do one of the following: . Press the button just below the
IGNORE screen button.
. Press on the steering wheel
i
controls. . Do nothing.
Ending a Call
To end a call, do one of the following:
. Press the button just below the END screen button.
. Press on the steering wheel
i
controls.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers during a call. This is used when calling a menu-driven phone system.
1. When a call is active, press the button just below the KEYPAD screen button.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the first digit and press to select.
If not initially in the phone application, from the Home Page, turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button. From the PHONE main menu, turn the MENU knob to highlight Active Call and press to select.
Infotainment System 221
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base Radio)
Using Voice Recognition
To use voice recognition, press
g
on the steering wheel. Use the commands below for the various voice features. For additional information, say "Help" while you are in a voice recognition menu.
Pairing
Pairing a Phone
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone.
2. Say "Bluetooth." 3. Say "Pair." The system
responds with instructions and a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
4. Start the pairing process on the cell phone that you want to pair. For help with this process, see your cell phone manufacturer's user guide.
222 Infotainment System
5. Locate the device named "Your Vehicle" in the list on the cell phone. Follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the PIN provided in Step 3. The system may respond with a six digit code to be confirmed on the cell phone (instead of entering a four digit code), check that the same digits are shown on the cell phone and say "Yes" to confirm. Select Confirm on the cell phone as well. After the PIN is successfully entered, the system prompts you to provide a name for the paired cell phone. This name will be used to indicate which phones are paired and connected to the vehicle. The system responds with "<Phone name> has been successfully paired" after the pairing process is complete.
6. Repeat Steps 15 to pair additional phones.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
The system can list all cell phones paired to it. If a paired cell phone is also connected to the vehicle, the system responds with "is connected" after that phone name.
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone.
2. Say "Bluetooth."
3. Say "List."
Deleting a Paired Phone
If the phone name to delete is unknown, see "Listing All Paired and Connected Phones."
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone.
2. Say "Bluetooth."
3. Say "Delete." The system asks for which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone to delete.
Connecting to a Different Phone
To connect to a different cell phone, the Bluetooth system looks for the next available cell phone in the order in which all available cell phones were paired. This may need to be repeated depending on how many cell phones have been connected.
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone.
2. Say "Bluetooth."
3. Say "Change phone."
. If another cell phone is found, the response will be "<Phone name> is now connected."
This can be repeated to connect any of the up to five paired phones.
. If another cell phone is not found, the original phone remains connected.
Storing and Deleting Phone Numbers
The following commands are used to delete and store phone numbers.
Store : This command will store a phone number, or a group of numbers as a name tag.
Digit Store : This command allows a phone number to be stored as a name tag by entering the digits one at a time.
Delete : This command is used to delete individual name tags.
Delete All Name Tags : This command deletes all stored name tags in the Hands-Free Calling Directory and the Destinations Directory.
Using the "Store" Command
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone.
2. Say "Store."
3. Say the entire phone number or a group of digits all at once with no pauses, then follow the
directions given by the system to save a name tag for this number.
Using the "Digit Store" Command
If an unwanted number is recognized by the system, say "Correction" at any time to clear the last number.
To hear all of the digits recognized by the system, say "Verify" at any time.
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone.
2. Say "Digit Store."
3. Say each digit, one at a time. After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone. After the last digit has been entered, say "Store," and then follow the directions given by the system to save a name tag for this number.
Using the "Delete" Command
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone.
Infotainment System 223
2. Say "Delete." 3. Say the name tag you want to
delete.
Using the "Delete All Name Tags" Command
This command deletes all stored name tags in the Hands-Free Calling Directory and the Destinations Directory.
To delete all name tags:
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone. 2. Say "Delete all name tags."
Listing Stored Numbers
The list command will list all the stored numbers and name tags.
Using the "List" Command
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone. 2. Say "Directory." 3. Say "Hands-Free Calling." 4. Say "List."
224 Infotainment System
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands.
Dial or Call : The dial or call command can be used interchangeably to dial a phone number or a stored name tag.
Digit Dial : This command allows a phone number to be dialed by entering the digits one at a time.
Re-dial : This command is used to dial the last number used on the cell phone.
Using the "Dial" or "Call" Command
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone. 2. Say "Dial" or "Call."
3. Say the entire number without pausing or say the name tag.
Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers.
Calling Emergency
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone.
2. Say "Dial" or "Call."
3. Say [emergency number].
4. Say "Dial" or "Call."
Using the "Digit Dial" Command
The digit dial command allows a phone number to be dialed by entering the digits one at a time. After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the system, say "Correction" at any time to clear the last number.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, say "Verify" at any time.
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone.
2. Say "Digit Dial."
3. Say each digit, one at a time. After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone. After the last digit has been entered, say "Dial."
Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers.
Using the "Re-dial" Command
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say "Re-dial." The system dials the last number called from the connected cell phone.
Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
. Press to answer the call.
g
. Press to ignore a call.
i
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier.
. Press to answer an incoming
g
call when another call is active. The original call is placed on hold.
. Press again to return to the
g
original call.
. To ignore the incoming call, no action is required.
. Press to disconnect the
i
current call and switch to the call on hold.
Three-Way Calling
Three-way calling must be supported on the cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier.
1. While on a call, press .
g
2. Say "Three-way call."
3. Use the "Dial" or "Call" command to dial the number of the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press to link all callers
g
together.
Ending a Call
Press to end a call.
i
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
The cell phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred. The connection process can take up to two minutes after the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
To Transfer Audio from the Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press .
g
2. Say "Transfer Call."
Infotainment System 225
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth System from a Cell Phone
During a call with the audio on the cell phone, press . The audio
g
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio does not transfer to the vehicle, use the audio transfer feature on the cell phone. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide for more information.
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice pass-thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature.
To access contacts stored in the cell phone:
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone.
2. Say "Bluetooth."
3. Say "Voice." The system responds "OK, accessing <phone name>."
226 Infotainment System
The cell phone's normal prompt messages will go through their cycle according to the phone's operating instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones
The Bluetooth system can send numbers and the numbers stored as name tags during a call. You can use this feature when calling a menu-driven phone system. Account numbers can also be stored for use.
Sending a Number or Name Tag During a Call
1. Press . The system responds
g
"Ready," followed by a tone. 2. Say "Dial."
3. Say the number or name tag to send.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This includes all phone pairing
information. For information on how to delete this information, see "Deleting a Paired Phone."
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Base Radio with Touchscreen)
To use infotainment controls to access the menu system, see Overview (Base Radio with Touchscreen) 0 183 or Overview (Base Radio) 0 184.
Pairing
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must be paired to the Bluetooth system and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not connected, calls will be made using OnStar Hands-Free Calling, if available. See OnStar Overview 0 486.
Pairing Information
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3 capability cannot be paired to the vehicle as a phone and an MP3 player at the same time.
. Up to 10 cell phones can be paired to the Bluetooth system.
. The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving.
. Pairing only needs to be completed once, unless the pairing information on the cell phone changes or the cell phone is deleted from the system.
. Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the Bluetooth system at a time.
. If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the first available paired cell phone in the order that they were first paired to the system.
When the Bluetooth device and infotainment system are successfully paired, the phone book is downloaded automatically. This is dependent on the type of the phone
paired. If the automatic download does not occur, proceed with the phone book download on the phone.
Pairing a Phone - SSP and No Paired Device
When there is no paired device on the infotainment system and Simple Secure Pairing (SSP) is supported:
1. Press {.
2. Touch PHONE, press on the
#
faceplate, or press on the
g
steering wheel without OnStar.
3. Touch Search Device.
4. Touch the desired device to pair on the searched list screen.
5. Touch Yes on the pop-up screen of the Bluetooth device and infotainment system.
6. When the Bluetooth device and infotainment system are successfully paired, the phone screen is displayed on the infotainment system.
Pairing a Phone - SSP and Paired Device
When a paired device is on the infotainment system and SSP is supported:
1. Press {.
2. Touch Settings.
3. Touch Bluetooth, then Device Management.
4. Touch the desired device to pair. When the Bluetooth device and infotainment system
are successfully paired, Z / 5
is displayed on the pair device screen. If no desired device is available go to Step 5.
5. Touch Search Device to search for the desired device.
6. Touch the desired device to pair on the searched list screen.
7. Touch Yes on the pop-up screen of the Bluetooth device and infotainment system.
. The connected phone is
highlighted by 5.
Infotainment System 227
. Z / 5 indicates the hands-free
and phone music functions are enabled.
. 5 indicates only the hands-free
function is enabled.
. Z indicates only Bluetooth
music is enabled.
Pairing a Phone - No SSP and No Paired Device
When there is no paired device on the infotainment system and SSP is not supported:
1. Press {.
2. Touch PHONE, press on the
#
faceplate, or press on the
g
steering wheel without OnStar.
3. Touch Search Device.
4. Touch the desired device to pair on the searched list screen.
5. Input the Personal Identification Number (PIN) code (default: 1234) to the Bluetooth device. When the Bluetooth device and
228 Infotainment System
infotainment system are successfully paired, the PHONE screen is displayed on the infotainment system.
When the connection fails, a failure message is displayed on the infotainment system.
If a Bluetooth device was previously connected, the infotainment system executes the auto connection. However, if the Bluetooth setting on the Bluetooth device is turned off, a failure message is displayed on the infotainment system.
Pairing a Phone - No SSP and Paired Device
When a paired device is on the infotainment system and SSP is not supported:
1. Press {.
2. Touch Settings.
3. Touch Bluetooth, then Device Management.
4. Touch the desired device to pair. When the Bluetooth device and infotainment system
are successfully paired, Z / 5
is displayed on the pair device screen. If no desired device is available go to Step 5.
5. Touch Search Device to search for the desired device.
6. Touch the desired device to pair on the searched list screen.
7. Input the Personal Identification Number (PIN) code (default: 1234) to the Bluetooth device. When the Bluetooth device and infotainment system are
successfully paired, Z / 5 is
displayed on the pair device screen.
. The connected phone is
highlighted by 5.
. Z / 5 indicates the hands-free
and phone music functions are enabled.
. 5 indicates only the hands-free
function is enabled.
. Z indicates only Bluetooth
music is enabled.
Connecting a Paired Bluetooth Device
1. Press {.
2. Touch Settings.
3. Touch Bluetooth, then Device Management.
4. Touch the device to be connected.
Checking the Bluetooth Connection
1. Press {.
2. Touch Settings.
3. Touch Bluetooth, then Device Management.
4. The paired device will show.
Disconnecting a Bluetooth Device
1. Press {.
2. Touch Settings.
3. Touch Bluetooth, then Device Management.
4. Touch the name of the device to be disconnected.
5. Touch Disconnect.
Deleting a Bluetooth Device
1. Press {.
2. Touch Settings.
3. Touch Bluetooth, then Device Management.
4. Touch the device to delete.
5. Touch Y.
6. Touch Delete.
Bluetooth Music
Before playing Bluetooth music, read the following information.
. A cell phone or Bluetooth device that supports Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) versions over 1.2 must be registered and connected to the product.
. From the cell phone or Bluetooth device, find the Bluetooth device type to set/connect the item as a stereo headset.
. e will appear on the screen if
the stereo headset is successfully connected.
. The sound played by the Bluetooth device is delivered through the infotainment system.
. Bluetooth music can be played only when a Bluetooth device has been connected. To play Bluetooth music, connect the Bluetooth phone to the infotainment system.
. If the Bluetooth device is disconnected while playing phone music, the music is discontinued. The audio streaming function may not be supported in some Bluetooth phones. Only one function can be used at a time between the Bluetooth hands-free or Phone music function. For example, if you convert to Bluetooth hands-free while playing Phone music, the music is discontinued. Playing music from the car is not possible when there are no music files stored in the cell phone.
Infotainment System 229
Playing Bluetooth Music
1. Press {.
2. Touch AUDIO. 3. Touch Source. 4. Touch Bluetooth.
Pause
Touch j to pause.
Touch to resume.
r
Playing the Next Song
Touch l.
Playing the Previous Song
Touch g within two seconds of
playback time to play the previous song.
Returning to the Beginning of the Current Song
Touch g after two seconds of
playback time.
Search
Touch and hold g or l to rewind
or fast forward.
230 Infotainment System
Playing Music Randomly
Touch Z during playback. Touch
again to return to normal play.
This function may not be supported depending on the bluetooth device.
Do not change the track too quickly when playing Bluetooth music.
Conditions that may occur when playing Bluetooth music:
. It takes time to transmit data from the bluetooth device to the infotainment system.
. If the cell phone or Bluetooth device is not in the waiting screen mode, it may not automatically play.
. The infotainment system transmits the order to play from the bluetooth device in the Bluetooth music play mode. If this is done in a different mode, then the device transmits the order to stop. Depending on the bluetooth device options, this order to play/stop may take time to activate.
. If the Bluetooth music playback is not functioning, then check to see if the bluetooth device is in the waiting screen mode.
. Sounds may be cut off during the Bluetooth music playback.
. The infotainment system outputs the audio from the cell phone or Bluetooth device as it is transmitted.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
If equipped, Android AutoTM and/or Apple CarPlayTM capability may be available through a compatible smartphone. If available, a PROJECTION icon will appear as Android Auto or Car Play on the Home Page of the infotainment display.
To use Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay:
1. Download the Android Auto app to your phone from the GoogleTM Play store. There is
no app required for Apple CarPlay. Use the latest available operation system.
2. Connect your Android phone or Apple iPhone by using the compatible phone USB cable and plugging into a USB data port. For best performance, use the device's factory-provided USB cable. Aftermarket or third-party cables may not work.
The PROJECTION icon on the Home Page will change to Android Auto or Apple CarPlay depending on the phone. Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay may automatically launch upon USB connection. If not, touch the ANDROID AUTO and/or APPLE CARPLAY icon on the Home Page to launch.
For further information on how to set up Android Auto and Apple CarPlay in the vehicle, see www.my.chevrolet.com for the U.S. and www.chevroletowner.ca for Canada only or Customer Assistance Offices 0 474.
Android Auto is provided by Google and is subject to Google's terms and privacy policy. CarPlay is provided by Apple and is subject to Apple's terms and privacy policy. For Android Auto support see https://support.google.com/ androidauto or Apple CarPlay support at https://www.apple.com/ ios/carplay/. Apple or Google may change or suspend availability at any time. Android Auto is a trademark of Google Inc.; Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Trademarks and License Agreements
FCC Information See Radio Frequency Statement 0 482.
"Made for iPod" and "Made for iPhone" mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. iPhone®, iPod®, iPod classic®, iPod nano®,
Infotainment System 231
iPod shuffle®, and iPod touch® are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM® service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. In Canada: Some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes. This is beyond the control of SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. Explicit Language Notice: Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an "XL" preceding the
232 Infotainment System
channel name. Channel blocking is available for SiriusXM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying SiriusXM:
. USA Customers -- See www.siriusxm.com or call 1-866-6352349.
. Canadian Customers -- See www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-209-0079.
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio System or that support the SiriusXM website, the Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBER voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
General Requirements:
1. A License Agreement from SiriusXM® is required for any product that incorporates SiriusXM Technology and/or for use of any of the SiriusXM marks to be manufactured, distributed, or marketed in the SiriusXM Service Area.
2. For products to be distributed, marketed, and/or sold in Canada, a separate agreement is required with Canadian Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as SiriusXM Canada).
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Schedule I: Gracenote EULA
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com. Music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote may apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.
Gracenote Terms of Use
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this application to do disc or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, "Gracenote Servers") and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.
This application or device may contain content belonging to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to
all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
Infotainment System 233
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you "AS IS." Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are
234 Infotainment System
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
© 2013. Gracenote, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Unicode
Copyright © 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/ copyright.html.
Free Type Project
Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The FreeType Project (http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
iType
iType is a trademark of Monotype Imaging Inc. registered in the U.S. Patent & Trademark Office and may be registered in certain other jurisdictions.
Open Source SW
The open source code used in this device can be downloaded at the webpage shown in the information at the center stack display. Further information concerning the OSS licenses is shown in the center stack display.
QNX
Portions of this software are copyright © 2008-2013, QNX Software Systems. All rights reserved.
Part C EULA
Copyright 2013, Software Systems GmbH & Co. KG. All Rights Reserved.
The product you have purchased ("Product") contains Software (Runtime Configuration No. 505962; "Software") which is distributed by or on behalf of the Product manufacturer "Manufacturer") under license from Software Systems Co. ("QSSC"). You may only use the Software in the Product and in compliance with the license terms below.
Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, QSSC hereby grants you a limited, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to use the Software in the Product for the purpose intended by the Manufacturer. If permitted by the Manufacturer, or by applicable law,
you may make one backup copy of the Software as part of the Product software. QSSC and its licensors reserve all license+C31 rights not expressly granted herein, and retain all right, title and interest in and to all copies of the Software, including all intellectual property rights therein. Unless required by applicable law you may not reproduce, distribute or transfer, or de-compile, disassemble or otherwise attempt to unbundle, reverse engineer, modify or create derivative works of, the Software. You agree: (1) not to remove, cover or alter any proprietary notices, labels or marks in or on the Software, and to ensure that all copies bear any notice contained on the original; and (2) not to export the Product or the Software in contravention of applicable export control laws.
EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, QSSC AND ITS LICENSORS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANY WARRANTIES OR OTHER PROVISIONS OFFERED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR ITS DISTRIBUTOR(S) THAT DIFFER FROM THIS LICENSE ARE OFFERED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR ITS DISTRIBUTOR(S) ALONE AND NOT BY QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS. YOU ASSUME ANY RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THIS LICENSE.
EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW (SUCH AS IN THE CASE OF DELIBERATE OR GROSSLY NEGLIGENT ACTS), IN NO EVENT SHALL QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO YOU
Infotainment System 235
UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER ARISING AS A RESULT OF THIS LICENSE OR OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, PRODUCT FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES), EVEN IF QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
WMA
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.
236 Infotainment System
For more information on the Software, including any open source software license terms (and available source code) as well as copyright attributions applicable to the Runtime Configuration indicated above, please contact the Manufacturer or contact QSSC at 175 Terence Matthews Crescent, Kanata, Ontario, Canada K2M 1W8 (licensing@qnx.com).
END USER NOTICE
The marks of companies displayed by this product to indicate business locations are the marks of their respective owners. The use of such marks in this product does not imply any sponsorship, approval, or endorsement by such companies of this product.
Climate Controls 237
Climate Controls
Climate Control Systems
Climate Control Systems Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Dual Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Air Vents Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Maintenance Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only)
With this system, the heating and ventilation can be controlled.
1. Fan Control
2. Air Recirculation
3. Air Delivery Mode Controls
4. Defrost
5. TEMP (Temperature Control)
TEMP : Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
9 : Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the fan off.
Air Delivery Mode Controls :
Press Y, \, [ , or - to change
the direction of the airflow. An indicator light comes on in the selected mode button.
238 Climate Controls
Y : Air is directed to the instrument
panel outlets.
\ : Air is divided between the
instrument panel and floor outlets.
[ : Air is directed to the floor
outlets, with some air directed to the windshield, side window, and second row floor outlets.
- : This mode clears the windows
of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.
0 : Press to clear the windshield
of fog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and the side window vents. The system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
See Air Vents 0 243.
@ : Press to turn on recirculation.
An indicator light comes on. Air is recirculated to quickly cool the inside of the vehicle. It can also be used to help reduce outside air and odors that enter the vehicle.
Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning)
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
1. Fan Control
2. A/C (Air Conditioning)
3. Air Delivery Mode Controls
4. Defrost
5. TEMP (Temperature Control)
6. K (Rear Window Defogger, If
Equipped)
f (Outside Heated Mirror, If
Equipped)
8 (Outside Air, If Equipped)
7. @ Air Recirculation
TEMP : Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
9 : Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the fan off.
Air Delivery Mode Controls :
Press Y, \, [ , or - to change
the direction of the airflow. An indicator light comes on in the selected mode button.
Y : Air is directed to the instrument
panel outlets.
\ : Air is divided between the
instrument panel and floor outlets.
[ : Air is directed to the floor
outlets, with some air directed to the windshield and side window outlets.
- : This mode clears the windows
of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.
0 : Press to clear the windshield
of fog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and the side window vents. The system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle and the air conditioning compressor will run, unless the outside temperature is close to freezing.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
See Air Vents 0 243.
@ : Press to turn on recirculation.
An indicator light comes on. Air is recirculated to quickly cool the inside of the vehicle. It can also be used to help reduce outside air and odors that enter the vehicle.
8 : If equipped, press to turn the
outside air mode on. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that outside is on. When selected, air from outside the vehicle circulates throughout the vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be used with the outside air mode.
f : If equipped, press to turn the
heated mirrors on or off. See Heated Mirrors 0 49.
A/C : Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is enabled. If the fan is turned off, the air conditioner will not run. The A/C light will stay on even if the outside temperatures are below freezing.
Climate Controls 239
Rear Window Defogger
K : If equipped, press to turn the
rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition is in ON/ RUN. The defogger turns off if the ignition is turned to ACC/ ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
If equipped with heated outside mirrors, they turn on when the rear window defogger button is on. They help to clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirrors.
Caution
Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window can damage the rear window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
240 Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled. For an eAssist vehicle, see the Silverado/Sierra eAssist supplement.
1. Driver Temperature Control 2. A/C (Air Conditioning) 3. Air Delivery Mode Controls 4. Fan Control 5. Defrost 6. Passenger Temperature
Control
7. SYNC (Synchronized Temperature)
8. Rear Window Defogger 9. Power Button 10. Air Recirculation 11. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls the fan speed, air delivery, air conditioning, and recirculation in order to heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature.
When the indicator light is on, the system is in full automatic operation. If the air delivery mode or fan setting is manually adjusted, the auto indicator turns off and displays will show the selected settings.
To place the system in automatic mode:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the driver and passenger temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with 22 °C (72 °F) and allow the system time to stabilize. Then adjust the temperature as needed for best comfort.
To improve fuel efficiency and to cool the vehicle faster, recirculation may be automatically selected in warm weather.
The recirculation light will not come on when automatically controlled.
Press @ to manually select
recirculation; press it again to select outside air.
Do not cover the solar sensor on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load. See "Sensors" later in this section.
Manual Operation
O : Press to turn the climate control
system on or off. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is directed to the floor. This direction can be changed by pressing the air delivery mode.
9 : Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Press the knob to turn the fan off.
Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control : The temperature can be adjusted separately for the driver and passenger.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the driver or passenger temperature setting.
SYNC : Press to link the passenger temperature setting to the driver setting. The SYNC indicator light will turn on. When the passenger setting is adjusted, the SYNC indicator light is off.
The driver side or passenger side temperature display shows the temperature setting increasing or decreasing.
Air Delivery Mode Control :
Press Y, \, [ , or - to change
the direction of the airflow. An indicator light comes on in the selected mode button.
Climate Controls 241
Changing the mode cancels the automatic operation and the system goes into manual mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
Y : Air is directed to the instrument
panel outlets.
\ : Air is divided between the
instrument panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed toward the windshield and side window outlets.
[ : Air is directed to the floor
outlets, with some to the windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor outlets.
- : This mode clears the windows
of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents. The system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle and the air conditioning compressor will run, unless the outside temperature is close to freezing.
0 : Press to clear the windshield
of fog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and the side window vents. The air
242 Climate Controls
conditioning compressor also comes on, unless the outside temperature is below freezing.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
See Air Vents 0 243.
A/C : Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is enabled. If the fan is turned off, the air conditioner will not run. The A/C light will stay on even if the outside temperatures are below freezing.
@ : Press to turn on recirculation.
An indicator light comes on. Air is recirculated to quickly cool the inside of the vehicle. It can also be used to help reduce outside air and odors that enter the vehicle. The air conditioning compressor also comes on when this mode is activated.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.
K : Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition is in ON/ RUN. The defogger turns off if the ignition is turned to ACC/ ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
Caution
Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window can damage the rear window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Heated Mirror : If equipped with heated outside rearview mirrors,
press K to heat the mirrors. See
Heated Mirrors 0 49.
Sensors
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in the middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar heat. Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly. There is also an exterior temperature sensor behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle including a snow plow, could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.
Some vehicles may have the exterior temperature sensor in the passenger side mirror instead of the front grille area.
The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain comfort settings by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures.
Air Vents
Use the air vents in the center and on the side of the instrument panel to direct airflow. Use the thumbwheels near the air vents to open or close off the airflow.
Air vents blow warm air on the side windows in cold weather. If Floor, Defog, or Defrost modes are selected, a small amount of air will come from the vents close to the window. If the airflow is shut off using the thumbwheels, warm air will be directed to the other instrument panel vents. This is normal operation.
Use the thumbwheels to turn vent airflow on or off based on the mode selected.
Climate Controls 243
Operation Tips
. Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle.
. Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively.
. Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
244 Climate Controls
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The filter reduces the dust, pollen, and other airborne irritants from outside air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 452. To find out what type of filter to use, see Maintenance Replacement Parts 0 464.
1. Open the lower glove box door completely.
2. Remove the four screws from around the lower glove box. The door does not need to be removed to access the screws.
3. Close the lower glove box door and pull it from its frame to remove the entire unit.
4. Release the two tabs holding the service door. Open the service door and remove the old filter.
5. Install the new air filter.
6. Close the service door and secure the tabs.
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the glove box.
See your dealer if additional assistance is needed.
Service
All vehicles have a label underhood that identifies the refrigerant used in the vehicle. The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. The air conditioning evaporator should never be repaired or replaced by one from a salvage vehicle. It should only be replaced by a new evaporator to ensure proper and safe operation.
During service, all refrigerants should be reclaimed with proper equipment. Venting refrigerants directly to the atmosphere is harmful to the environment and may also create unsafe conditions based on inhalation, combustion, frostbite, or other health-based concerns.
Climate Controls 245
246 Driving and Operating
Driving and Operating
Driving Information Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 255 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 256 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 258 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Truck-Camper Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Starting and Operating New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 267 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 272 Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Parking (Manual
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Active Fuel Management® . . . . 275
Engine Exhaust Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 277 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Manual Transmission Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 283
Drive Systems Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Brakes Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . 294
Ride Control Systems Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . 297 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Cruise Control Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Driver Assistance Systems Driver Assistance Systems . . . 301 Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . . 302 Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Forward Automatic Braking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (2500/3500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) (1500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Fuel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 California Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 312
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Trailer Towing General Towing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 344
Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Driving and Operating 247
Driving Information
Distracted Driving
Distraction comes in many forms and can take your focus from the task of driving. Exercise good judgment and do not let other activities divert your attention away from the road. Many local governments have enacted laws regarding driver distraction. Become familiar with the local laws in your area.
To avoid distracted driving, keep your eyes on the road, keep your hands on the steering wheel, and focus your attention on driving.
. Do not use a phone in demanding driving situations. Use a hands-free method to place or receive necessary phone calls.
. Watch the road. Do not read, take notes, or look up information on phones or other electronic devices.
. Designate a front seat passenger to handle potential distractions.
. Become familiar with vehicle features before driving, such as programming favorite radio stations and adjusting climate control and seat settings. Program all trip information into any navigation device prior to driving.
. Wait until the vehicle is parked to retrieve items that have fallen to the floor.
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend to children.
. Keep pets in an appropriate carrier or restraint.
. Avoid stressful conversations while driving, whether with a passenger or on a cell phone.
{ Warning
Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving.
248 Driving and Operating
Refer to the infotainment section for more information on using that system and the navigation system, if equipped, including pairing and using a cell phone.
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means "always expect the unexpected." The first step in driving defensively is to wear the safety belt. See Safety Belts 0 66.
. Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be ready.
. Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you.
. Focus on the task of driving.
Drunk Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy.
{ Warning
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking, steering, and accelerating are important factors in helping to control a vehicle while driving.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average driver reaction time is about three-quarters of a second. In that time, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), which could be a lot of distance in an emergency.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind include:
. Keep enough distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.
. Avoid needless heavy braking.
. Keep pace with traffic.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. Doing so could make the pedal harder to push down. If the engine stops, there will be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Steering
Electric Power Steering (1500 Series)
If the vehicle has electric power steering, it does not have power steering fluid. Regular maintenance is not required.
If power steering assist is lost due to a system malfunction, the vehicle can be steered, but may require increased effort. See your dealer if there is a problem.
If the steering wheel is turned until it reaches the end of its travel, and is held in that position for an extended period of time, power steering assist may be reduced.
If the steering assist is used for an extended period of time, power assist may be reduced.
Normal use of the power steering assist should return when the system cools down.
See specific vehicle steering messages under Steering System Messages 0 156.
Driving and Operating 249
Hydraulic Power Steering (2500/3500 Series)
(2500/3500 Series All Regular Cab, Double Cab/Crew Cab without Digital Steer Assist)
The power steering system may require maintenance. See Power Steering Fluid (1500 Series) 0 375 or Power Steering Fluid (2500/3500 Series) 0 375.
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the system malfunctions, the vehicle can be steered but may require increased effort. See your dealer.
(2500/3500 Series Double Cab/ Crew Cab with Digital Steer Assist)
The vehicle has a Digital Steer Assist power steering system that varies the amount of effort required to steer the vehicle. Less steering effort is required at slower speeds. At faster speeds, the steering effort increases. The system helps the steering wheel return to center at low speeds. Pressing the Tow/Haul
button adjusts steering effort for driving conditions described in Tow/ Haul Mode 0 282.
The power steering system may require maintenance. See Power Steering Fluid (1500 Series) 0 375 or Power Steering Fluid (2500/3500 Series) 0 375.
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the system malfunctions, the vehicle can be steered but may require increased effort. See your dealer.
Caution
If the steering wheel is turned until it reaches the end of its travel, and is held in that position for more than 15 seconds, damage may occur to the power steering system and there may be loss of power steering assist.
250 Driving and Operating
Curve Tips
. Take curves at a reasonable speed.
. Reduce speed before entering a curve.
. Maintain a reasonable steady speed through the curve.
. Wait until the vehicle is out of the curve before accelerating gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
. There are some situations when steering around a problem may be more effective than braking.
. Holding both sides of the steering wheel allows you to turn 180 degrees without removing a hand.
. Antilock Brake System (ABS) allows steering while braking.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Follow these tips:
1. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle so that it straddles the edge of the pavement.
2. Turn the steering wheel about one-eighth of a turn, until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
3. Turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Loss of Control
Skidding
There are three types of skids that correspond to the vehicle's three control systems:
. Braking Skid -- wheels are not rolling.
. Steering or Cornering Skid -- too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
. Acceleration Skid -- too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible.
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow these suggestions:
. Ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and steer the way you want the vehicle to go.
The vehicle may straighten out. Be ready for a second skid if it occurs.
. Slow down and adjust your driving according to weather conditions. Stopping distance can be longer and vehicle control can be affected when traction is reduced by water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material on the road. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface -- and slow down when you have any doubt.
. Try to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving
Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be used for off-road driving. Vehicles without four-wheel drive and
Driving and Operating 251
vehicles not equipped with All Terrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR) tires must not be driven off-road except on a level, solid surface. For contact information about the original equipment tires, see the warranty manual.
One of the best ways for successful off-road driving is to control the speed.
{ Warning
When driving off-road, bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control and crash. You and your passengers should always wear safety belts.
Before Driving Off-Road
. Have all necessary maintenance and service work completed.
. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels, and check inflation pressure in all tires, including the spare, if equipped.
. Read all the information about four-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual.
. Remove any underbody air deflector, if equipped. Re-attach the air deflector after off-road driving.
. See Hill Descent Control (HDC) 0 297
. Know the local laws that apply to off-road driving.
To gain more ground clearance if needed, it may be necessary to remove the front fascia lower air dam. However, driving without the air dam reduces fuel economy.
Caution
Operating the vehicle for extended periods without the front fascia lower air dam installed can cause improper airflow to the engine. Reattach the front fascia air dam after off-road driving.
252 Driving and Operating
Loading the Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
{ Warning
. Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain. You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward of the rear axle.
. Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle's center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
For more information about loading the vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 259 and Tires 0 397.
Environmental Concerns
. Always use established trails, roads, and areas that have been set aside for public off-road recreational driving and obey all posted regulations.
. Do not damage shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife.
. Do not park over things that burn. See Parking over Things That Burn 0 275.
Driving on Hills
Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot do.
{ Warning
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. Driving up hills can cause the vehicle to stall. Driving down hills can cause loss
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
of control. Driving across hills can cause a rollover. You could be injured or killed. Do not drive on steep hills.
Before driving on a hill, assess the steepness, traction, and obstructions. If the terrain ahead cannot be seen, get out of the vehicle and walk the hill before driving further.
When driving on hills:
. Use a low gear and keep a firm grip on the steering wheel.
. Maintain a slow speed.
. When possible, drive straight up or down the hill.
. Slow down when approaching the top of the hill.
. Use headlamps even during the day to make the vehicle more visible.
{ Warning
Driving to the top of a hill at high speed can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You could be seriously injured or killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
. Never go downhill forward or backward with either the transmission or transfer case in N (Neutral). The brakes could overheat and you could lose control.
{ Warning
If the vehicle has the twospeed automatic transfer case, shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). This is because the N (Neutral) position on the
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 253
Warning (Continued)
transfer case overrides the transmission. You or someone else could be injured. If leaving the vehicle, set the parking brake and shift the transmission to P (Park). Shift the transfer case to any position but N (Neutral).
. When driving down a hill, keep the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear because the engine will work with the brakes to slow the vehicle and help keep the vehicle under control.
{ Warning
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause loss of control and you or others could be injured or killed. Apply the brakes lightly when
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control.
If the vehicle stalls on a hill:
1. Apply the brakes to stop the vehicle, and then apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into P (Park) and then restart the engine.
. If driving uphill when the vehicle stalls, shift to R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and back straight down.
. Never try to turn the vehicle around. If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle, it is steep enough to cause it to roll over.
. If you cannot make it up the hill, back straight down the hill.
254 Driving and Operating
. Never back down a hill in N (Neutral) using only the brake. The vehicle can roll backward quickly and you could lose control.
. If driving downhill when the vehicle stalls, shift to a lower gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight down the hill.
3. If the vehicle cannot be restarted after stalling, set the parking brake, shift into P (Park), and turn the vehicle off.
3.1. Leave the vehicle and seek help.
3.2. Stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill.
. Avoid turns that take the vehicle across the incline of the hill. A hill that can be driven straight up or down might be too steep to drive across. Driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels, which could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
. Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause the tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that will trip it -- a rock, a rut, etc. -- and roll over.
. Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline more severe. If a rock is driven across with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression, the vehicle can tilt even more.
. If an incline must be driven across, and the vehicle starts to slide, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping.
{ Warning
Getting out of the vehicle on the downhill side when stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed. Always get out on the uphill side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
Use a low gear when driving in mud -- the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. Keep the vehicle moving to avoid getting stuck.
Traction changes when driving on sand. On loose sand, such as on beaches or sand dunes, the tires tend to sink into the sand. This affects steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Traction is reduced on hard packed snow and ice and it is easy to lose control. Reduce vehicle speed when driving on hard packed snow and ice.
{ Warning
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be dangerous. Ice conditions vary greatly and the vehicle could fall through the ice; you and your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
{ Warning
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 255
Warning (Continued)
Traction could be lost, and the vehicle could roll over. Do not drive through rushing water.
Caution
Do not drive through standing water if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe. Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts.
If the standing water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At faster speeds, water splashes and the vehicle can stall. When going through water, the brakes get wet and it may take longer to stop. See "Driving on Wet Roads" later in this section.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody or chassis, or under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleaned and checked. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.
More frequent maintenance service is required. See the Maintenance Schedule 0 452.
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water.
256 Driving and Operating
{ Warning
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under the vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When the vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include:
. Allow extra following distance.
. Pass with caution.
. Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
. Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
. Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires 0 397.
. Turn off cruise control.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
. Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission.
. Shift to a lower gear when going down steep or long hills.
{ Warning
Using the brakes to slow the vehicle on a long downhill slope can cause brake overheating, can reduce brake performance, and could result in a loss of braking. Shift the transmission to a lower gear to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
{ Warning
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. This can cause overheating of the brakes and loss of steering. Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear.
. Drive at speeds that keep the vehicle in its own lane. Do not swing wide or cross the center line.
. Be alert on top of hills; something could be in your lane (e.g., stalled car, accident).
. Pay attention to special road signs (e.g., falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Driving and Operating 257
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Snow or ice between the tires and the road creates less traction or grip, so drive carefully. Wet ice can occur at about 0 °C (32 °F) when freezing rain begins to fall. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated.
For Slippery Road Driving:
. Accelerate gently. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick.
. Turn on Traction Control. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves vehicle stability during hard stops, but the brakes should be applied sooner than when on dry pavement. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) 0 292.
. Allow greater following distance and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice.
. Turn off cruise control.
Blizzard Conditions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and signal for help. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible, use Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program 0 476. To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
. Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
258 Driving and Operating
{ Warning
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in snow:
. Clear snow from the base of the vehicle, especially any blocking the exhaust pipe.
. Open a window about 5 cm (2 in) on the vehicle side that is away from the wind, to bring in fresh air.
. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
. Adjust the climate control system to circulate the air inside the vehicle and set
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
the fan speed to the highest setting. See "Climate Control Systems."
For more information about CO, see Engine Exhaust 0 276.
To save fuel, run the engine for short periods to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and partially close the window. Moving about to keep warm also helps.
If it takes time for help to arrive, when running the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible, to save fuel.
If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See "Rocking the Vehicle to Get It Out" later in this section.
The Traction Control System (TCS) can often help to free a stuck vehicle. See Traction Control/ Electronic Stability Control 0 295. If TCS cannot free the vehicle, see "Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out" following.
{ Warning
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 56 km/h (35 mph).
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle, see Tire Chains 0 419.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel Drive High. Turn the TCS off. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. See Towing the Vehicle 0 436. Recovery hooks can be used, if the vehicle has them.
Recovery Hooks
{ Warning
Never pull on recovery hooks from the side. The hooks could break and you and others could be injured. When using recovery hooks, always pull the vehicle from the front.
Driving and Operating 259
Caution
Do not drive through standing water if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe. Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts.
There are recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle. Use them if the vehicle is stuck off-road and needs to be pulled some place to continue driving.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how much weight the vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on the vehicle may show how much weight it was designed to carry: the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
260 Driving and Operating
{ Warning
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also reduce stopping distance, damage the tires, and shorten the life of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Label Example A vehicle-specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). The Tire and Loading Information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (1), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (2) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (3) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (4). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires 0 397 and Tire Pressure 0 405.
There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It may show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See "Certification/Tire Label" later in this section.
"Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Driving and Operating 261
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle."
See Trailer Towing 0 318 for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
Example 1
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = (453 kg) (1,000 lb)
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lb) 2 = 136 kg (300 lb)
3. Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lb)
262 Driving and Operating
of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 2
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lb)
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lb) 5 = 340 kg (750 lb)
3. Available Cargo Weight = 113 kg (250 lb)
Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lb)
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 91 kg (200 lb) 5 = 453 kg (1,000 lb)
3. Available Cargo Weight = 0 kg (0 lb)
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for specific information about the vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight
A vehicle-specific Certification/ Tire label is label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). The label may show the size of the vehicle's original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of the vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also may show the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To determine the actual loads on the front and rear axles, weigh the vehicle at a weigh station. Your dealer can help with this. Be sure to spread the load equally on both sides of the centerline.
The Certification/Tire label also contains important information about the Front Axle Reserve Capacity. See Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment 0 345.
{ Warning
In the case of a sudden stop or collision, things carried in the bed of your truck could
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
shift forward and come into the passenger area, injuring you and others. If you put things in the bed of your truck, you should make sure they are properly secured.
Caution
Overloading the vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change the weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help load the vehicle the right way.
Driving and Operating 263
{ Warning
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
. Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.
. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle.
. When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
. Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to.
264 Driving and Operating
There is also important loading information for off-road driving in this manual. See "Loading the Vehicle for Off-Road Driving" under Off-Road Driving 0 251.
Two-Tiered Loading
Depending on the model of the pickup, an upper load platform can be created by positioning three or four 5 cm (2 in) by 15 cm (6 in) wooden planks across the width of the pickup box. The planks must be inserted in the pickup box depressions.
When using this upper load platform, be sure the load is securely tied down to prevent it from shifting. The load's center of gravity should be positioned in a zone over the rear axle. The zone is located in the area between the front of each wheel well and the rear of each wheel
well. The center of gravity height must not extend above the top of the pickup box flareboard.
Any load that extends beyond the vehicle's taillamp area must be properly marked according to local laws and regulations.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
Add-On Equipment
When carrying removable items, a limit on how many people carried inside the vehicle may be necessary. Be sure to weigh the vehicle before buying and installing the new equipment.
Caution
Overloading the vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
Maximum * Equipment Weight
Ladder Rack 340 kg (750 lb) and Cargo
Cross Toolbox 181 kg (400 lb) and Cargo
Side Boxes and Cargo
113 kg per side (250 lb per side)
* The combined weight for all rail-mounted equipment should not exceed 454 kg (1,000 lb).
Loading Points
1. Primary Load Points 2. Secondary Load Areas 3. GM Approved Accessory
Mounting Points Structural members (1) and (2) are included in the pickup box design. Additional accessories should use these load points. Depending on the accessory design, use a spacer under the accessory at the load points to remove gap. The holes for GM approved accessories (3) are not intended for aftermarket
Driving and Operating 265
equipment. See www.gmupfitter.com for additional pickup box load bearing structural information.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
A vehicle-specific Truck-Camper Loading Information label is attached to the inside of the vehicle's glove box. This label indicates if a slide-in camper can be carried, how much of a load the vehicle can carry, and how to correctly spread out the load. It will help to match the right slide-in camper to the vehicle.
Your dealer can help make a good vehicle-camper match and help determine the Cargo Weight Rating (CWR).
When installing and loading a slide-in camper, check the manufacturer's instructions.
When carrying a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the vehicle is the weight of the camper plus:
. Everything added to the camper after it left the factory.
. Everything in the camper.
. All the people inside.
The CWR is the maximum weight of the load the vehicle can carry. It does not include the weight of the people inside. But, use about 68 kg (150 lb) for each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than the vehicle's CWR.
Refer to the Truck-Camper Loading Information label in the glove box for dimensions A and B as shown in the following illustration.
266 Driving and Operating
Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement purposes. The recommended location for the cargo center of gravity is at point C for the CWR. It is the point where the mass of a body is concentrated and, if suspended at that point, would balance the front and rear.
Here is an example of proper truck and camper match:
1. Camper Center of Gravity
2. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer's camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer's camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed the truck's cargo weight
rating, and the camper's center of gravity (1) should fall within the truck's recommended center of gravity zone (2) when installed.
Any accessories or other equipment that are added to the vehicle must be weighed. Then, subtract this extra weight from the CWR. This extra weight may shorten the center of gravity zone of the vehicle.
If the slide-in camper and its load weighs less than the CWR, the center of gravity zone for the vehicle may be larger.
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of the vehicle. When the truck-camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total axle loads
should not exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the Certification/Tire label attached to the B-pillar. See "Certification/Tire Label" under Vehicle Load Limits 0 259. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.
See your dealer for more information on curb weights, cargo weights, Cargo Weight Rating, and the correct center of gravity zone.
Driving and Operating 267
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In
Caution
The vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:
. Keep the vehicle speed at 88 km/h (55 mph) or less for the first 805 km (500 mi).
. Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 805 km (500 mi). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
. Avoid making hard stops for the first 322 km (200 mi) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings.
. Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Trailer Towing 0 318 for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be gradually increased.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If equipped, the position of the throttle and brake pedals can be changed.
The pedals can only be adjusted when the vehicle is in P (Park).
268 Driving and Operating Ignition Positions
The switch used to adjust the pedals is on the center stack, below the climate controls.
Lift the switch up to move the pedals closer to your body. Press the switch down to move the pedals away.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to confirm the adjustment is right for you.
The vehicle may have a memory function, which lets pedal settings be saved and recalled. See Memory Seats 0 61.
The ignition switch has four different positions.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must be applied.
0 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/ OFF) : When the vehicle is stopped, turn the ignition switch to LOCK/ OFF to turn the engine off. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 271.
This position locks the ignition and steering wheel. It also locks the transmission on automatic transmission vehicles. The key can be removed in LOCK/OFF.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center. If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work, then the vehicle needs service.
Do not turn the engine off when the vehicle is moving. This will cause a loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags.
If the vehicle must be shut off in an emergency:
1. Brake using a firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). This can be done while the vehicle is moving. After shifting to N (Neutral), continue to
firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location.
3. Come to a complete stop. Shift to P (Park) with an automatic transmission, or Neutral with a manual transmission. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. Set the parking brake. See Parking Brake 0 293.
{ Warning
Turning off the vehicle while moving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the vehicle off in an emergency.
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, and must be shut off while driving, turn the ignition to ACC/ ACCESSORY.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
Driving and Operating 269
Caution
Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer.
1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This position lets things like the radio and the windshield wipers operate while the engine is off. It also unlocks the steering wheel. Use this position if the vehicle must be pushed or towed.
2 (ON/RUN) : This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument cluster warning and indicator lights. This position can also be used for service and diagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp as may be required for emission inspection purposes. The switch stays in this position
when the engine is running. The transmission is also unlocked in this position on automatic transmission vehicles.
If the key is left in the ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be drained. The vehicle may not start if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
3 (START) : This is the position that starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/ OFF, and the key is in the ignition.
Starting the Engine
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
For an eAssist vehicle, see the Silverado/Sierra eAssist supplement.
270 Driving and Operating
Caution
If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 345.
Caution
If the steering wheel is turned until it reaches the end of its travel, and is held in that position while starting the vehicle, damage may occur to the power steering system and there may be loss of power steering assist.
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Caution
Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in Neutral and the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to the floor and start the engine.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts.
When the low fuel warning light is on and the FUEL LEVEL LOW message is displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), hold the ignition switch in the START position to continue engine cranking.
Caution
Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by returning the ignition to the START position immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after five to 10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below 18 °C or 0 °F), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there while holding the key in START for up to 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Fast Idle System
If equipped, this feature is available only with cruise control. The manual fast idle switch is operated using the cruise control buttons on the left side of the steering wheel.
Driving and Operating 271
This system can be used to increase engine idle speed whenever the following conditions are met:
. The parking brake is set.
. The brake pedal is not pressed.
. The vehicle must not be moving and the accelerator must not be pressed.
To control the fast idle:
. To enable the Fast Idle System, press and release the cruise control on/off button and ensure that the switch indicator light is lit.
. Press and release the cruise control SET- button. Engine speed will be held at approximately 1200 rpm.
One of the following actions will turn off the fast idle:
. Pressing the brake.
. Selecting the cruise control cancel button.
. Releasing the parking brake.
. Moving the transmission shift lever out of P (Park) or N (Neutral).
. Selecting the cruise control on/ off button when it was previously on.
. Pressing the cruise control SETbutton a second time.
. Pressing the accelerator more than one-quarter of the way down.
. Turning the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
. Audio System
. Power Windows
. OnStar System (if equipped)
. Sunroof (if equipped)
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY. Once the key is
272 Driving and Operating
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof continue to work up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened. The radio continues to work for up to 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened.
Accessory Power Outlets (APOs)
The vehicle may have Accessory Power Outlets (APOs) in several locations. See Power Outlets 0 124.
The APOs in the console or center seat position are powered by Retained Accessory Power (RAP). They will continue to work for up to 10 minutes after the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, or until the driver door is opened.
The APOs on the center stack come from the factory powered directly from the vehicle battery, and supply accessory power at all times, regardless of ignition key position.
If electronic items are left plugged into these APOs for long periods of time with the vehicle off, the vehicle battery could be drained. The vehicle may not start if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold weather conditions at or below 18 °C (0 °F). Vehicles with an engine heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist, which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 18 °C (0 °F).
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is secured to the driver side fender with a clip, next to the engine compartment fuse block. Carefully remove the wire tie that bundles the electrical plug. Do not cut the electrical cord.
Check the heater cord for damage. If it is damaged, do not use it. See your dealer for a replacement. Inspect the cord for damage yearly.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{ Warning
Improper use of the heater cord or an extension cord can damage the cord and may result in overheating and fire.
. Plug the cord into a three-prong electrical utility receptacle that is protected by a ground fault detection function. An ungrounded outlet could cause an electric shock.
. Use a weatherproof, heavy-duty, 15 amp-rated extension cord if needed. Failure to use the recommended extension cord in good operating condition, or using a damaged heater or extension cord, could make it overheat and cause a fire, property damage, electric shock, and injury.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 273
Warning (Continued)
. Do not operate the vehicle with the heater cord permanently attached to the vehicle. Possible heater cord and thermostat damage could occur.
. While in use, do not let the heater cord touch vehicle parts or sharp edges. Never close the hood on the heater cord.
. Before starting the vehicle, unplug the cord, reattach the cover to the plug, and securely fasten the cord. Keep the cord away from any moving parts.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be damaged.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this.
Shifting Into Park
{ Warning
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. With four-wheel drive, if the transfer case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the shift lever is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear. If towing a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 315.
274 Driving and Operating
1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake 0 293.
2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case (if equipped) is in a drive gear -- not in N (Neutral).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine Running
{ Warning
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive and the transfer case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the shift lever is in P (Park). So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in N (Neutral).
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from P (Park) without first pulling it toward
you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock. To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park 0 273.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission. You will then be able to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
Shifting out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
. Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P (Park).
. Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the regular brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting - North America 0 432.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
Driving and Operating 275
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift lever all the way into P (Park).
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have the vehicle serviced soon.
This vehicle may have the Safety Belt Assurance System, which may prevent the vehicle from shifting out of P (Park). See Safety Belt Messages 0 155.
Parking (Manual Transmission)
If the vehicle has a manual transmission, before you get out of the vehicle, move the shift lever into R (Reverse), and firmly apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has been placed into R (Reverse) with the clutch pedal pressed in,
turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF, remove the key and release the clutch.
If you are parking on a hill, or if the vehicle is pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 315.
Parking over Things That Burn
{ Warning
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn.
Active Fuel Management®
Vehicles with a V8 or V6 gasoline engine may have Active Fuel Management. This system allows the engine to operate on either all of its cylinders, or in V4 mode, depending on the driving conditions.
276 Driving and Operating
When less power is required, such as cruising at a constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the V4 mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve better fuel economy. When greater power demands are required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing, or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain full-cylinder operation.
If the vehicle has an Active Fuel Management indicator, see Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147 for more information on using this display.
Engine Exhaust
{ Warning
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
. The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
. The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different.
. The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage.
. The vehicle exhaust system has been modified, damaged, or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or aftermarket modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
. Drive it only with the windows completely down.
. Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running.
If the vehicle is left with the engine running, follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park 0 273 and Engine Exhaust 0 276. If the vehicle has a manual transmission, see Parking (Manual Transmission) 0 275.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 315.
Driving and Operating 277
Automatic Transmission
If equipped, there is an electronic shift lever position indicator within the instrument cluster. This display comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON/RUN position. There are several different positions for the shift lever.
Heavy-Duty 6-Speed Automatic Transmission Shown, Others Similar
See "Range Selection Mode" under Manual Mode 0 280. P : This position locks the rear wheels. It is the best position to use when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily. When parked on a hill, especially when the vehicle has a heavy load, you might notice an increase in the
effort to shift out of P (Park). See "Torque Lock" under Shifting Into Park 0 273.
{ Warning
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park 0 273 and Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 315.
278 Driving and Operating
{ Warning
If you have four-wheel drive, the vehicle will be free to roll -- even if the shift lever is in P (Park) -- if the transfer case is in N (Neutral). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear, Two-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive Low -- not in N (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park 0 273.
R : Use this gear to back up.
Caution
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 258.
N : In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart when you are already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
{ Warning
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed.
Caution
Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D : This position is for normal driving. It provides the best fuel economy. If you need more power for passing, and you are:
. Going less than about 55 km/h (35 mph), push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or more, push the accelerator all the way down.
By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the next gear and has more power.
Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Mode when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills,
or driving off-road. Shift the transmission to a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding. See "Skidding" under Loss of Control 0 250.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine, before making an upshift, if the engine is able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed, throttle position, and vehicle load. If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the transmission does not upshift and instead holds the current gear. In some cases, this could appear to be a delayed shift, however the transmission is operating normally.
Driving and Operating 279
The transmission uses adaptive shift controls. The adaptive shift control process continually compares key shift parameters to pre-programmed ideal shifts stored in the transmission's computer. The transmission constantly makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance according to how the vehicle is being used, such as with a heavy load or when the temperature changes. During this adaptive shift control process, shifting might feel different as the transmission determines the best settings.
When temperatures are very cold, the transmission's gear shifting could be delayed providing more stable shifts until the engine warms up. Shifts could be more noticeable with a cold transmission. This difference in shifting is normal.
M : This position allows selection of a range of gears appropriate for current driving conditions. If equipped, see "Range Selection Mode" under Manual Mode 0 280.
Caution
Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Normal Mode Grade Braking
If equipped with a gasoline engine and an automatic transmission, Normal Mode Grade Braking is enabled when the vehicle is started, but is not enabled in Range Selection Mode. It assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades by using the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle. The first time the system engages for each ignition key cycle, a DIC message will be displayed. See Transmission Messages 0 157.
280 Driving and Operating
To disable or enable Normal Mode Grade Braking within the current ignition key cycle, press and hold the Tow/Haul button for five seconds. When the button is released, the requested mode change is made. A DIC message displays. See Transmission Messages 0 157.
For other forms of grade braking, see Tow/Haul Mode 0 282 and Cruise Control 0 298.
Kickdown Mode
If equipped, the accelerator pedal provides an additional downshift after pressing through the kickdown feature.
It requires extra pedal pressure near the end of its travel to engage.
Manual Mode
Range Selection Mode
If equipped, Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle's transmission and vehicle speed while driving downhill or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range of gears. To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever to L (Manual Mode).
2. Press the plus/minus buttons on the shift lever to select the desired range of gears for current driving conditions.
With an 8-speed automatic transmission, hold the plus/minus buttons on the shift lever to select the highest or lowest range available for the current vehicle speed.
When the shift lever is moved from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), a number displays next to the L, indicating the current transmission range.
This number is the highest gear that the transmission will command while operating in L (Manual Mode). All gears below that number are available. As driving conditions change, the transmission can automatically shift to lower gears. For example, when L5 is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are automatically shifted by the transmission, but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until the plus/minus button on the shift lever is used to change to the range.
In vehicles with gasoline engines, when the shift lever is moved from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), a downshift may occur. The gear that the transmission is operating in when the shift lever is moved from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode) determines if a downshift occurs. See the following chart.
Driving and Operating 281
6-Speed Automatic Transmission
Gear before shifting from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)
6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
Range after shifting from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)
L4 L4 L3 L2 L2 L1
8-Speed Automatic Transmission
Gear before shifting from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)
8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
Range after
shifting from
D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)
L6
L6
L5
L4
L3
L3
L2
L1
Tow/Haul not
engaged
Range after
shifting from
D (Drive) to
L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L3 L2 L1
L (Manual Mode)
Tow/Haul engaged
Grade Braking is not available when
Range Selection Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282.
While using Range Selection Mode, cruise control and the Tow/Haul Mode can be used.
282 Driving and Operating
If the vehicle has an exhaust brake, it can also be used, but will not
automatically downshift the transmission. See "Exhaust Brake" in the Duramax diesel supplement.
Tow/Haul Mode
Caution
Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Low Traction Mode
If equipped, Low Traction Mode assists in vehicle acceleration when road conditions are slippery, such as with ice or snow. While the vehicle is at a stop, select L2 using Range Selection Mode. This will limit torque to the wheels and help to prevent the tires from spinning.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission have a Tow/Haul Mode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling. This provides increased performance, vehicle control, and enhanced transmission and engine cooling when driving down steep hills or mountain grades, when towing, or when hauling heavy loads.
The selector button is on the end of the shift lever. Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and off by pressing the
button. When the Tow/Haul Mode is enabled, a light on the instrument cluster will come on.
For an eAssist vehicle, the Stop/ Start function will become unavailable when Tow/Haul Mode is active.
For an eAssist vehicle, the Regenerative Braking functionality is disabled when using the Tow/Haul Mode. See the eAssist supplement.
See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 141 and Hill and Mountain Roads 0 256. Also see "Tow/Haul Mode" under Towing Equipment 0 335.
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking is only enabled while the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and the vehicle is not in the Range Selection Mode. See "Tow/Haul Mode" listed previously and Manual Mode 0 280. Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades by using the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle.
If equipped, on vehicles with a gasoline engine, to disable or enable Tow/Haul Grade Braking within the current ignition key cycle, press and hold the Tow/Haul button for five seconds. When the button is released, the requested mode change is made. A DIC message is displayed. See Transmission Messages 0 157.
On vehicles with a diesel engine, Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking can be enabled or disabled by pressing the Tow/Haul Mode button. Use the exhaust brake and Tow/Haul Mode for maximum grade braking.
See Towing Equipment 0 335.
For other forms of grade braking, see Automatic Transmission 0 277 and Cruise Control 0 298.
Driving and Operating 283
Manual Transmission
If equipped with a manual transmission, this is the shift pattern. To operate the manual transmission: 1 (First) : Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you slowly press down on the accelerator pedal. You can shift into 1 (First) when you are going less than 30 km/h (20 mph). If you have come to a complete stop and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the shift lever in
Neutral and let up on the clutch. Then press the clutch pedal back down and shift into 1 (First).
2 (Second) : Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), and 5 (Fifth) : Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), and 5 (Fifth) the same way you do for 2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Neutral : Use this position when you start or idle the engine.
R (Reverse) : To back up, press the clutch pedal. After the vehicle stops, shift into R (Reverse). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. If it is hard to shift, let the shift lever return to
284 Driving and Operating
Neutral and release the clutch pedal. Then press the clutch again and shift into R (Reverse). Do not attempt to shift into 5 (Fifth) prior to shifting into R (Reverse). The transmission has a lock out feature, which prevents a 5 (Fifth) gear to R (Reverse) gear shift.
Caution
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped.
Shift Speeds
{ Warning
If you skip a gear when downshifting, you could lose control of the vehicle. You could injure yourself or others. Do not shift down more than one gear at a time when downshifting.
Use R (Reverse), along with the parking brake, for parking the vehicle.
Drive Systems
Four-Wheel Drive
If equipped, four-wheel drive engages the front axle for extra traction. Read the appropriate section for transfer case operation before using.
Caution
Do not drive on clean, dry
pavement in 4 m and 4 n (if
equipped) for an extended period of time. These conditions may cause premature wear on the vehicle's powertrain.
Driving on clean, dry pavement in 4HI or 4LO may: . Cause a vibration to be felt in
the steering system. . Cause tires to wear faster. . Make the transfer case harder to
shift, and cause it to run noisier.
{ Warning
Shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in N (Neutral). See Parking Brake 0 293.
Caution
Extended high-speed operation in
4 n may damage or shorten the
life of the drivetrain.
Engagement noise and bump when
shifting between 4 n and 4 m or from
N (Neutral), with the engine running, is normal.
Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction
Control and StabiliTrak® off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
Manual Transfer Case
Move the lever to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.
An indicator light comes on when four-wheel drive is engaged. See Four-Wheel-Drive Light 0 141.
Driving and Operating 285
N (Neutral) : Use only when the vehicle needs to be towed. See Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 437 or Towing the Vehicle 0 436.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Use
this setting for driving on most streets and highways. The front axle is not engaged. This setting provides the best fuel economy.
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : This
setting also engages the front axle and delivers extra torque. Choose 4
n if driving off-road in deep sand,
deep mud, or deep snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills. When engaged, keep vehicle speed below 72 km/h (45 mph).
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Use
this setting when extra traction is needed. The front axle engages and helps when driving on snowy or icy roads, when off-roading, or when plowing snow.
The vehicle can be shifted between
2 m and 4 m while the vehicle is
moving. In extremely cold weather, it may be necessary to stop or slow
286 Driving and Operating
the vehicle to shift into 4 m.
Using the Manual Transfer Case
. Use quick motions to shift into or
out of 4 n or N (Neutral).
. Shifting may be harder when the vehicle is cold, but will return to normal once warmed up.
. Four-wheel drive reduces fuel economy.
Shifting from 2 m to 4 m
. Shifts can be made at any vehicle speed.
. Shift in one continuous motion.
. Shifting while the vehicle is in motion may require that moderate force be applied to the
shift lever before 4 m can be
engaged, especially in cold weather.
. In extremely cold weather, it may be necessary to slow or stop the vehicle to shift.
. While in 4 m, the vehicle can be
driven at any posted legal speed limit.
Shifting In or Out of 4 n
Caution
Shifting the transfer case into 4 n
while moving at speeds faster than 5 km/h (3 mph) may cause premature wear to the transfer case, and may cause the gears to grind.
1. If possible, shift with the vehicle moving 5 km/h (3 mph) or less.
2. Shift the transmission into N (Neutral).
3. Shift the transfer case shift lever in one continuous motion.
4. Shifting with the vehicle at a stop may be more difficult. It is possible that the shift will not complete and the transfer case will remain in N (Neutral). This is normal. To complete the shift, with the engine running, shift the transmission to
D (Drive) and back to N (Neutral), and reattempt the transfer case shift.
Shifting In or Out of N (Neutral)
1. Have the engine running.
2. Set the parking brake. Press and hold the brake pedal. See Parking Brake 0 293.
3. Place the transmission into N (Neutral).
4. Shift the transfer case lever in one continuous motion into or out of N (Neutral).
Electronic Transfer Case
Use the transfer case knob, next to the steering wheel, to shift into and out of four-wheel drive for extra traction.
All of the lights will blink on then off momentarily when the ignition is moved to the ON/RUN position. The light that remains on will indicate the state of the Transfer Case.
If the indicator mark on the switch does not match up with the light then that likely means the switch was moved when the ignition was off.
The indicator mark on the switch must line up with the indicator light before a shift can be commanded. To command a shift rotate the transfer case switch to the new desired position. The light will blink meaning that the shift is in progress. When the shift is completed the new position will be illuminated. If the transfer case can not complete a shift command, it will go back to its last chosen setting.
Driving and Operating 287
Caution
Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
The settings are:
N (Neutral) : Use only when the vehicle needs to be towed. See Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 437 or Towing the Vehicle 0 436.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Use
for driving on most streets and highways. The front axle is not engaged. This setting provides the best fuel economy.
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : This
setting engages the front axle and
delivers extra torque. Choose 4 n if
driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, or deep snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills. When engaged, keep vehicle speed below 72 km/h (45 mph).
Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction
Control and StabiliTrak off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Use
when extra traction is needed. The front axle engages and helps when driving on snowy or icy roads, when off-roading, or when plowing snow.
The vehicle can be shifted from 2 m to 4 m while the vehicle is moving.
Shifting Into 4 m
Turn the knob to 4 m at any speed
up to 121 km/h (75 mph), except
from 4 n. The indicator light will flash
while shifting and will remain on the selected setting.
Shifting Into 2 m
Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed, except when shifting from 4 n.
Shifting Into 4 n
When 4 n is engaged, vehicle speed
should be kept below 72 km/h (45 mph).
288 Driving and Operating
1. The ignition must be in ON/ RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the transmission in N (Neutral). It is best for the vehicle to be moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for the 4 n indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
If the transmission is in gear and/or moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),
the 4 n indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift. After 30 seconds the transfer
case will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob to 4 m to see the indicator. With the
vehicle moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the transmission in N (Neutral), attempt the shift again.
Shifting Out of 4 n
1. To shift out of 4 n the vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the transmission in N (Neutral)
and the ignition in ON/RUN. It is best for the vehicle to be moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
2. Turn the knob to 4 m or 2 m. Wait for the 4 m or 2 m indicator
light to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
If the transmission is in gear and/or moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),
the 4 m or 2 m indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds, but will not complete the shift. With the vehicle moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the transmission in N (Neutral), attempt the shift again.
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
To shift:
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Set the parking brake and press and hold the brake pedal. See Parking Brake 0 293.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
4. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.
6. Turn the transfer case knob clockwise to N (Neutral) until it stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral) light starts blinking. This will take at least 10 seconds. Then slowly
release the dial to the 4 n
position. The N (Neutral) light will come on when the transfer case shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
7. With the engine running, verify that the transfer case is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to R (Reverse), then to D (Drive). There should be no movement of the vehicle while shifting the transmission.
8. Turn the engine off, and the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park). See Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 437.
10. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Shifting Out of N (Neutral)
To shift:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
3. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
4. Turn the transfer case knob to
2 m.
After the transfer case has shifted out of N (Neutral), the N (Neutral) light will go out.
5. Release the parking brake.
Caution
Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
Driving and Operating 289
6. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired gear.
Automatic Transfer Case
If equipped, use the transfer case knob next to the steering wheel to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. All of the lights will blink on then off momentarily when the ignition is moved to the ON/RUN position. The light that remains on will indicate the state of the Transfer Case.
If the indicator mark on the switch does not match up with the light then that likely means the switch was moved when the ignition was off.
The indicator mark on the switch must line up with the indicator light before a shift can be commanded. To command a shift rotate the transfer case switch to the new desired position. The light will blink meaning that the shift is in progress. When the shift is completed the new position will be illuminated. If the transfer case can not complete a shift command, it will go back to its last chosen setting.
The settings are:
N (Neutral) : Use only when the vehicle needs to be towed. See Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 437 or Towing the Vehicle 0 436.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Use
for driving on most streets and highways. The front axle is not engaged. This setting provides the best fuel economy.
290 Driving and Operating
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive) : Use when road surface traction conditions are variable. When driving in AUTO, the front axle is engaged, and the vehicle's power is sent to the front and rear wheels automatically based on driving conditions. This setting provides slightly lower fuel economy
than 2 m.
Do not use AUTO mode, if equipped, to park on a steep grade with poor traction such as ice, snow, mud, or gravel. In AUTO mode only the rear wheels will hold the vehicle from sliding when parked. If parking on a steep grade,
use 4 m to keep all four wheels
engaged.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Use
this position when extra traction is needed, such as when driving on snowy or icy roads, when off-roading, or when plowing snow.
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : This
setting engages the front axle and
delivers extra torque. Choose 4 n
when driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, or deep snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills.
Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction
Control and StabiliTrak off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO
Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTO
position at any speed, except from
4 n. The indicator light will flash
while shifting and will remain on when the shift is completed.
Shifting Into 2 m
Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed, except when shifting from 4 n. The
indicator light will flash while shifting and will remain on when the shift is completed.
Shifting Into 4 n
When 4 n is engaged, keep vehicle
speed below 72 km/h (45 mph).
To shift:
1. The ignition must be in ON/ RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the transmission in N (Neutral). It is best for the vehicle to be moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for the 4 n indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
Caution
Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
If the transmission is in gear and/or moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),
the 4 n indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift. After 30 seconds the transfer
case will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob to 4 m to display the indicator. With
the vehicle moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the transmission in N (Neutral), attempt the shift again.
Shifting Out of 4 n
To shift:
1. The vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the transmission in N (Neutral) and the ignition in ON/RUN. It is best for the vehicle to be moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
Caution
Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
If the transmission is in gear and/or moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),
the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator light
will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift. With the vehicle moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the transmission in N (Neutral), attempt the shift again.
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
To shift into N (Neutral):
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Set the parking brake and press and hold the brake pedal. See Parking Brake 0 293.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
Driving and Operating 291
4. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.
6. Turn the transfer case knob clockwise to N (Neutral) until it stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral) light starts blinking. This will take at least 10 seconds. Then slowly
release the dial to the 4 n
position. The N (Neutral) light will come on when the transfer case shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
7. With the engine running, verify that the transfer case is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to R (Reverse), then shift the transmission to D (Drive). There should be no movement of the vehicle while shifting the transmission.
8. Turn the engine off, and the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park). See Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 437.
292 Driving and Operating
10. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Shifting Out of N (Neutral)
To shift out of N (Neutral):
1. Set the parking brake and apply the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
3. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
4. Turn the transfer case knob to the desired setting.
After the transfer case has shifted out of N (Neutral), the N (Neutral) light will go out.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired gear.
Brakes
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has an Antilock Brake System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid. When the vehicle begins to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or clicking noise may be heard while this test is going on, and it may even be noticed that the brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light 0 141.
If driving safely on a wet road and it becomes necessary to slam on the brakes and continue braking to avoid a sudden obstacle, a computer senses the wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as required, faster than any driver could. This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let ABS work. You may hear the ABS pump or motor operating and feel the brake pedal pulsate. This is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows you to steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than even the very best braking.
Parking Brake
For vehicles without a release handle, set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then pushing down the parking brake pedal.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light 0 140.
Caution
Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down, then push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release. Slowly pull your foot up off the parking brake pedal. If the parking brake is not released when you begin to drive, the brake
Driving and Operating 293
system warning light will flash and a chime will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 315.
For vehicles with a release handle, set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then pushing down the parking brake pedal. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light 0 140.
294 Driving and Operating
A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 8 km/h (5 mph).
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of the lever with the parking brake symbol, located to the right of the steering column.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released, the brake system warning light goes off.
Caution
Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 315.
Brake Assist
The Brake Assist feature is designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal pulsation or pedal movement during this time is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist (HSA) feature, which may be useful when the vehicle is stopped on a grade. This feature is designed to prevent the vehicle from rolling, either forward or rearward, during vehicle drive off. After you completely stop and hold the vehicle in a complete standstill on a grade, HSA will automatically activate. During the transition period between when you release the brake pedal and start to accelerate to drive off on a grade, HSA holds the braking pressure for a maximum of two seconds to ensure that there is no rolling. The brakes will automatically release when the accelerator pedal is applied within the two-second window. If the vehicle is equipped with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, HSA may also apply the trailer brakes. It will not activate if the vehicle is in a drive gear and
facing downhill or if the vehicle is facing uphill and in R (Reverse). There may be situations on minor hills (less than 5% grade) with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where HSA may activate.
If you release the brake pedal and then reapply the brake pedal while HSA is activated, the brake pedal typically feels firmer with less pedal travel.
Driving and Operating 295
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/ Electronic Stability Control
System Operation
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an electronic stability control system. These systems help limit wheel spin and assist the driver in maintaining control, especially on slippery road conditions.
TCS activates if it senses any of the drive wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, TCS applies the brakes to the spinning wheels and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
StabiliTrak activates when the vehicle senses a difference between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure to any one of the vehicle wheel brakes to assist the driver in keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is also on automatically when the vehicle is started. See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 344.
If cruise control is being used and traction control or StabiliTrak begins to limit wheel spin, cruise control will disengage. Cruise control may be turned back on when road conditions allow.
Both systems come on automatically when the vehicle is started and begins to move. The systems may be heard or felt while they are operating or while performing diagnostic checks. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle.
It is recommended to leave both systems on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 258 and "Turning the Systems Off and On" later in this section.
When the transfer case (if equipped) is in Four-Wheel Drive Low, the stability system is automatically
296 Driving and Operating
disabled, g comes on, and the
appropriate message will appear on the DIC. Both traction control and StabiliTrak are automatically disabled in this condition.
The indicator light for both systems is in the instrument cluster. This light will: . Flash when TCS is limiting
wheel spin. . Flash when StabiliTrak is
activated. . Turn on and stay on when either
system is not working. If either system fails to turn on or to activate, a message displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC), and
d comes on and stays on to
indicate that the system is inactive and is not assisting the driver in
maintaining control. The vehicle is safe to drive, but driving should be adjusted accordingly.
If d comes on and stays on:
1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Turn the engine off and wait
15 seconds. 3. Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle. If d comes on
and stays on, the vehicle may need more time to diagnose the problem. If the condition persists, see your dealer. Turning the Systems Off and On
The button for TCS and StabiliTrak is on the center stack.
Caution
Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when TCS is off. The vehicle driveline could be damaged.
To turn off only TCS, press and
release g. The traction off light i
displays in the instrument cluster. The appropriate message will display in the DIC. See Ride Control System Messages 0 154. To turn
TCS on again, press and release g. The traction off light i displayed in
the instrument cluster will turn off.
If TCS is limiting wheel spin when g
is pressed, the system will not turn off until the wheels stop spinning.
To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,
press and hold g until the traction off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF light g come on and stay on in the
instrument cluster, then release. The
appropriate message will display in the DIC. See Ride Control System Messages 0 154.
To turn TCS and StabiliTrak on
again, press and release g. The traction off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF light g in the
instrument cluster turn off.
StabiliTrak will automatically turn on if the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h (35 mph). Traction control will remain off.
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway Control (TSC) feature and a Hill Start Assist (HSA) feature. See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 344 or Hill Start Assist (HSA) 0 294.
Adding accessories can affect the vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications 0 352.
Driving and Operating 297
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
If equipped, HDC can be used when driving downhill. It sets and maintains vehicle speed while descending a very steep incline in a forward or reverse gear. The HDC switch is on the center stack, below the climate controls.
Press 5 to enable or disable HDC.
Vehicle speed must be below 50 km/h (31 mph).
The HDC light displays on the instrument cluster when enabled.
HDC can maintain vehicle speeds between 3 and 22 km/h (2 and 14 mph) on an incline greater than or equal to a 10% grade. A blinking HDC light indicates the system is actively applying the brakes to maintain vehicle speed.
When HDC is activated, the initial HDC speed is set to the current driving speed. It can be increased or decreased by pressing the +RES or SET- steering wheel controls or by applying the accelerator or brake pedal. This adjusted speed becomes the new set speed.
HDC will remain enabled between 22 and 60 km/h (14 and 37 mph); however vehicle speed cannot be set or maintained in this range. It will automatically disable if the vehicle speed is above 80 km/h (50 mph) or above 60 km/h
(37 mph) for at least 30 seconds. 5
must be pressed again to re-enable HDC.
298 Driving and Operating
When enabled, if the vehicle is at a speed above 22 km/h (14 mph) and less than 60 km/h (37 mph), a DIC message will display. See Vehicle Speed Messages 0 160.
Locking Rear Axle
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction on snow, mud, ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low, this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle.
Cruise Control
{ Warning
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. Do not use cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
how cruise control interacts with the Range Selection Mode, Tow/Haul Mode, and Grade Braking systems.
If the cruise control is being used and the Traction Control system (TCS) or StabiliTrak begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 295. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, cruise control can be turned back on.
If the brakes are applied, cruise control disengages.
With cruise control a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
If equipped with an Allison or Hydra-Matic 6-speed automatic transmission, see "Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking" under Tow/Haul Mode 0 282 for an explanation of
5 : Press to turn the system on or
off. The indicator light is white when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off.
+RES : If there is a set speed in memory, press briefly to resume to that speed or press and hold to accelerate. If cruise control is already active, use to increase vehicle speed.
SET : Press briefly to set the speed and activate cruise control. If cruise control is already active, use to decrease vehicle speed.
* : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
If 5 is on when not in use, SET or
+RES could get pressed and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep 5
off when cruise is not being used.
1. Press 5 to turn the cruise
system on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release SET.
Driving and Operating 299
4. Remove foot from the accelerator.
The cruise control indicator on the instrument cluster turns green after cruise control has been set to the desired speed. See Instrument Cluster 0 128.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes
are applied or * is pressed, the
cruise control is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, briefly press +RES . The vehicle returns to the previous set speed.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is already activated:
. Press and hold +RES until the desired speed is reached, then release it.
. To increase vehicle speed in small increments, briefly press +RES. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 128. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is already activated:
. Press and hold SET until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it.
. To slow down in small increments, briefly press SET . For each press, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 128. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.
300 Driving and Operating
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed. While pressing the accelerator pedal or shortly following the release to override cruise control, briefly pressing SET will result in cruise control set to the current vehicle speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the vehicle speed, the load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, pressing the accelerator pedal may be necessary to maintain vehicle speed.
While going downhill:
. Vehicles with a 6-speed automatic transmission and a gasoline engine have Cruise Grade Braking to help maintain driver selected speed.
Cruise Grade Braking is enabled when the vehicle is started and cruise control is active. It is not enabled in Range Selection Mode. It assists in maintaining driver selected speed when driving on downhill grades by using the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle.
To disable and enable Cruise Grade Braking for the current ignition key cycle, press and hold the Tow/Haul button for five seconds. A DIC message displays. See Transmission Messages 0 157.
. Vehicles with a diesel engine have Cruise Grade Braking enabled when Tow/Haul Mode is on, the exhaust brake is on, or both are on.
For other forms of descent control, see Hill Descent Control (HDC) 0 297,Automatic Transmission 0 277, and Tow/Haul Mode 0 282.
Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to end cruise control:
. Step lightly on the brake pedal.
. Press *.
. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
. To turn off cruise control,
press 5.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory if 5 is pressed
or the ignition is turned off.
Driver Assistance Systems
This vehicle may have features that work together to help avoid crashes or reduce crash damage while driving, backing, and parking. Read this entire section before using these systems.
{ Warning
Do not rely on the Driver Assistance Systems. These systems do not replace the need for paying attention and driving safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by these systems. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving 0 248.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 301
Warning (Continued)
Under many conditions, these systems will not:
. Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
. Detect vehicles or objects outside the area monitored by the system.
. Work at all driving speeds.
. Warn you or provide you with enough time to avoid a crash.
. Work under poor visibility or bad weather conditions.
. Work if the detection sensor is not cleaned or is covered by ice, snow, mud, or dirt.
. Work if the detection sensor is covered up, such as with a sticker, magnet, or metal plate.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Work if the area surrounding the detection sensor is damaged or not properly repaired.
Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.
Audible or Safety Alert Seat
Some driver assistance features alert the driver of obstacles by beeping. To change the volume of the warning chime, see "Comfort and Convenience" under Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
If equipped with the Safety Alert Seat, the driver seat cushion may provide a vibrating pulse alert instead of beeping. To change this, see "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
302 Driving and Operating
Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing
If equipped, the Rear Vision Camera (RVC), Rear Parking Assist (RPA), and Front Parking Assist (FPA) may help the driver park or avoid objects. Always check around the vehicle when parking or backing.
The RVC and RPA will not work properly if the tailgate is down. If the tailgate is down, do not use these systems.
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
When the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse), the RVC displays an image of the area behind the vehicle in the center stack display. The previous screen displays when the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) after a short delay. To return to the previous screen sooner, press a button on the infotainment system, shift into P (Park), or reach a vehicle speed of 8 km/h (5 mph).
1. View Displayed by the Camera
1. View Displayed by the Camera
2. Corners of the Rear Bumper
Displayed images may be farther or closer than they appear. The area displayed is limited and objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper do not display.
A warning triangle may display on the RVC screen to show that RPA has detected an object. This triangle changes from amber to red and increases in size the closer the object.
{ Warning
The camera(s) do not display children, pedestrians, bicyclists, crossing traffic, animals, or any other object outside of the cameras' field of view, below the bumper, or under the vehicle. Shown distances may be different from actual distances. Do not drive or park the vehicle using only these camera(s). Always check behind and around the vehicle before driving. Failure to use proper care may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage.
Parking Assist
With RPA, and if equipped with FPA, as the vehicle moves at speeds of less than 8 km/h (5 mph) the sensors on the bumpers may detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind and 1.2 m (4 ft) in front of the vehicle within a zone 25 cm (10 in) high off the ground and below bumper level. These detection distances may be shorter during warmer or humid weather. Blocked sensors will not detect objects and can also cause false detections. Keep the sensors clean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush; and clean sensors after a car wash in freezing temperatures.
{ Warning
The Parking Assist system does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects located below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. It is not available at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To prevent injury, death,
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
or vehicle damage, even with Parking Assist, always check the area around the vehicle and check all mirrors before moving forward or backing.
Driving and Operating 303
When an object is first detected in the rear, one beep will be heard from the rear, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse two times. When an object is very close (<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear, or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front), a continuous beep will sound from the front or rear, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. Beeps for FPA are higher pitched than for RPA.
Turning the Features On or Off
The instrument cluster may have a parking assist display with bars that show "distance to object" and object location information for the Parking Assist system. As the object gets closer, more bars light up and the bars change color from yellow to amber to red.
The X button on the center stack
is used to turn on or off the Front and Rear Parking Assist. The indicator light in the button comes on when the features are on and turns off when the features have been disabled.
304 Driving and Operating
Front and Rear Parking Assist can be turned off, on, or on with towbar through vehicle personalization. See "Park Assist" under Vehicle Personalization 0 160. If the parking assist is turned off through vehicle personalization, the parking assist button on the center stack will be disabled. To turn the parking assist on again, select On in the vehicle personalization menu. The On with Towbar setting allows for the parking assist to work properly with a small item attached to the trailer hitch. Turn off parking assist when towing a trailer.
To turn the rear parking assist symbols or guidance lines on or off, see "Rear Camera" under Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
Assistance Systems for Driving
If equipped, when driving the vehicle in a forward gear, Forward Collision Alert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning (LDW), and/or
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) can help to avoid a crash or reduce crash damage.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System
If equipped, the FCA system may help to avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. When approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly, FCA provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly beeps or pulses the driver seat. FCA also lights an amber visual alert if following another vehicle much too closely.
FCA detects vehicles within a distance of approximately 60 m (197 ft) and operates at speeds above 40 km/h (25 mph).
{ Warning
FCA is a warning system and does not apply the brakes. When approaching a slower-moving or stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
or when following a vehicle too closely, FCA may not provide a warning with enough time to help avoid a crash. It also may not provide any warning at all. FCA does not warn of pedestrians, animals, signs, guardrails, bridges, construction barrels, or other objects. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving 0 248.
FCA can be disabled with the FCA steering wheel control. Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
FCA warnings will not occur unless the FCA system detects a vehicle ahead. When a vehicle is detected, the vehicle ahead indicator will
display green. Vehicles may not be detected on curves, highway exit ramps, or hills, due to poor visibility; or if a vehicle ahead is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects. FCA will not detect another vehicle ahead until it is completely in the driving lane.
{ Warning
FCA does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash, unless it detects a vehicle. FCA may not detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit visibility such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FCA sensors clean and in good repair.
Collision Alert
Driving and Operating 305
Tailgating Alert
When your vehicle approaches another detected vehicle too rapidly, the red FCA display will flash on the windshield. Also, eight rapid high-pitched beeps will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. When this Collision Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Cruise control may be disengaged when the Collision Alert occurs.
The vehicle ahead indicator will display amber when you are following a detected vehicle ahead much too closely. Selecting the Alert Timing
The Collision Alert control is on the
steering wheel. Press [ to set the
FCA timing to Far, Medium, Near,
306 Driving and Operating
or Off. The first button press shows the current setting on the DIC. Additional button presses will change this setting. The chosen setting will remain until it is changed and will affect the timing of both the Collision Alert and the Tailgating Alert features. The timing of both alerts will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the farther away the alert will occur. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the alert timing. The range of selectable alert timing may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.
Unnecessary Alerts
FCA may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes, objects that are not vehicles, or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need service.
Cleaning the System
If the FCA system does not seem to operate properly, cleaning the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror, and cleaning the
front of the vehicle where radar sensors are located, may correct the issue.
Forward Automatic Braking (FAB)
If the vehicle has Forward Collision Alert (FCA), it also has FAB, which includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA). When the system detects a vehicle ahead in your path that is traveling in the same direction that you may be about to crash into, it can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This can help avoid or lessen the severity of crashes when driving in a forward gear. Depending on the situation, the vehicle may automatically brake moderately or hard. This forward automatic braking can only occur if a vehicle is detected. This is shown by the FCA vehicle ahead indicator being lit. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 304.
The system works when driving in a forward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (37 mph). It can detect vehicles up to approximately 60 m (197 ft).
{ Warning
FAB is an emergency crash preparation feature and is not designed to avoid crashes. Do not rely on FAB to brake the vehicle. FAB will not brake outside of its operating speed range and only responds to detected vehicles.
FAB may not:
. Detect a vehicle ahead on winding or hilly roads.
. Detect all vehicles, especially vehicles with a trailer, tractors, muddy vehicles, etc.
. Detect a vehicle when weather limits visibility, such as in fog, rain, or snow.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 307
Warning (Continued)
. Detect a vehicle ahead if it is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects.
Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.
FAB may slow the vehicle to a complete stop to try to avoid a potential crash. If this happens, FAB may engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop. Release the EPB or firmly press the accelerator pedal.
{ Warning
FAB may automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could respond to a turning vehicle ahead, guardrails, signs, and other non-moving
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
objects. To override FAB, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so.
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
IBA may activate when the brake pedal is applied quickly by providing a boost to braking based on the speed of approach and distance to a vehicle ahead.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the brake pedal should continue to be applied as needed. IBA will automatically disengage only when the brake pedal is released.
{ Warning
IBA may increase vehicle braking in situations when it may not be necessary. You could block the
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
flow of traffic. If this occurs, take your foot off the brake pedal and then apply the brakes as needed.
FAB and IBA can be disabled through vehicle personalization. See the "Auto Collision Preparation" information in "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 160.
{ Warning
Using FAB or IBA while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert or Off when towing a trailer.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (2500/3500 Series)
If equipped, LDW may help avoid crashes due to unintentional lane departures. It may provide an alert if the vehicle is crossing a lane
308 Driving and Operating
marking without using a turn signal in that direction. LDW uses a camera sensor to detect the lane markings at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or greater.
{ Warning
The LDW system does not steer the vehicle. The LDW system may not:
. Provide enough time to avoid a crash.
. Detect lane markings under poor weather or visibility conditions. This can occur if the windshield or headlamps are blocked by dirt, snow, or ice; if they are not in proper condition; or if the sun shines directly into the camera.
. Detect road edges.
. Detect lanes on winding or hilly roads.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
If LDW only detects lane markings on one side of the road, it will only warn you when departing the lane on the side where it has detected a lane marking. Always keep your attention on the road and maintain proper vehicle position within the lane, or vehicle damage, injury, or death could occur. Always keep the windshield, headlamps, and camera sensors clean and in good repair. Do not use LDW in bad weather conditions.
How the System Works
The LDW camera sensor is on the windshield ahead of the rearview mirror.
To turn LDW on and off, press @ on
the center stack. The control indicator will light when LDW is on.
When LDW is on, @ is green if
LDW is available to warn of a lane departure. If the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking without using
the turn signal in that direction, @
changes to amber and flashes. Additionally, there will be three beeps, or the driver seat will pulse three times on the right or left, depending on the lane departure direction.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The system may not detect lanes as well when there are:
. Close vehicles ahead.
. Sudden lighting changes, such as when driving through tunnels.
. Banked roads.
If the LDW system is not functioning properly when lane markings are clearly visible, cleaning the windshield may help.
LDW alerts may occur due to tar marks, shadows, cracks in the road, temporary or construction lane markings, or other road imperfections. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service. Turn LDW off if these conditions continue.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) (1500 Series)
If equipped, LKA may help avoid crashes due to unintentional lane departures. It may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking without using a turn signal in that direction. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system alert as the lane marking is crossed. The LKA system will not assist or provide an LDW alert if it detects that you are actively steering. Override LKA by turning the steering wheel. LKA uses a
camera to detect lane markings between 60 km/h (37 mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph).
{ Warning
The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. It may not keep the vehicle in the lane or give a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert, even if a lane marking is detected.
The LKA and LDW systems may not:
. Provide an alert or enough steering assist to avoid a lane departure or crash.
. Detect lane markings under poor weather or visibility conditions. This can occur if the windshield or headlamps are blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, if they are not in proper condition, or if the sun shines directly into the camera.
. Detect road edges.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 309
Warning (Continued)
. Detect lanes on winding or hilly roads.
If LKA only detects lane markings on one side of the road, it will only assist or provide an LDW alert when approaching the lane on the side where it has detected a lane marking. Even with LKA and LDW, you must steer the vehicle. Always keep your attention on the road and maintain proper vehicle position within the lane, or vehicle damage, injury, or death could occur. Always keep the windshield, headlamps, and camera sensors clean and in good repair. Do not use LKA in bad weather conditions.
310 Driving and Operating
{ Warning
Using LKA while towing a trailer or on slippery roads could cause loss of control of the vehicle and a crash. Turn the system off.
How the System Works
The LKA camera sensor is on the windshield ahead of the rearview mirror.
To turn LKA on and off, press A
on the center stack.
When on, A is green if LKA is
available to assist and provide LDW alerts. It may assist by gently turning the steering wheel and
display A as amber if the vehicle
approaches a detected lane marking without using a turn signal in that direction. It may also provide an
LDW alert by flashing A amber
as the lane marking is crossed. Additionally, there will be three beeps, or the driver seat will pulse
three times, on the right or left, depending on the lane departure direction.
The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. If LKA does not detect active driver steering, an alert and chime may be provided. Move the steering wheel to dismiss.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The system performance may be affected by:
. Close vehicles ahead.
. Sudden lighting changes, such as when driving through tunnels.
. Banked roads.
. Roads with poor lane markings, such as two-lane roads.
If the LKA system is not functioning properly when lane markings are clearly visible, cleaning the windshield may help.
LKA assistance and/or LDW alerts may occur due to tar marks, shadows, cracks in the road, temporary or construction lane markings, or other road imperfections. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service. Turn LKA off if these conditions continue.
Fuel
For diesel engine vehicles, see "Fuel for Diesel Engines" in the Duramax diesel supplement. GM recommends the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline to keep the engine cleaner and reduce engine deposits. See www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline marketers and applicable countries.
If the vehicle has a yellow sticker on the fuel door, E85 or FlexFuel can be used. See E85 or FlexFuel 0 312.
Driving and Operating 311
Except the 6.2L engine, use regular unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM specification D4814 with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. Do not use gasoline with a posted octane rating of less than 87, as this may cause engine knock and will lower fuel economy.
For the 6.2L engine, premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM specification D4814 with a posted octane rating of 93 is highly recommended for best performance and fuel economy. Unleaded gasoline with an octane rated as low as 87 can be used. Using unleaded gasoline rated below 93 octane, however, will lead to reduced acceleration and fuel economy. If knocking occurs, use a gasoline rated at 93 octane as soon as possible, otherwise, the engine could be damaged. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline with a 93 octane rating, the engine needs service.
Prohibited Fuels
Caution
Do not use fuels with any of the following conditions; doing so may damage the vehicle and void its warranty:
. For vehicles which are not FlexFuel, fuel labeled greater than 15% ethanol by volume, such as mid-level ethanol blends (16 50% ethanol), E85, or FlexFuel.
. Fuel with any amount of methanol, methylal, and aniline. These fuels can corrode metal fuel system parts or damage plastic and rubber parts.
. Fuel containing metals such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT), which can damage the emissions control system and spark plugs.
(Continued)
312 Driving and Operating
Caution (Continued)
. Fuel with a posted octane rating of less than the recommended fuel. Using this fuel will lower fuel economy and performance, and may decrease the life of the emissions catalyst.
California Fuel Requirements
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California Emissions Standards, the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle may not pass a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) 0 138. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
The U.S., Canada, and Mexico post fuel octane ratings in anti-knock index (AKI). For fuel not to use in a foreign country, see "Prohibited Fuels" in Fuel 0 311.
Fuel Additives
To keep fuel systems clean, TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. See Fuel 0 311.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Cleaner added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change, can help. GM Fuel System Treatment Cleaner is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors. It is available at your dealer.
If your vehicle is able to use E85 or FlexFuel, GM Fuel System Treatment Cleaner - FlexFuel is the only recommended additive for use. Do not use any other additives with an E85 or FlexFuel vehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel 0 312.
E85 or FlexFuel
Vehicles with a yellow sticker on the fuel door can use either unleaded gasoline or fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). All other vehicles should use only the unleaded gasoline as described in Fuel 0 311.
The use of E85 or FlexFuel is encouraged when the vehicle is designed to use it. E85 or FlexFuel is made from renewable sources.
To help locate fuel stations that carry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S. Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website. See www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/ stations.
E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTM Specification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB3.512 in Canada. Do
not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85%. Fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM or CGSB specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
For the 6.0L V8 engine, after refueling, the vehicle calculates the composition of the fuel. It is not recommended to repeatedly switch between fuels. If fuels are switched frequently, add as much fuel as possible and do not add less than 11 L (3 gal) when refueling. Drive at least 11 km (7 mi) immediately after refueling to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.
Because E85 or FlexFuel has less energy per liter (gallon) than gasoline, the vehicle will need to be refilled more often. See Filling the Tank 0 313.
Driving and Operating 313
Caution
Some additives are not compatible with E85 or FlexFuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system. Do not add anything to E85 or FlexFuel. Damage caused by additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Caution
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty.
Filling the Tank
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
{ Warning
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn violently and can cause injury or death.
. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island.
. Turn off the engine when refueling.
. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended.
. Do not use a cell phone while refueling.
. Do not reenter the vehicle while pumping fuel.
. Keep children away from the fuel pump and never let children pump fuel.
(Continued)
314 Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
. Fuel can spray out if the refueling nozzle is inserted too quickly. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Insert the refueling nozzle slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop prior to beginning to flow fuel.
{ Warning
Overfilling the fuel tank by more than three clicks of a standard fill nozzle may cause:
. Vehicle performance issues, including engine stalling and damage to the fuel system.
. Fuel spills. . Potential fuel fires.
The vehicle has a capless refueling system and does not have a fuel cap. The filling nozzle must be fully inserted and latched prior to starting fuel flow.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Exterior Care 0 441.
{ Warning
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
For models with dual fuel tanks, the fuel gauge shows an average of both tanks. The rear tank is emptied first. When refueling, refuel the front tank first, then add fuel to the rear tank. Filling the Tank With a Portable Gas Can If the vehicle runs out of fuel and must be filled from a portable gas can:
1. Locate the capless funnel adapter from inside the vehicle.
2. Insert and latch the funnel into the capless fuel system.
{ Warning
Attempting to refuel without using the funnel adapter may cause fuel spillage and damage the capless fuel system. This could cause a fire and you or others could be badly burned and the vehicle could be damaged.
3. Remove and clean the funnel adapter and return to the storage location.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{ Warning
Filling a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle can cause fuel vapors that can ignite either by static electricity or other
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
means. You or others could be badly burned and the vehicle could be damaged. Always:
. Use approved fuel containers.
. Remove the container from the vehicle, trunk, or pickup bed before filling.
. Place the container on the ground.
. Place the nozzle inside the fill opening of the container before dispensing fuel, and keep it in contact with the fill opening until filling is complete.
. Fill the container no more than 95% full to allow for expansion.
. Do not smoke, light matches, or use lighters while pumping fuel.
. Avoid using cell phones or other electronic devices.
Driving and Operating 315
Trailer Towing
General Towing Information
Only use towing equipment that has been designed for the vehicle. Contact your dealer or trailering dealer for assistance with preparing the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read the entire section before towing a trailer.
For towing a disabled vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle 0 436. For towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motor home, see Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 437.
Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips
Driving with a Trailer
When towing a trailer:
. Become familiar with the state and local laws that apply to trailer towing.
316 Driving and Operating
. The trailer must be equipped with brakes adequate for the intended use. A loaded trailer weighing more than 900 kg (2,000 lb) must be equipped with its own brake system, with brakes working on all axles. Trailer braking equipment conforming to Canadian Standards Association (CSA) requirement CAN3-D313, or its equivalent, is recommended.
. Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 mi) to prevent damage to the engine, axle, or other parts.
. Then during the first 800 km (500 mi) of trailer towing, do not drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and do not make starts at full throttle.
. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). The Tow/Haul Mode may be used if the transmission shifts too often. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282.
. Turn off Park Assist when towing.
{ Warning
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
When towing a trailer:
. Do not drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window open.
. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
. Also adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air. See "Climate Control Systems" in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust 0 276.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. The combination you are driving is longer and not as responsive as the
vehicle itself. Get acquainted with the handling and braking of the rig before setting out for the open road.
The structure, tires, and brakes of the trailer must be rated to carry the load. Inadequate trailer equipment can cause the combination to operate in an unexpected or unsafe manner.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires, and mirrors. Get familiar with the handling and braking of the rig. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the combination moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes work.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and the lamps and any trailer brakes still work.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer. The combination will not accelerate as quickly and is longer so it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. To move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Caution
Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
Driving and Operating 317
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn out, the arrows on the instrument cluster will still flash for turns. It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes might get hot and no longer work well.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
The Tow/Haul Mode may be used if the transmission shifts too often. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while parked, preferably on level ground, with the transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine Overheating 0 372.
Parking on Hills
{ Warning
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous. If something goes wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a flat surface.
318 Driving and Operating
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Shift into a gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
7. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance when Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer. See Maintenance Schedule 0 452. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system, and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Trailer Towing
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
If the vehicle is bi-fuel, see the bi-fuel supplement.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle Break-In 0 267.
{ Warning
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load, the vehicle may not stop as expected. The driver and passengers could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Caution
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this section and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259 for more information about the vehicle's maximum load capacity.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the information in "Weight of the Trailer" later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are
Driving and Operating 319
important for your safety and that of your passengers. Read this section carefully before pulling a trailer.
Weight of the Trailer
Safe trailering requires monitoring the weight, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature, and how frequently the vehicle is used to pull a trailer. Take into consideration any special equipment on the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See "Weight of the Trailer Tongue" later in this section for more information.
Trailer weight rating (TWR) for pickup models is calculated assuming the tow vehicle has the driver, a front seat passenger, and all required trailering equipment. Weight of additional optional equipment, passengers, and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the trailer weight rating.
Ask your dealer for trailering information or advice.
For kingpin weight and trailer tongue weight information, see "Weight of the Trailer Tongue" later in this section.
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Weights listed apply for conventional trailers and gooseneck/fifth-wheel trailers unless otherwise noted.
320 Driving and Operating
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6
3.23
4.3L V6
4.10
5.3L V8
3.08
5.3L V8
3.42
1500 Series 2WD Double Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6
3.23
5.3L V8
3.08
5.3L V8, 6-speed automatic
3.42
transmission
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic
3.42
transmission Conventional Trailer
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic
3.42
transmission Gooseneck/
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic
3.42
transmission with Enhanced Towing
Package Conventional Trailer
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
2 722 kg (6,000 lb) 2 087 kg (4,600 lb) 3 130 kg (6,900 lb) 4 037 kg (8,900 lb)
2 540 kg (5,600 lb) 2 903 kg (6,400 lb) 4 264 kg (9,400 lb)
4 264 kg (9,400 lb)
4 128 kg (9,100 lb)
5 035 kg (11,100 lb)
GCWR (a)
4 990 kg (11,000 lb) 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
4 990 kg (11,000 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic
3.42
transmission with Enhanced Towing Package Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel
Trailer
5.3L V8 Conventional Trailer
3.73
5.3L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel
3.73
Trailer
6.2L V8 Conventional Trailer
3.23
6.2L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel
3.23
Trailer
6.2L V8 Conventional Trailer
3.42
6.2L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel
3.42
Trailer
1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6
3.23
5.3L V8
3.08
5.3L V8 Conventional Trailer
3.42
Driving and Operating 321
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
GCWR (a) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
5 035 kg (11,100 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 4 082 kg (9,000 lb)
5 670 kg (12,500 lb) 5 307 kg (11,700 lb)
7 575 kg (16,700 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
8 255 kg (18,200 lb) 8 255 kg (18,200 lb)
2 449 kg (5,400 lb) 2 858 kg (6,300 lb) 4 218 kg (9,300 lb)
4 990 kg (11,000 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
322 Driving and Operating
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
5.3L V8, 6-speed automatic transmission Gooseneck/ Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic transmission Gooseneck/ Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic transmission with Enhanced Towing Package Conventional Trailer
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic transmission with Enhanced Towing Package Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8 Conventional Trailer
5.3L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.2L V8 Conventional Trailer
6.2L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.2L V8 Conventional Trailer
Axle Ratio 3.42
3.42
3.42
3.42
3.73 3.73 3.23 3.23 3.42
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
3 901 kg (8,600 lb)
3 674 kg (8,100 lb)
4 944 kg (10,900 lb)
4 808 kg (10,600 lb)
4 990 kg (11,000 lb) 4 853 kg (10,700 lb) 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 3 856 kg (8,500 lb) 5 398 kg (11,900 lb)
GCWR (a) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
7 575 kg (16,700 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle 6.2L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel Trailer
Axle Ratio 3.42
1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)
4.3L V6
3.23
5.3L V8
3.08
5.3L V8, 6-speed automatic
3.42
transmission
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic
3.42
transmission
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic
3.42
transmission with Enhanced Towing
Package
5.3L V8
3.73
6.2L V8
3.23
6.2L V8
3.42
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box
4.3L V6
3.23
5.3L V8 Conventional Trailer
3.08
Driving and Operating 323
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
4 808 kg (10,600 lb)
GCWR (a) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
2 495 kg (5,500 lb) 2 903 kg (6,400 lb) 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 4 990 kg (11,000 lb)
4 990 kg (11,000 lb) 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 5 670 kg (12,500 lb)
2 676 kg (5,900 lb) 3 084 kg (6,800 lb)
4 990 kg (11,000 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
7 575 kg (16,700 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 8 255 kg (18,200 lb)
4 990 kg (11,000 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
324 Driving and Operating
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
5.3L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel
3.08
Trailer
5.3L V8 Conventional Trailer
3.42
5.3L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel
3.42
Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 Conventional Trailer
3.42
4.3L V6 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel
3.42
Trailer
5.3L V8
3.08
5.3L V8
3.42
1500 Series 4WD Double Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6
3.42
5.3L V8
3.08
5.3L V8 Conventional Trailer
3.42
5.3L V8, 6-speed automatic
3.42
transmission Gooseneck/
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
3 039 kg (6,700 lb)
4 445 kg (9,800 lb) 4 400 kg (9,700 lb)
3 447 kg (7,600 lb) 3 402 kg (7,500 lb)
2 994 kg (6,600 lb) 3 901 kg (8,600 lb)
3 221 kg (7,100 lb) 2 812 kg (6,200 lb) 4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 4 082 kg (9,000 lb)
GCWR (a) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
5 806 kg (12,800 lb) 5 806 kg (12,800 lb)
5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
5 806 kg (12,800 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic
3.42
transmission Gooseneck/
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic
3.42
transmission with Enhanced Towing
Package
5.3L V8 Conventional Trailer
3.73
5.3L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel
3.73
Trailer
6.2L V8 Conventional Trailer
3.23
6.2L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel
3.23
Trailer
6.2L V8 Conventional Trailer
3.42
6.2L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel
3.42
Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6
3.42
5.3L V8 Conventional Trailer
3.08
Driving and Operating 325
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
4 173 kg (9,200 lb)
4 899 kg (10,800 lb)
4 944 kg (10,900 lb) 4 899 kg (10,800 lb) 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 3 901 kg (8,600 lb) 5 352 kg (11,800 lb) 5 126 kg (11,300 lb)
3 175 kg (7,000 lb) 2 767 kg (6,100 lb)
GCWR (a) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
7 575 kg (16,700 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
5 806 kg (12,800 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
326 Driving and Operating
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
5.3L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8 Conventional Trailer
5.3L V8, 6-speed automatic transmission Gooseneck/ Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic transmission Gooseneck/ Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic transmission with Enhanced Towing Package
5.3L V8 Conventional Trailer
5.3L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.2L V8 Conventional Trailer
6.2L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.2L V8 Conventional Trailer
Axle Ratio 3.08 3.42 3.42
3.42
3.42
3.73 3.73 3.23 3.23 3.42
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
2 722 kg (6,000 lb) 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 3 674 kg (8,100 lb)
3 765 kg (8,300 lb)
4 853 kg (10,700 lb)
4 899 kg (10,800 lb) 4 853 kg (10,700 lb) 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 3 719 kg (8,200 lb) 5 307 kg (11,700 lb)
GCWR (a) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
7 575 kg (16,700 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
6.2L V8 Gooseneck/Fifth-Wheel
3.42
Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)
4.3L V6
3.42
5.3L V8
3.08
5.3L V8
3.42
5.3L V8, 8-speed automatic
3.42
transmission with Enhanced Towing
Package
5.3L V8
3.73
6.2L V8
3.23
6.2L V8
3.42
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box
4.3L V6
3.42
5.3L V8
3.08
5.3L V8
3.42
2500 Series 2WD Double Cab Standard Box
6.0L V8
3.73
Driving and Operating 327
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
4 763 kg (10,500 lb)
3 175 kg (7,000 lb) 2 767 kg (6,100 lb) 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 4 899 kg (10,800 lb)
4 899 kg (10,800 lb) 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 5 307 kg (11,700 lb)
3 357 kg (7,400 lb) 2 948 kg (6,500 lb) 4 309 kg (9,500 lb)
4 536 kg (10,000 lb)
GCWR (a) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
5 806 kg (12,800 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 7 575 kg (16,700 lb)
7 575 kg (16,700 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb) 8 029 kg (17,700 lb)
5 806 kg (12,800 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb)
328 Driving and Operating
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer
4.10
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box
6.0L V8
3.73
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer
4.10
2500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box
6.0L V8
3.73
6.0L V8 (RPO UB7)
3.73
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer
4.10
2500 Series 2WD Double Cab Long Box
6.0L V8
3.73
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer
4.10
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box
6.0L V8
3.73
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 6 577 kg (14,500 lb)
4 445 kg (9,800 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 6 486 kg (14,300 lb)
4 672 kg (10,300 lb) 4 627 kg (10,200 lb) 6 577 kg (14,500 lb) 6 713 kg (14,800 lb)
4 491 kg (9,900 lb) 6 532 kg (14,400 lb) 6 532 kg (14,400 lb)
4 400 kg (9,700 lb)
GCWR (a) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb)
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer
4.10
2500 Series 4WD Double Cab Standard Box
6.0L V8
3.73
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer
4.10
2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box
6.0L V8
3.73
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer
4.10
2500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box
6.0L V8
3.73
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer
4.10
2500 Series 4WD Double Cab Long Box
6.0L V8
3.73
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
Driving and Operating 329
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
6 486 kg (14,300 lb) 6 441 kg (14,200 lb)
4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 6 441 kg (14,200 lb)
4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 6 577 kg (14,500 lb) 6 577 kg (14,500 lb)
4 354 kg (9,600 lb) 6 396 kg (14,100 lb)
GCWR (a) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
330 Driving and Operating
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer
4.10
2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box
6.0L V8
3.73
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer
4.10
3500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
4.10
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
3.73
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
4.10
3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box
6.0L V8
3.73
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer
4.10
3500 Series 2WD Double Cab Long Box
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
4.10
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
6 396 kg (14,100 lb)
4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 6 305 kg (13,900 lb) 6 305 kg (13,900 lb)
4 581 kg (10,100 lb) 6 577 kg (14,500 lb) 4 445 kg (9,800 lb) 6 486 kg (14,300 lb)
4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 6 441 kg (14,200 lb)
4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 6 441 kg (14,200 lb)
GCWR (a) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
3.73
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
4.10
3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
4.10
Conventional Trailer
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
3.73
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
4.10
3500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
4.10
Conventional Trailer
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
3.73
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
4.10
3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box
6.0L V8
3.73
6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer
4.10
Driving and Operating 331
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
4 218 kg (9,300 lb)
6 260 kg (13,800 lb)
4 354 kg (9,600 lb) 6 396 kg (14,100 lb)
4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 6 214 kg (13,700 lb)
4 445 kg (9,800 lb) 6 486 kg (14,300 lb)
4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 6 305 kg (13,900 lb)
4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)
GCWR (a) 7 530 kg (16,600 lb)
9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
332 Driving and Operating
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle 6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer 3500 Series 4WD Double Cab Long Box 6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box 6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) Conventional Trailer 6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3500 Series Chassis Cab 2WD/4WD 6.0L V8 6.0L V8
Axle Ratio 4.10
3.73 4.10 3.73 4.10
3.73 4.10
3.73 4.10
3.73 4.10
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
6 305 kg (13,900 lb)
4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 6 305 kg (13,900 lb) 4 082 kg (9,000 lb) 6 123 kg (13,500 lb)
4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 6 214 kg (13,700 lb)
3 992 kg (8,800 lb) 6 033 kg (13,300 lb)
(d) (d)
GCWR (a) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb) 7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
7 530 kg (16,600 lb) 9 571 kg (21,100 lb)
14 107 kg (31,100 lb) 14 107 kg (31,100 lb)
Driving and Operating 333
1500/2500/3500 Series Pickups SAE J2807 Compliant
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight (c)
GCWR (a)
(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded. (b) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers. (c) For pickup box delete vehicles, choose an appropriate hitch and load the truck and trailer within the limits of GCWR, GVWR, and RGAWR. (d) Maximum Trailer Weight cannot be provided because total vehicle weight is unknown.
Ask your dealer for trailering information or advice.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is very important because it is also part of the vehicle weight. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle as well as trailer tongue weight. Vehicle options, equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle reduce the amount of tongue weight
the vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow.
Trailer tongue weight (1) should be 10-15% and fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15-25% of the loaded trailer weight (2) up to the maximums for vehicle series and hitch type.
334 Driving and Operating
Vehicle Series
Hitch Type
Maximum Tongue Weight
1500
Weight-Carrying
1500
Weight-Distributing
2500/3500 Standard Box
Weight-Carrying or Weight-Distributing
2500/ 3500 Long Box
Weight-Carrying or Weight-Distributing
2500
Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck
3500 Single Rear Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck Wheels
3500 Dual Rear Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck Wheels
363 kg (800 lb) 567 kg (1,250 lb) 680 kg (1,500 lb)
907 kg (2,000 lb)
1 361 kg (3,000 lb) 1 814 kg (4,000 lb)
2 495 kg (5,500 lb)
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer.
If a cargo carrier is used in the trailer hitch receiver, choose a carrier that positions the load as close to the vehicle as possible. Make sure the total weight, including the carrier, is no more than half of the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle or 227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.
Trailer rating may be limited by the
vehicle's ability to carry tongue
weight. Tongue or kingpin weight
cannot cause the vehicle to exceed
the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). See "Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires" later in this section.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the inflation pressures found on the Certification/Tire label on the center pillar or see Vehicle Load Limits 0 259. Make sure not to exceed the GVWR limit for the vehicle, or the RGAWR, with the tow vehicle and trailer fully loaded for the trip including the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a weight-distributing hitch, make sure not to exceed the RGAWR before applying the weight distribution spring bars.
Weight of the Trailering Combination
It is important that the combination of the tow vehicle and trailer does not exceed any of its weight ratings -- GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Trailer Weight Rating, or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it is
not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the tow vehicle and trailer combination, fully loaded for the trip, getting individual weights for each of these items.
Towing Equipment
Hitches
The correct hitch equipment helps maintain combination control. Many trailers can be towed with a weight-carrying hitch which simply features a coupler latched to the hitch ball, or a tow eye latched to a pintle hook. Other trailers may require a weight-distributing hitch that uses spring bars to distribute the trailer tongue weight among the tow vehicle and trailer axles. Fifth-wheel and gooseneck hitches may also be used. See "Weight of the Trailer Tongue" under Trailer Towing 0 318 for rating limits with various hitch types.
Driving and Operating 335
If a step-bumper hitch will be used, the bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper.
Consider using sway controls with any trailer. Ask a trailering professional about sway controls or refer to the trailer manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
Weight-Distributing Hitch and Adjustment
A weight-distributing hitch may be useful with some trailers. Use the following guidelines to determine if a weight-distributing hitch should be used.
336 Driving and Operating
Vehicle Series 1500
Trailer Weight Up to 3 175 kg (7,000 lb)
Weight-Distributing Hitch Usage
Optional
1500 2500/3500
Over 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) Up to 9 080 kg (20,000 lb)
Required Optional
Hitch Distribution
Refer to trailer manufacturer's recommendation
50%
Refer to trailer manufacturer's recommendation
1. Front of Vehicle 2. Body to Ground Distance
When using a weight-distributing hitch, measure distance (2) before coupling the trailer to the hitch ball. Measure the height again after the trailer is coupled and adjust the spring bars so the distance (2) is as close as possible to halfway between the two measurements.
Fifth-Wheel and Gooseneck Trailering
Fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailers can be used with many pickup models. These trailers place a larger percentage of the weight (kingpin weight) on the tow vehicle
than conventional trailers. Make sure this weight does not cause the vehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.
Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 to 25% of the trailer weight up to the maximum amount specified in the trailering chart for the vehicle. See "Weight of the Trailer" under Trailer Towing 0 318.
The hitch should be located in the pickup bed so that its centerline is over or slightly in front of the rear axle. Take care that it is not so far forward that it will contact the back of the cab in sharp turns. This is especially important for short box
pickups. Trailer pin box extensions and sliding fifth-wheel hitch assemblies can help this condition. There should be at least 15 cm (6 in) of clearance between the top of the pickup box and the bottom of the trailer shelf that extends over the box.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. If the trailer being towed weighs up to 2 271 kg (5,000 lb) with a factory-installed step bumper, safety chains may be attached to the attaching points on the bumper; otherwise, safety chains should be attached to holes on the trailer hitch platform. Always leave just enough slack so the combination can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Driving and Operating 337
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 900 kg (2,000 lb) must be equipped with its own brake system, with brakes working on all axles. Trailer braking equipment conforming to Canadian Standards Association (CSA) requirement CAN3-D313, or its equivalent, is recommended.
State and local regulations may also require the trailer to have its own braking system if loaded above a certain threshold.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted, and maintained properly.
Do not tap into the vehicle's hydraulic brake system.
Auxiliary Battery
The auxiliary battery provision can be used to supply electrical power to additional equipment that may be added, such as a slide-in camper. If equipped, this relay will be on the driver side of the vehicle, next to the underhood electrical center.
Be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with any electrical equipment that is installed.
Caution
Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn off electrical equipment when not in use and do not use equipment that exceeds the maximum amperage rating of 30 amps for the auxiliary battery provision.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The vehicle is equipped with one of the following wiring harnesses for towing a trailer or hauling a slide-in camper.
Basic Trailer Wiring
All regular, double cab, and crew cab pickups have a seven-wire trailer towing harness.
338 Driving and Operating
Use only a round, seven-wire connector with flat blade terminals meeting SAE J2863 specifications for proper electrical connectivity. For vehicles not equipped with heavy-duty trailering, the harness is secured to the vehicle's frame behind the spare tire mount. The harness requires the installation of a trailer connector, which is available through your dealer. Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness Package
For vehicles equipped with heavy-duty trailering, the harness connector is mounted in the bumper.
For vehicles with the fifth wheel/ gooseneck trailer package, the harness connector is mounted on the inside of the pickup bed behind the rear wheel.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer circuits:
. Green/Violet: Right Stop/Turn Signal
. Yellow/Gray: Left Stop/Turn Signal
. Gray/Brown: Taillamps/Parking Lamps
. White: Ground
. White/Green: Back-up Lamps
. Red/Green: Battery Feed
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
To help charge a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press the Tow/ Haul Mode button at the end of the shift lever. If the trailer is too light for Tow/Haul Mode, turn on the headlamps to help charge the battery.
Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring Package
For vehicles without the fifth wheel/ gooseneck tralier package, seven-wire camper harness is under the rear bumper, attached to the frame near the rear crossmember. A connector must be added to the wiring harness that connects to the camper.
The harness contains the following camper/trailer circuits:
. Green/Violet: Right Stop/Turn Signal
. Yellow/Gray: Left Stop/Turn Signal
. Gray/Brown: Taillamps/Parking Lamps
. White: Ground
. White/Green: Back-up Lamps
. Red/Green: Battery Feed
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
If the vehicle is equipped with the heavy-duty trailering option, see "Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness Package" earlier in this section.
When the camper-wiring harness is ordered without the heavy-duty trailering package, a seven-wire harness with a seven-pin connector is at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the vehicle's frame.
Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions
These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions are for an electric brake controller.
The harness should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center.
Driving and Operating 339
Tow/Haul Mode
Pressing this button at the end of the shift lever turns on and off the Tow/Haul Mode.
This indicator light on the instrument cluster comes on when the Tow/ Haul Mode is on.
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 282.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the vehicle's Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See "Weight of the Trailer" under Trailer Towing 0 318. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions:
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain.
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop-and-go traffic.
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However, there is no benefit to the
340 Driving and Operating
selection of Tow/Haul when the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/ Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System The vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system for use with electric trailer brakes or most electric over hydraulic trailer brakes.
This symbol is on the Trailer Brake Control Panel on vehicles with an ITBC system. The power output to the trailer brakes is based on the amount of brake pressure being applied by the vehicle's brake
system, and on the type of trailer brakes detected. This available power output to the trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide range of trailering situations.
The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle's brake, antilock brake, and StabiliTrak systems. In trailering conditions that cause the vehicle's antilock brake or StabiliTrak systems to activate, power sent to the trailer's brakes will be automatically adjusted to minimize trailer wheel lock-up. This does not imply that the trailer has StabiliTrak.
If the vehicle's brake, antilock brake, or StabiliTrak systems are not functioning properly, the ITBC system may not be fully functional or may not function at all. Make sure all of these systems are fully operational to ensure full functionality of the ITBC system.
The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle's electrical system. Turning the ignition off will also turn off the ITBC system. The ITBC system is fully functional only when the ignition is in ON/RUN.
{ Warning
Connecting a trailer that has an air brake system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury or damage to the vehicle, trailer, or other property. Use the ITBC system only with electric or electric over hydraulic trailer brakes.
Trailer Brake Control Panel
1. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever
2. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons
The ITBC system has a control panel on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column. See Instrument Panel 0 6. The control panel allows adjustment to the amount of output, referred to as Trailer Gain, available to the trailer brakes and allows manual application of the trailer brakes. The Trailer Brake Control Panel is used along with the Trailer Brake Display
Driving and Operating 341
Page on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to adjust and display power output to the trailer brakes.
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
The ITBC system displays messages in the DIC.
The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting, power output to the trailer brakes, trailer connection, and system operational status.
To display the Trailer Brake Display Page, do any of the following:
. Scroll through the DIC menu pages.
. Press a Trailer Gain button. If the Trailer Brake Display Page is not currently displayed, press a Trailer Gain button to recall the current Trailer Gain setting. Each press and release of the gain buttons will then change the Trailer Gain setting.
. Activate the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever.
TRAILER GAIN: This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected.
To adjust the Trailer Gain, press one of the Trailer Gain Adjustment buttons. Press and hold a gain button to continuously adjust the Trailer Gain. To turn the output to the trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gain setting to 0.0 (zero).
TRAILER OUTPUT: This displays anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output to the trailer brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking present and relative to the Trailer Gain setting. Output is displayed from 0 to 100% for each gain setting.
The Trailer Output will indicate "- - - - - -" on the Trailer Brake Display Page whenever the following occur:
. No trailer is connected.
. A trailer without electric brakes is connected (no DIC message will display).
. A trailer with electric brakes has become disconnected (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message will also display on the DIC).
342 Driving and Operating
. There is a fault present in the wiring to the trailer brakes (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message will also display on the DIC).
. The ITBC system is not working due to a fault (a SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message will also display in the DIC).
Manual Trailer Brake Apply
The Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever is used to apply the trailer's electric brakes independent of the vehicle's brakes. Sliding the lever to the left will apply only the trailer brakes. Use this lever to adjust Trailer Gain to properly adjust the power output to the trailer brakes.
The trailer's and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on when either vehicle brakes or manual trailer brakes are applied.
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering condition and must be adjusted anytime vehicle loading, trailer loading, or road surface conditions change.
{ Warning
Trailer brakes that are over-gained or under-gained may not stop the vehicle and the trailer as intended and can result in a crash. Always follow the instructions to set the Trailer Gain for the proper trailer stopping performance.
Use the following to adjust Trailer Gain for each towing condition:
1. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level road surface representative of the towing condition and free of traffic at about 32 to 40 km/h (20 to 25 mph) and fully apply the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever.
Adjusting Trailer Gain at speeds lower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to 25 mph) may result in an incorrect gain setting.
2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, using the Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons, to just below the point of trailer wheel lock-up, indicated by trailer wheel squeal or tire smoke when a trailer wheel locks.
Trailer wheel lock-up may not occur if towing a heavily loaded trailer. In this case, adjust the Trailer Gain to the highest allowable setting for the towing condition.
3. Readjust Trailer Gain anytime vehicle loading, trailer loading, or road surface conditions change or if trailer wheel lock-up is noticed at any time while towing.
Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages
In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT through the DIC, trailer connection and ITBC system status are displayed on the DIC.
TRAILER CONNECTED: This message will briefly display when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle. This message will automatically turn off in about 10 seconds. This message can be acknowledged before it automatically turns off.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING: This message will display if:
. The ITBC system first determines connection to a trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stationary, this message will automatically turn off in about 30 seconds. This message will also turn off if it is acknowledged or if the trailer harness is reconnected.
Driving and Operating 343
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving, this message will continue until the ignition is turned off. This message will also turn off if it is acknowledged or if the trailer harness is reconnected.
. There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the trailer brakes. This message will continue as long as there is an electrical fault in the trailer wiring. This message will also turn off if it is acknowledged.
To determine if the electrical fault is on the vehicle side or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection:
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition off.
3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back to RUN.
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message reappears, the electrical fault is on the vehicle side.
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only reappears when connecting the trailer wiring harness to the vehicle, the electrical fault is on the trailer side.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM: This message will display when there is a problem with the ITBC system. If this message continues over multiple ignition cycles, there is a problem with the ITBC system. Have the vehicle serviced.
If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message displays while driving, the ITBC system may not be fully functional or may not function at all. When traffic conditions allow, carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on. If either of these messages continues, either the vehicle or trailer needs service.
344 Driving and Operating
A GM dealer may be able to diagnose and repair problems with the trailer. However, any diagnosis and repair of the trailer is not covered under the vehicle warranty. Contact your trailer dealer for assistance with trailer repairs and trailer warranty information.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway Control (TSC) feature. Trailer sway is unintended side-to-side motion of a trailer while being towed. If the vehicle is towing a trailer and the TSC detects that sway is increasing, the vehicle brakes are selectively applied at each wheel, to help reduce excessive trailer sway. If the vehicle is equipped with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, and the trailer has the electric actuated brake system, StabiliTrak may also apply the trailer brakes.
If TSC is enabled, the Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak warning light will flash on the instrument cluster. Vehicle speed must be reduced. If trailer sway continues, StabiliTrak can reduce engine torque to help slow the vehicle. See Traction Control/ Electronic Stability Control 0 295.
{ Warning
Even if the vehicle is equipped with TSC, trailer sway could result in loss of control and the vehicle could crash. If excessive trailer sway is detected, slow down to a safe speed. Check the trailer and vehicle to help correct possible causes. These could include an improperly or overloaded trailer, unrestrained cargo, improper
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
trailer hitch configuration, excessive vehicle-trailer speed, or improperly inflated or incorrect vehicle or trailer tires. See Towing Equipment 0 335 for trailer ratings and hitch setup recommendations.
Adding non-dealer accessories can affect the vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications 0 352.
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical Equipment
{ Warning
The Data Link Connector (DLC) is used for vehicle service and Emission Inspection/Maintenance testing. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) 0 138. A device connected to the DLC -- such as an aftermarket fleet or driver-behavior tracking device -- may interfere with vehicle systems. This could affect vehicle operation and cause a crash. Such devices may also access information stored in the vehicle's systems.
Driving and Operating 345
Caution
Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle or cause components to not work and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment
Caution
Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) with a snow plow mounted to the vehicle. The vehicle could overheat and be damaged.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 86 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 87.
For information on wiring auxiliary switches, see www.gmupfitter.com or contact your dealer.
Before installing a snow plow on the vehicle, follow these guidelines:
Caution
If the vehicle does not have the snow plow prep package, RPO VYU, adding a plow can damage the vehicle, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Unless the vehicle was built to carry a snow plow, do not add one to the vehicle. If the vehicle has RPO VYU, then the payload the vehicle can carry will be reduced when a snow plow is installed. The vehicle can be
(Continued)
346 Driving and Operating
Caution (Continued)
damaged if either the front or rear axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) are exceeded.
The plow the vehicle can carry depends on many things, such as:
. The options the vehicle came with, and the weight of those options.
. The weight and number of passengers to be carried.
. The weight of items added to the vehicle, like a tool box or truck cap.
. The total weight of any additional cargo to be carried.
For example, if the snow plow weighs 318 kg (700 lb), the total weight of all occupants and cargo inside the cab should not exceed 135 kg (300 lb). This means that you may only be able to carry one passenger. Even this may be too
much if there is other equipment already adding to the weight of the vehicle.
To safely carry a snow plow on the vehicle:
. Follow all aftermarket snow plow manufacturer's instructions for the operation and transportation of the snow plow.
. With a snow plow attached, the engine coolant temperature gauge may show a higher temperature than while driving without one. The snow plow could block the airflow to the radiator. This could be more noticeable as vehicle speed increases. At speeds above 72 km (45 mph), this may cause the engine coolant to overheat.
. To increase the airflow, move the snow plow blade postion.
. If driving more than 24 km (15 mi), angle the plow blade position.
. Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles does not exceed the axle rating for each.
. For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers must be carried, appropriate counter ballast must be installed rear of the rear axle. Counter ballast must be properly secured so it will not move during driving.
. Rear ballast may be required to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio, even though the actual weight at the front axle may be less than the front axle rating.
. The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assist in determining the amount of rear ballast required, to help make sure the snow plow/vehicle combination does not exceed the GVW rating, the front and rear axle ratings, and the front and rear weight distribution ratio.
. The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating.
Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and the front axle weight of the vehicle with full fuel and passengers. This is the amount of weight that can be added to the front axle before reaching the front GAWR.
Driving and Operating 347
To calculate the amount of weight any front accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front axle, use this formula:
United States
Canada
The front axle reserve capacity for the vehicle is in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire label.
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding to the front axle.
Where: W = Weight of added accessory A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the front axle W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
348 Driving and Operating
For example, adding a 318 kg (700 lb) snow plow actually adds more than 318 kg (700 lb) to the front axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front of the front axle and the wheelbase is 305 cm (10 ft), then:
W = 318 kg (700 lb) A = 122 cm (4 ft) W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft)
(W x (A + W.B.)/W.B. = (318 x (122 + 305))/305 = 445 kg (980 lb)
This means if the front axle reserve capacity is more than 445 kg (980 lb), the snow plow could be added without exceeding the front GAWR.
Heavier equipment can be added on the front of the vehicle if less cargo or fewer passengers are carried, or by positioning cargo toward the rear. This reduces the load on the front. However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR, and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must never be exceeded.
{ Warning
On some vehicles that have certain front mounted equipment, such as a snow plow, it may be possible to load the front axle to the front Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) but not have enough weight on the rear axle to have proper braking performance. If the brakes cannot work properly, the vehice could crash. Always follow the snow plow manufacturer or installer's recommendation for rear ballast to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio. Maintaining a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio is necessary to provide proper braking performance.
Total vehicle reserve capacity is the difference between the GVWR and the weight of the truck with full fuel and passengers. It is the amount of weight that can be added to the vehicle before reaching the GVWR. Reserve capacity numbers are
intended as a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or cargo the truck can carry. If unsure of the vehicle's front, rear, or total weight, go to a weigh station and weigh the vehicle. Your dealer can also help with this.
The total vehicle reserve capacity for the vehicle is in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire label as shown previously.
See your dealer for additional advice and information about using a snow plow on the vehicle. Also, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package also have an emergency roof lamp provision package, RPO TRW. Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is provided above the overhead console. See Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp 0 176 for switch location.
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
We are aware that some vehicle owners might consider having the pickup box removed and a commercial or recreational body installed. Owners should be aware that, as manufactured, there are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which could affect vehicle safety. The components necessary to adapt a pickup to permit its safe use with a specialized body should be installed by the body builder.
Driving and Operating 349
350 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Care
General Information General Information . . . . . . . . . . 351 California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . 352 Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Vehicle Checks Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 362 Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) . . . . . 363 Automatic Transmission Fluid (8-Speed Transmission) . . . . . 366 Manual Transmission Fluid . . . 366 Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 367 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 372
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Power Steering Fluid (1500
Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Power Steering Fluid (2500/
3500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Battery - North America . . . . . . 378 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 382 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 383 Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 384 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 384 Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 385
Headlamp Aiming Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Bulb Replacement Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Electrical System High Voltage Devices and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Electrical System Overload . . . 389 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Wheels and Tires Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 399 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 418 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 431
Jump Starting Jump Starting - North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Towing the Vehicle Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Appearance Care Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Vehicle Care 351
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Most motor vehicles, including this one, as well as many of its service parts and fluids, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
352 Vehicle Care
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals.
See Battery - North America 0 378 and Jump Starting - North America 0 432.
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, safety belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be necessary. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.
Accessories and Modifications
Adding non-dealer accessories or making modifications to the vehicle can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. These accessories or modifications could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to suspension components caused by modifying vehicle height outside of factory settings will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components resulting from modifications or the installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including control module or software modifications, is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. See your dealer to accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories installed by a dealer technician.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 87.
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ Warning
It can be dangerous to work on your vehicle if you do not have the proper knowledge, service manual, tools, or parts. Always follow owner manual procedures and consult the service manual for your vehicle before doing any service work.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information 0 481.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 86.
Vehicle Care 353
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See Maintenance Records 0 466.
Caution Even small amounts of contamination can cause damage to vehicle systems. Do not allow contaminants to contact the fluids, reservoir caps, or dipsticks.
Hood
To open the hood:
1. Pull the handle with this symbol on it. It is inside the vehicle under the steering wheel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle to find the secondary hood release. The handle is under the front edge of the hood near the center. Push the handle to the right and at the same time raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then bring the hood from full open to within 15 cm (6 in) from the closed position, pause, and push the front center of the hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close the hood.
354 Vehicle Care Engine Compartment Overview
4.3L V6 Engine
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting - North America 0 432.
2. Battery - North America 0 378.
3. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System 0 368.
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 367.
5. Automatic Transmission Dipstick (If Equipped). See "How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid" under Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) 0 363 or Automatic Transmission Fluid (8-Speed Transmission) 0 366.
6. Remote Negative () Location. See Jump Starting - North America 0 432.
7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View). See Cooling System 0 368.
8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See "When to Add Engine Oil" under Engine Oil 0 359.
9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See "Checking Engine Oil" under Engine Oil 0 359.
10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brake Fluid 0 377.
Vehicle Care 355
11. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See "Adding Washer Fluid" under Washer Fluid 0 375.
12. Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped). See Hydraulic Clutch 0 366.
13. Engine Compartment Fuse Block 0 390.
356 Vehicle Care
5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 6.2L V8 Engine Similar
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting - North America 0 432.
2. Battery - North America 0 378.
3. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System 0 368.
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 367.
5. Automatic Transmission Dipstick (If Equipped). See "How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid" under Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) 0 363 or Automatic Transmission Fluid (8-Speed Transmission) 0 366.
6. Remote Negative () Location (Out of View). See Jump Starting - North America 0 432.
7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View). See Cooling System 0 368.
8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See "When to Add Engine Oil" under Engine Oil 0 359.
9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See "Checking Engine Oil" under Engine Oil 0 359.
Vehicle Care 357
10. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See "Adding Washer Fluid" under Washer Fluid 0 375.
11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brake Fluid 0 377.
12. Engine Compartment Fuse Block 0 390.
358 Vehicle Care
6.0L V8 Engine
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting - North America 0 432.
2. Battery - North America 0 378.
3. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System 0 368.
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 367.
5. Automatic Transmission Dipstick (If Equipped). See "How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid" under Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) 0 363 or Automatic Transmission Fluid (8-Speed Transmission) 0 366.
6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See "Checking Engine Oil" under Engine Oil 0 359.
7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See "When to Add Engine Oil" under Engine Oil 0 359.
8. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See Cooling System 0 368.
9. Remote Negative () Location. See Jump Starting - North America 0 432.
10. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid (1500 Series) 0 375 or Power Steering Fluid (2500/ 3500 Series) 0 375.
11. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See "Adding Washer Fluid" under Washer Fluid 0 375.
12. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brake Fluid 0 377.
13. Auxiliary Battery (If Equipped). See Battery - North America 0 378.
14. Engine Compartment Fuse Block 0 390.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or an Allison Transmission, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
For an eAssist vehicle, see the Silverado/Sierra eAssist supplement.
Vehicle Care 359
Engine Oil
For diesel engine vehicles, see "Engine Oil" in the Duramax diesel supplement.
To ensure proper engine performance and long life, careful attention must be paid to engine oil. Following these simple, but important steps will help protect your investment:
. Use engine oil approved to the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade. See "Selecting the Right Engine Oil" in this section.
. Check the engine oil level regularly and maintain the proper oil level. See "Checking Engine Oil" and "When to Add Engine Oil" in this section.
. Change the engine oil at the appropriate time. See Engine Oil Life System 0 362.
. Always dispose of engine oil properly. See "What to Do with Used Oil" in this section.
360 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil
Check the engine oil level regularly (every 650 km (400 mi), especially prior to a long trip. The engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354 for the location.
{ Warning
The engine oil dipstick handle may be hot; it could burn you. Use a towel or glove to touch the dipstick handle.
If a low oil Driver Information Center (DIC) message displays, check the oil level.
Follow these guidelines:
. To get an accurate reading, park the vehicle on level ground. Check the engine oil level after the engine has been off for at least two hours. Checking the engine oil level on steep grades or too soon after engine shutoff can result in incorrect readings. Accuracy improves when
checking a cold engine prior to starting. Remove the dipstick and check the level. . If unable to wait two hours, the engine must be off for at least 15 minutes if the engine is warm, or at least 30 minutes if the engine is not warm. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it with a clean paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick and the engine has been off for at least 15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil and then recheck the level. See "Selecting the Right Engine Oil" later in this section for an explanation of what kind of oil to
use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications 0 468.
Caution
Do not add too much oil. Oil levels above or below the acceptable operating range shown on the dipstick are harmful to the engine. If you find that you have an oil level above the operating range, i.e., the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged. You should drain out the excess oil or limit driving of the vehicle and seek a service professional to remove the excess amount of oil.
See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354 for the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through.
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462.
Specification
Ask for and use engine oils that meet the dexos1TM specification. Engine oils that have been approved by GM as meeting the dexos1 specification are marked with the dexos1 approved logo. See www.gmdexos.com.
Caution
Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Viscosity Grade
Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity grade for the 5.3L and 6.2L V8 engines. Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade for the 4.3L V6, and 6.0L V8 engines.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below 29 °C (20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be used in the 4.3L or 6.0L engine. An oil of this viscosity grade will provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, it is recommended to select an oil of the correct specification. See "Specification" earlier in this section.
Vehicle Care 361
Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils meeting the dexos1 specification are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the
362 Vehicle Care
trash or pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on a combination of factors which include engine revolutions, engine temperature, and miles driven. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed.
On some vehicles, when the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on to indicate that an oil change is necessary. See Engine Oil Messages 0 152. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and, at this time, the system must be reset. For vehicles without the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message, an oil change is needed when the OIL LIFE REMAINING percentage is near 0%. Your dealer has trained service people who will perform this work and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System
Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. Always reset the
engine oil life to 100% after every oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset the engine oil life system:
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147.
2. Press and hold V, or the trip
odometer reset stem if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, for several seconds. The oil life will change to 100%.
The oil life system can also be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds.
3. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If the display shows 100%, the system is reset.
If the vehicle has a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message and it comes back on when the vehicle is started and/or the OIL LIFE REMAINING is near 0%, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission)
When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheated transmission. If a small leak is suspected, then use the following checking procedures to check the fluid level. However, if there is a large leak, then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a
dealer service department and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further.
Caution
Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damage may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462.
Change the fluid and filter at the scheduled maintenance intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule 0 452. Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462.
Vehicle Care 363
How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid
Caution
Too much or too little fluid can damage the transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if checking the transmission fluid.
Before checking the fluid level, prepare the vehicle:
1. Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level surface. Keep the engine running.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about
364 Vehicle Care
three seconds in each range. Then, move the shift lever back to P (Park).
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 800 rpm) for at least one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal.
5. Keep the engine running and check the transmission fluid temperature on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147.
6. Using the transmission fluid temperature reading, determine and perform the appropriate check procedure. If the transmission fluid temperature reading is not within the required temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until the appropriate transmission fluid temperature is reached.
Cold Check Procedure Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until a hot check procedure can be made. The hot check procedure is the most accurate method to check the fluid level. Perform the hot check procedure at the first opportunity. Use this cold check procedure to check fluid level when the transmission temperature is between 27 °C and 32 °C (80 °F and 90 °F).
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354.
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way; wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading.
5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band, add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level into the COLD band. It does not take much fluid, generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Do not overfill.
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after the transmission reaches a normal operating temperature between 71 °C to 93 °C (160 °F to 200 °F).
7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level when the transmission fluid temperature is between 71 °C and 93 °C (160 °F and 200 °F).
The hot check is the most accurate method to check the fluid level. The hot check should be performed at the first opportunity in order to verify the cold check. The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is important to ensure the transmission temperature is within range.
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354.
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way; wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading.
Vehicle Care 365
5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within the HOT band, and the transmission temperature is between 71 °C and 93 °C (160 °F and 200 °F), add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the HOT band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It does not take much fluid, generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Do not overfill.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
366 Vehicle Care
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If readings are still inconsistent, contact the dealer.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (8-Speed Transmission)
When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheated transmission. This vehicle is not equipped with a transmission fluid level dipstick. There is a special procedure for checking and changing the transmission fluid in these vehicles. Because this procedure is difficult, this should be
done at the dealer. Contact the dealer for additional information or the procedure can be found in the service manual. See Service Publications Ordering Information 0 481.
Caution
Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damage may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462.
Change the fluid and filter at the scheduled maintenance intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule 0 452. Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462.
Manual Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer service department and have it repaired as soon as possible. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462 for the proper fluid to use.
Hydraulic Clutch
For vehicles with a manual transmission, it is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid will not correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
When to Check and What to Use
The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as indicated on the reservoir cap. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354 for reservoir location.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Visually check the clutch fluid reservoir to make sure the fluid level is at the MIN (minimum) line on the side of the reservoir. The hydraulic clutch fluid system should be closed and sealed.
Do not remove the cap to check the fluid level or to top-off the fluid level. Remove the cap only when necessary to add the proper fluid until the level reaches the MIN line.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see "8-Cylinder Pickup Models" under "Engine Air Cleaner/Filter" in the Duramax diesel supplement for the correct inspection and replacement procedures.
The engine air cleaner/filter is on the passenger side of the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354.
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
For intervals on changing and inspecting the engine air filter, see Maintenance Schedule 0 452.
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Do not start the engine or have the engine running with the engine air cleaner/filter housing open. Before removing the engine air cleaner/ filter, make sure that the engine air cleaner/filter housing and nearby components are free of dirt and debris. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter. Lightly tap and shake the engine air cleaner/filter (away from the vehicle), to release loose dust and dirt. Inspect the engine air cleaner/filter for damage, and replace if damaged. Do not clean the engine air cleaner/filter or components with water or compressed air.
Vehicle Care 367
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter:
1. Screws 2. Electrical Connectors 3. Air Duct Clamp 1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354. 2. Disconnect the outlet duct by loosening the air duct clamp (3). 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors (2) and the connector harness from the cover.
368 Vehicle Care
4. Remove the four screws (1) on top of the cover of the housing and lift up the cover.
5. Remove the engine air cleaner/ filter from the housing. Take care to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
6. Clean the engine air cleaner/ filter sealing surfaces and the housing.
7. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
8. Reverse Steps 24 to reinstall the filter cover housing.
{ Warning
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when working on the engine and do not drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Caution
If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
Cooling System
If the vehicle has the Duramax diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.
5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 4.3L V6 Engine and 6.2L V8 Engine
Similar
1. Coolant Surge Tank 2. Coolant Surge Tank
Pressure Cap 3. Engine Electric Cooling
Fans (Out of View)
{ Warning
An electric engine cooling fan can start even when the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any engine cooling fan.
6.0L V8 Engine 1. Coolant Surge Tank 2. Coolant Surge Tank
Pressure Cap 3. Engine Belt-Driven Cooling
Fan (Out of View)
{ Warning
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Caution
Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could require changing sooner. Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 369
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating 0 372.
What to Use
{ Warning
Adding only plain water or some other liquid to the cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water and other liquids, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. The coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but you would not get the
(Continued)
370 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued)
overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture: . Gives freezing protection down
to 37 °C (34 °F), outside temperature. . Gives boiling protection up to 129 °C (265 °F), engine temperature. . Protects against rust and corrosion. . Will not damage aluminum parts. . Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Caution
If improper coolant mixture, inhibitors, or additives are used in the vehicle cooling system, the engine could overheat and be damaged. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack engine cooling parts. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use only the proper mixture of engine coolant for the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462.
Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, or by pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regarding used coolant disposal. This will help protect the environment and your health.
Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354. The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level.
5.3L V8 Shown, 4.3L V6, 6.0L V8, and 6.2L V8 Similar
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, wait until it cools down. The coolant level should be at or above
the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, there may be a leak in the cooling system.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark, see "How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank for Gasoline Engines," following.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank for Gasoline Engines
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see "Cooling System" in the Duramax diesel supplement for the proper coolant fill procedure.
{ Warning
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Caution
This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged.
{ Warning
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant.
Vehicle Care 371
Light-Duty Coolant Surge
Tank Pressure Cap
Heavy-Duty Coolant Surge
Tank Pressure Cap
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark.
372 Vehicle Care
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates approximately 90 °C (195 °F).
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.
6. Verify coolant level after the engine is shut off and the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 16.
Caution
If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
If the vehicle has the Duramax diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
Caution
Running the engine without coolant may cause damage or a fire. Vehicle damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating.
There is a coolant temperature gauge in the vehicle's instrument cluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 0 133.
In addition, there are ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE, ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED messages in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Engine Cooling System Messages 0 152 and Engine Power Messages 0 153.
If the decision is made not to lift the hood when this warning appears, get service help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program 0 476.
If the decision is made to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface.
4.3L V6, 5.3L V8, and 6.2L V8 Engines
Check to see if the engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, the fans should be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
If Steam is Coming from the Engine Compartment
{ Warning
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
If No Steam is Coming from the Engine Compartment
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious problem.
Vehicle Care 373
If there is an engine overheat warning, but no steam is seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle:
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
. Stops after high-speed driving.
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing 0 318.
If the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message appears with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as necessary.
3. When it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the vehicle in front. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally and have the cooling system checked for proper fill and function.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam and the vehicle is equipped with an engine driven cooling fan, push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least five minutes while the vehicle is parked. If the warning is still there, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for five minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
374 Vehicle Care
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message displays, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps to prevent engine damage. In this mode, a loss in power and engine performance will be noticed. This operating mode allows the vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving extended distances and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Caution
After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, the engine oil will be severely degraded. Any repairs performed before the engine is cool may cause engine damage. Allow the engine to cool before
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
attempting any repair. Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil, and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil 0 359.
Engine Fan
If the vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan, when the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages, so an increase in fan noise may be heard. This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages.
This fan noise may also be heard when starting the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages.
If the vehicle has electric cooling fan(s), the fans may be heard spinning at low speed during most everyday driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling is required. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, high outside temperatures, or operation of the air conditioning system, the fans may change to high speed and an increase in fan noise may be heard. This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly. The fans will change to low speed when additional cooling is no longer required.
The electric engine cooling fans may run after the engine has been turned. off. This is normal and no service is required.
Power Steering Fluid (1500 Series)
The vehicle has electric power steering and does not use power steering fluid.
Power Steering Fluid (2500/3500 Series)
See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354 for reservoir location. When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless there is a leak suspected in the system or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
Wait for the power steering system to cool, with the engine off, before checking the fluid.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the hashed area between the ADD and FULL marks.
Vehicle Care 375
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462. Always use the proper fluid.
Caution
Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462.
Washer Fluid
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing.
376 Vehicle Care
Adding Washer Fluid The vehicle has a low washer fluid message on the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message displays, washer fluid will need to be added to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354 for reservoir location.
Caution
. Do not use washer fluid that contains any type of water repellent coating. This can cause the wiper blades to chatter or skip.
. Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint.
. Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system.
. When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer instructions for adding water.
. Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.
Brakes
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
{ Warning
The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to a crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Caution
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications 0 468.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service may be required.
Replacing Brake System Parts Always replace brake system parts with new, approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes may not work properly. The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed or parts are improperly installed.
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354 for the location of the reservoir. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir may go down:
Vehicle Care 377
. Normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up.
. A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed. With a leak, the brakes will not work well.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{ Warning
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged.
(Continued)
378 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued)
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning Light 0 140.
Brake fluid absorbs water over time. Replace brake fluid at the specified intervals to prevent increased stopping distance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 452.
Checking Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354.
The fluid level should be above MIN. If it is not, have the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above MIN but not over the MAX mark.
What to Add
Use only GM approved DOT 3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462.
{ Warning
The wrong or contaminated brake fluid could result in damage to the brake system. This could result in the loss of braking leading to a possible injury. Always use the proper GM approved brake fluid.
Caution
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Immediately wash off any painted surface.
Battery - North America
The original equipment battery is maintenance free. Do not remove the cap and do not add fluid. Refer to the replacement number shown on the original battery label when a new battery is needed. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 354 for battery location.
{ Warning
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.
See California Proposition 65 Warning 0 351.
Vehicle Storage
{ Warning
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting North America 0 432 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative () cable from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative () cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
Four-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to Maintenance Schedule 0 452 to determine when to check the lubricant.
Vehicle Care 379
1. Fill Plug 2. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug (1) hole, located on the transfer case, some lubricant will need to be added. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to Maintenance Schedule 0 452 to determine how often to change the lubricant.
What to Use
Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462 to determine what kind of lubricant to use.
380 Vehicle Care Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless a leak is suspected, or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface.
1500 Series
1. Fill Plug 2. Drain Plug
All Except 1500 Series 1. Fill Plug 2. Drain Plug . When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm (1/8 in) below the fill plug (1) hole. . When the differential is at operating temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug (1) hole.
What to Use
Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462 to determine what kind of lubricant to use.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless a leak is suspected or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during production. They are not filled to reach a certain level. When checking the fluid level on any axle, variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill differences between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume. Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained back to the sump area. Therefore, a reading taken
five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an hour or two. The rear axle assembly must be supported on a flat, level surface to get a true reading. How to Check Lubricant
2500HD with 6.0L
All Other Series and Engines
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface.
. For all 4.3L and 5.3L 1500 Series applications, the proper level is 1.0 mm to 19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in) below the bottom of the fill hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
. For 6.2L 1500 Series applications, the proper level is from 15 mm to 40 mm (0.6 in to 1.6 in) below the bottom of the
Vehicle Care 381
fill plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
. For all 6.0L 2500HD Series applications, the proper level is from 0 mm to 13 mm (0 to 0.5 in) below the bottom of the fill plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
. For all 6.6L Duramax Diesel 2500HD Series applications and all 3500 Series applications, the proper level is from 17 mm to 21 mm (0.6 in to 0.8 in) below the bottom of the fill plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
What to Use
Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462 to determine what kind of lubricant to use.
382 Vehicle Care
Noise Control System
Noise Emission Warranty
General Motors warrants to the first person who purchases this vehicle for purposes other than resale and to each subsequent purchaser that this vehicle as manufactured by General Motors was designed, built and equipped to conform at the time it left General Motors control with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regulations. This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and equipped by General Motors and is not limited to any particular part, component or system of the vehicle manufactured by General Motors. Defects in design, assembly or any part, component or system of the vehicle manufactured by General Motors, which at the time it left General Motors control caused noise emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by the warranty for the life of the vehicle.
The following information relates to compliance with federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg (10,000 lb). The noise control system warranty is given in your warranty manual.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof:
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control, prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below.
Insulation:
Removal of the noise shields or any underhood insulation.
Engine:
Removal or rendering engine speed governor, if the vehicle has one, inoperative so as to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications.
Fan and Drive:
. Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one, or rendering clutch inoperative.
. Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle has one.
Air Intake:
. Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
. Modification of the air cleaner.
Exhaust:
. Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
. Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps.
Starter Switch Check
{ Warning
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle.
2. Apply both the parking brake and the regular brake.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer for service.
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway, and try to start the engine. The vehicle should start only when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the way to the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is not pushed all the way down, contact your dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check
{ Warning
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
Vehicle Care 383
2. Apply the parking brake. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition on, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
. For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever is in P (Park).
. For manual transmission vehicles, the ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when you press the key release button.
384 Vehicle Care
On all vehicles, the ignition key should come out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check
{ Warning
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. . To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
. To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking.
Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper windshield wiper blade length and type, see Maintenance Replacement Parts 0 464.
Caution
Allowing the wiper arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not allow the wiper arm to touch the windshield.
To replace the windshield wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the windshield.
2. Press the button (2) in the middle of the wiper arm connector, and pull the wiper blade away from the arm connector (1).
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Reverse Steps 13 for wiper blade replacement.
Glass Replacement
If the windshield or front side glass must be replaced, see your dealer to determine the correct replacement glass.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset and should need no further adjustment.
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected. If adjustment to the headlamps is necessary, see your dealer.
Vehicle Care 385
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, contact your dealer. For any bulb-changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ Warning
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.
386 Vehicle Care
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting
{ Warning
The High Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service any of the system components, you could be seriously injured. Have your dealer or a qualified technician service them.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
After an HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, the beam might be a slightly different shade than it was originally. This is normal.
LED Lighting
This vehicle has several LED lamps. For replacement of any LED lighting assembly, contact your dealer.
Driver Side Shown Passenger Side Similar
1. Low/High-Beam Headlamp 2. Turn Signal
Headlamp See your dealer for headlamp replacement.
Turn Signal 1. Open the hood.
2. If replacing a bulb on the passenger side, remove the engine air cleaner.
3. 2500/3500 Series vehicles only, driver side: 3.1. Remove the auxiliary battery retainer bolt (2) and battery retainer (1). 3.2. Reposition the auxiliary battery (3) so that the front turn signal access port is visible.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly and pull it straight out.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of the bulb socket.
6. Install new bulb into bulb socket.
7. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to install it in the headlamp assembly.
8. 2500/3500 Series vehicles only, driver side:
8.1. Reposition the auxiliary battery (3).
8.2. Install the auxiliary battery retainer (1) and battery retainer bolt (3).
9. If replacing a bulb on the passenger side, reinstall the engine air cleaner.
10. Close the hood.
Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lamp bulb:
1. Locate the fog lamp under the front bumper.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fog lamp bulb assembly by pressing the connector release.
3. Remove the bulb from the housing by squeezing the two release tabs and pulling it straight out of the assembly.
Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models)
1. Back-Up Lamp 2. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
Signal Lamp
Vehicle Care 387
To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Remove the four screws. 2. Lift the lens off the lamp
assembly. 3. Turn the old bulb
counterclockwise and pull it straight out from the socket.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps
1. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
2. Back-Up Lamp
388 Vehicle Care
To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws.
3. Pull the rear lamp assembly outboard away from the box side until the retainers release. There will be a noise when the retainers release.
4. Pull the rear lamp assembly straight back to remove it from the vehicle.
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb, then insert the bulb socket into the rear lamp assembly and turn clockwise.
8. Verify the retainer ring is in the proper position. If the retainer ring is out of position, it will not engage. Reset the retainer by pulling it forward with a tool.
9. Push the rear lamp assembly straight in until it is seated against the vehicle.
10. Make sure the rear lamp assembly is flush with the box side.
11. Reinstall the two rear lamp assembly screws.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp
1. Cargo Lamp Bulbs 2. Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) Bulb To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Remove the two screws and lift off the lamp assembly.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it straight out.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
Replacement Bulbs
For replacement bulbs, contact your dealer.
Vehicle Care 389
Electrical System
High Voltage Devices and Wiring
For an eAssist vehicle, see the Silverado/Sierra eAssist supplement.
Electrical System Overload
The vehicle has fuses to protect against an electrical system overload. Fuses also protect power devices in the vehicle.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
If there is a problem on the road and a fuse needs to be replaced, there are some spare fuses and a fuse puller in the Instrument Panel Fuse Block. The same amperage fuse can also be borrowed. Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not needed to use and replace it as soon as possible.
390 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. Have the headlamp wiring checked right away if the lamps go on and off or remain off.
Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the windshield wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an electrical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by fuses. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out. Replace the fuse as soon as you can.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
The engine compartment fuse block is in the engine compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle.
Lift the cover to access the fuse block.
Caution
Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.
A fuse puller is available in the left instrument panel fuse block. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.
Fuses 1 2
Usage Trailer brake Trailer battery
Fuses 3
Usage ABS pump
Vehicle Care 391
Fuses 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12 13 14
15
16
17
18
Usage
Instrument panel BEC 1
MSB passenger
4WD transfer case electronic control
Electric park brake
Instrument panel BEC 2
MSB driver
Rear window defogger
Starter
Cooling fan 1
Cooling fan 2
Left trailer stop/ Turn lamps
Trailer parking lamps
Trailer reverse lamps
Right trailer stop/ Turn lamps
Fuel pump
392 Vehicle Care
Fuses 19
20
21
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
29 30 31 32 33 34
Usage
Integrated chassis control module
Electronic suspension control module
Fuel pump power module
Upfitter 1 Upfitter 2
Front wiper
ABS Valves
Upfitter 2 Upfitter 3
Right parking lamps Left parking lamps
Upfitter 3
Upfitter 4
Upfitter 4 Reverse lamps
Engine control module/Ignition
Fuses 35 36 37 38
39
40
41 42 43 44
45
46 47 48 49 50
Usage
A/C clutch
Heated mirrors
Upfitter 1
Center high-mounted stoplamp
Miscellaneous/ Ignition
Transmission/ Ignition
Fuel pump 2
Cooling fan clutch
Engine
Fuel injectors A odd Fuel injectors B even O2 Sensor B
Throttle control
Horn
Fog lamps
O2 Sensor A
Fuses 51 52 53 54 55
56 57
58 74
76
Usage
Engine control module
Interior heater
Accessory power module/TPM pump
Front washer
A/C/Battery regulated voltage control
A/C module/ Battery pack
Transmission control module/ Engine control module
Headlamps
Electric running boards (if equipped)
Fuel pump prime
Relays 59 60 61 62 63
64 65 66 67 68 69
70
71 72 73 75
Usage Fuel pump Upfitter 2 Upfitter 3 Upfitter 4 Trailer parking lamps Run/Crank Upfitter 1 Fuel pump 2 A/C control Starter Rear window defogger Engine control module Cooling fan clutch CKT 95 CKT 92 Fuel pump prime
Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Right)
The right instrument panel fuse block access door is on the passenger side edge of the instrument panel. Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
Vehicle Care 393
394 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.
Fuses 1
Usage
Accessory power outlet 3
Fuses 2
7 8 9
10 15
18 19 20 23 26
27
28 32 35 36 37
Usage Accessory power outlet 4 Body control module 4 Body control module 8 Rear seat entertainment Cargo lamp Steering wheel controls Radio Sunroof Airbag/Info Export/Power take off/ SEO battery 1 Obstacle detection/ USB ports Body control module 2 SEO battery 2 AC inverter Amplifier
Fuses 39 42
43 44 45 46 47 50
51
52
Usage
Rear sliding window
Right door window motor
Front blower
SEO
Body control module 6
Body control module 7
Passenger seat
Retained accessory power
Rear sliding window open
Rear sliding window close
Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Left)
The left instrument panel fuse block access door is on the driver side edge of the instrument panel. Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
Vehicle Care 395
396 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.
Fuses 1
Usage
Accessory power outlet 2
Fuses 2 3
6 7 8 9 10
11 12
13 14 17 19
Usage
SEO/Retained accessory power
Universal remote system/Interior rearview mirror
Body control module 3
Body control module 5
Driver window switch/ Mirror switch
Accessory power outlet/Retained accessory power
Accessory power outlet battery
Accessory power outlet 1/Cigarette lighter
Discrete logic ignition switch
Switch backlighting
Body control module 1
Fuses 20 22
23
24 25
26
27 28 29
30 31 32 33 34 36
Usage
HVAC/Auxiliary HVAC/Ignition
Instrument cluster/ Ignition sensing diagnostic module/ Ignition
Data link connector/ Driver seat module
Passive entry/Passive start/HVAC
Park enable/ Electrically adjustable pedals
SEO
Accessory/Run/Crank
Heated steering wheel
Instrument cluster
Fuses 37 38 40 41 43
44
45 49
50
Usage
4WD TREC
Left doors
Driver power seat
Left heated, cooled or ventilated seats (if equipped)
Right heated, cooled or ventilated seats (if equipped)
Retained accessory power
Run/Crank
Vehicle Care 397
Wheels and Tires
Tires
Every new GM vehicle has high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. See the warranty manual for information regarding the tire warranty and where to get service. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer.
{ Warning
. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.
. Overloading the tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. There could be a blowout and a serious crash. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259. (Continued)
398 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued)
. Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting crash could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold.
. Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact -- such as when hitting a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
. Worn or old tires can cause a crash. If the tread is badly worn, replace them.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes, curbs, etc.
. Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash. Only the dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair, replace, dismount, and mount the tires.
. Do not spin the tires in excess of 56 km/h (35 mph) on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, etc. Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode.
All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with all-season tires. These tires are designed to provide good overall performance on most road surfaces
and weather conditions. Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. Original equipment all-season tires can be identified by the last two characters of this TPC code, which will be "MS."
Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on snow or ice-covered roads is expected. All-season tires provide adequate performance for most winter driving conditions, but they may not offer the same level of traction or performance as winter tires on snow or ice-covered roads. See Winter Tires 0 398.
Winter Tires
This vehicle was not originally equipped with winter tires. Winter tires are designed for increased traction on snow and ice-covered roads. Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on ice or snow covered roads is expected. See your dealer
for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying New Tires 0 415.
With winter tires, there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After changing to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking.
If using winter tires:
. Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions.
. Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range, and speed rating as the original equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If winter tires with a lower speed rating are chosen, never exceed the tire's maximum speed capability.
Low-Profile Tires
If the vehicle has P275/55R20, P285/50R20, or P285/45R22 size tires, they are classified as low-profile tires.
Caution
Low-profile tires are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can occur when coming into contact with road hazards like potholes, or sharp edged objects, or when sliding into a curb. The warranty does not cover this type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure and when possible, avoid contact with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
Vehicle Care 399
All-Terrain Tires
This vehicle may have all-terrain tires. These tires provide good performance on most road surfaces, weather conditions, and for off-road driving. See Off-Road Driving 0 251.
The tread pattern on these tires may wear more quickly than other tires. Consider rotating the tires more frequently than at 12 000 km (7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wear is noted when the tires are inspected. See Tire Inspection 0 411.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall. The examples show a typical passenger and light truck tire sidewall.
400 Vehicle Care
Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire (1) Tire Size : The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the "Tire Size" illustration later in this section for more detail. (2) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.
(3) DOT (Department of Transportation) : The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
DOT Tire Date of Manufacture : The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week (01-52) and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2010 would have a four-digit DOT date of 0310.
(4) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(5) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(6) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) : Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading 0 417.
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. For information on recommended tire pressure see Tire Pressure 0 405 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
(8) Temporary Use Only : Only use a temporary spare tire until the road tire is repaired and replaced. This spare tire should not be driven on over 112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph) when pulling a trailer, with the proper inflation pressure. See Full-Size Spare Tire 0 431.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire (1) Tire Size : The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the "Tire Size" illustration later in this section for more detail.
(2) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.
(3) Dual Tire Maximum Load : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration. For information on recommended tire pressure see Tire Pressure 0 405 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
(4) DOT (Department of Transportation) : The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
Vehicle Care 401
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
DOT Tire Date of Manufacture : The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week (01-52) and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2010 would have a four-digit DOT date of 0310.
(5) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(6) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
402 Vehicle Care
(7) Single Tire Maximum Load : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single. For information on recommended tire pressure see Tire Pressure 0 405 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
Tire Designations
Tire Size The examples show a typical passenger vehicle and light truck tire size.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(2) Tire Width : The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the tire illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide.
(4) Construction Code : A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in inches. (6) Service Description : These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carrying capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire (1) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size mean a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(2) Tire Width : The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item 3 of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide.
(4) Construction Code : A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(6) Load Range : Load Range.
(7) Service Description : The service description indicates the load index and speed rating of a tire. If two numbers are given as in the example, 120/116, then this represents the load index for single versus dual wheel usage (single/dual). The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure : The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch).
Accessory Weight : The combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning.
Vehicle Care 403
Aspect Ratio : The relationship of a tire's height to its width.
Belt : A rubber coated layer of cords between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead : The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure : The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Tire Pressure 0 405.
Curb Weight : The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the
404 Vehicle Care
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings : A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date of production.
GVWR : Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
GAWR FRT : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
GAWR RR : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index : An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating : The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight : The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight : The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
Occupant Distribution : Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure : Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Tire Pressure 0 405 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim : A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall : The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating : An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction : The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread : The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators : Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 414.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards) : A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading 0 417.
Vehicle Care 405
Vehicle Capacity Weight : The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated cargo load. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire : Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard : A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See "Tire and Loading Information Label" under Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively.
406 Vehicle Care
Caution
Neither tire underinflation nor overinflation is good. Underinflated tires, or tires that do not have enough air, can result in:
. Tire overloading and overheating which could lead to a blowout.
. Premature or irregular wear.
. Poor handling. . Reduced fuel economy.
Overinflated tires, or tires that have too much air, can result in:
. Unusual wear. . Poor handling. . Rough ride. . Needless damage from
road hazards.
The Tire and Loading Information label on the vehicle indicates the original equipment tires and the correct cold tire inflation pressures. The recommended pressure is the minimum air pressure needed to support the vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight the vehicle can carry, and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 259. How the vehicle is loaded affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load the vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check the tires once a month or more.
Do not forget the spare tire, if the vehicle has one. See Full-Size Spare Tire 0 431 for additional information.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Proper tire inflation cannot be determined by looking at the tire. Check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold, meaning the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or no more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until the recommended pressure is reached. If the
inflation pressure is high, press on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve to release air.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Put the valve caps back on the valve stems to keep out dirt and moisture and prevent leaks. Use only valve caps designed for the vehicle by GM. TPMS sensors could be damaged and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation
{ Warning
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, puts additional strain on tires. Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive heat buildup and can cause sudden tire failure. This could cause a crash, and
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
you or others could be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed operation. When speed limits and road conditions allow the vehicle to be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high-speed operation, are in excellent condition, and are set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
Vehicles with P275/55R20 or P285/50R20 size tires require inflation pressure adjustment when driving the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tire inflation pressure to 20 kPa (3 psi) above the recommended cold tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Vehicle Care 407
Return the tires to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure when high-speed driving has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259 and Tire Pressure 0 405.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
408 Vehicle Care
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 408. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 482.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument cluster. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
A message to check the pressure in a specific tire displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. If the vehicle has DIC buttons, tire pressure levels can be viewed. For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays, see Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147 and Tire Messages 0 157.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This could be an early indicator that the
air pressure is getting low and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of the original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the tires when they are cold. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259, for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location. Also see Tire Pressure 0 405.
The TPMS can warn about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection 0 411, Tire Rotation 0 412 and Tires 0 397.
Caution
Tire sealant materials are not all the same. A non-approved tire sealant could damage the TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use only
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 409
Caution (Continued)
the GM approved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire pressure warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message also displays. The malfunction light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause these to come on are:
. One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after the road tire
410 Vehicle Care
is replaced and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.
. The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or not completed successfully after rotating the tires. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after successfully completing the sensor matching process. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.
. One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See your dealer for service.
. Replacement tires or wheels do not match the original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended
could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. See Buying New Tires 0 415.
. Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition. See your dealer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message come on and stay on.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. The identification code needs to be matched to a new tire/wheel position after rotating the vehicle's tires or replacing one or more of the TPMS sensors. Also, the TPMS sensor matching process should be performed after replacing a spare tire with a road tire containing the TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off at the next ignition cycle. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a TPMS relearn tool, in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear. See your dealer for service or to purchase a relearn tool. A TPMS relearn tool can also be purchased. See Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor Activation Tool at www.gmtoolsandequipment.com or call 1-800-GM TOOLS (1-800-468-6657).
There are two minutes to match the first tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer, the matching process stops and must be restarted.
The TPMS sensor matching process is:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
3. Uplevel DIC Only: Make sure the Tire Pressure info page option is turned on. The info pages on the DIC can be turned on and off through the Settings menu. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Base Level) 0 145 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 147.
4. If the vehicle has an uplevel DIC, use the DIC controls on the right side of the steering wheel to scroll to the Tire Pressure screen under the DIC info page.
If the vehicle has a base level DIC, use the trip odometer reset stem to scroll to the Tire Pressure screen.
5. If the vehicle has an uplevel
DIC, press and hold the V
(Set/Reset) button located in the center of the DIC controls.
If the vehicle has a base level DIC, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for about five seconds. A message asking if the process should
begin should appear. Select yes and press the trip odometer reset stem to confirm the selection.
The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen.
6. Start with the driver side front tire.
7. Place the relearn tool against the tire sidewall, near the valve stem. Then press the button to activate the TPMS sensor. A horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position.
8. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 7.
9. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 7.
10. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 7. The horn sounds two
Vehicle Care 411
times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off.
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
12. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Tire Inspection
We recommend that the tires, including the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, be inspected for signs of wear or damage at least once a month.
Replace the tire if:
. The indicators at three or more places around the tire can be seen.
412 Vehicle Care
. There is cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber.
. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
. The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
. The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See Maintenance Schedule 0 452.
Tires are rotated to achieve a uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important.
Anytime unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible, check for proper tire inflation pressure, and check for damaged tires or wheels. If the unusual wear continues after the rotation, check the wheel alignment. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 414 and Wheel Replacement 0 418.
Use this rotation pattern when rotating the tires if the vehicle has single rear wheels.
Dual Tire Rotation
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt, or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque after 160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100, 1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. For proper torque and wheel nut tightening information, see "Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire" under Tire Changing 0 422.
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears faster than the inner tire. Tires last longer and wear more evenly if they are rotated. See Tire Inspection 0 411 and Tire Rotation 0 412. Also see Maintenance Schedule 0 452.
{ Warning
If the vehicle is operated with a tire that is underinflated, the tire can overheat. An overheated tire
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) can lose air suddenly or catch fire. You or others could be injured. Properly inflate all tires, including the spare. See Tire Pressure 0 405, for information on proper tire inflation.
Use this rotation pattern when rotating the tires if the vehicle has dual rear wheels (except polished forged aluminum wheels).
Vehicles with polished forged aluminum dual wheels have three unique wheels; a front, a rear outer and a rear inner. These wheels cannot be rotated to another position, however, they can be rotated from left to right to the same position.
Use this rotation pattern when rotating the tires if the vehicle has polished forged aluminum dual rear wheels. The spare wheel can be used in any position in the event of a flat tire, and can be rotated with the rear
Vehicle Care 413
inner wheels. After the flat tire is repaired, if the spare is not on one of the inner rear positions, it must be replaced by the correct wheel in the front or rear outer positions.
When installing dual wheels, check that the vent holes in the inner and outer wheels on each side are lined up.
Adjust the front and rear tires to the recommended inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label after the tires have been rotated. See Tire Pressure 0 405 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
Check that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See "Wheel Nut Torque" under Capacities and Specifications 0 468.
414 Vehicle Care
{ Warning
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.
Lightly coat the inner diameter of the wheel hub opening with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosion or rust build-up. Do not get grease on the flat wheel mounting surface or on the wheel nuts or bolts.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), if the vehicle has one. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 408.
Check that the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, is stored properly. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, tighten the cable. See "Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools" under Tire Changing 0 422.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions affect the wear rate of the tires.
Treadwear indicators are one way to tell when it is time for new tires. Treadwear indicators appear when the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or less of tread remaining. Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators. See Tire Inspection 0 411 and Tire Rotation 0 412 for additional information.
The rubber in tires ages over time. This also applies to the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it is never used. Multiple factors including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance affect how fast aging takes place. GM recommends that tires, including the spare if equipped, be replaced after six years, regardless of tread wear. The tire manufacture date is the last four digits of the DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN) which is molded into one side of the tire sidewall. The first two digits represent the week (01-52) and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2010 would have a four-digit DOT date of 0310.
Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle. Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool, dry, clean area away from direct sunlight to slow aging. This area should be free of grease, gasoline, or other substances that can deteriorate rubber.
Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving. When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for the vehicle. The original equipment tires installed were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. When replacement tires are needed,
GM strongly recommends buying tires with the same TPC Spec rating.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of the vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 399 for additional information.
GM recommends replacing worn tires in complete sets of four (six for dual rear wheels). Uniform tread depth on all tires will help to maintain the performance of the vehicle. Braking and handling performance may be
Vehicle Care 415
adversely affected if all the tires are not replaced at the same time. If proper rotation and maintenance have been done, all four tires (six for dual rear wheels) should wear out at about the same time. See Tire Rotation 0 412 for information on proper tire rotation. However, if it is necessary to replace only one axle set of worn tires, place the new tires on the rear axle (two for single rear wheels, four for dual rear wheels).
{ Warning
Tires could explode during improper service. Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or death. Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires.
416 Vehicle Care
{ Warning
Mixing tires of different sizes, brands, or types may cause loss of control of the vehicle, resulting in a crash or other vehicle damage. Use the correct size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
This vehicle may have a different size spare than the road tires originally installed on the vehicle. When new, the vehicle included a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall diameter as the road tires and wheels, so it is all right to drive on it. The spare tire was developed for use on this vehicle and will not affect vehicle handling.
{ Warning
Using bias-ply tires on the vehicle may cause the wheel rim flanges to develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly and cause a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. Never exceed the winter tires' maximum speed capability when using winter tires with a lower speed rating.
If the vehicle tires must be replaced with a tire that does not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction (radial) as the original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 407.
The Tire and Loading Information label indicates the original equipment tires on the vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259 for the label location and more information about the Tire and Loading Information label.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that are a different size than the original equipment wheels and tires, vehicle performance, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover may be affected. If the vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes, rollover airbags, roll bars, traction control, electronic stability
control, or All-Wheel Drive, the performance of these systems can also be affected.
{ Warning
If different sized wheels are used, there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. This increases the chance of a crash and serious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires 0 415 and Accessories and Modifications 0 352.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter tires, compact spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Vehicle Care 417
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements In Addition To These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
418 Vehicle Care
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels were aligned and balanced at the factory to provide the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing are not necessary on a regular basis. Consider an alignment check if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle is significantly pulling to one side or the other. Some slight pull to the left or right, depending on the crown of the road and/or other road surface variations such as troughs or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
Some aluminum wheels can be repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors with new GM original equipment parts.
{ Warning
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of the vehicle. Tires can lose air, and cause loss of control, causing a crash. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Caution
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt, or wheel nut is replaced on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque after 160,1 600, and 10 000 km (100,1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. For proper torque, see "Wheel Nut Torque" under Capacities and Specifications 0 468.
See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 420 for more information.
Vehicle Care 419
Used Replacement Wheels
{ Warning
Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous. How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. When replacing wheels, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{ Warning
If the vehicle has dual wheels or 265/65R18, P265/65R18, P275/55R20, LT265/70R17, LT265/70R18, LT265/60R20, LT275/65R18, P285/50R20, 285/45R22, or P285/45R22 size tires, do not use tire chains. They can damage the vehicle because there is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
(Continued)
420 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued)
without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the device if it is contacting the vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle's wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the rear tires.
Caution
If the vehicle does not have dual wheels and has a tire size other than 265/65R18, P265/65R18, P275/55R20, LT265/70R17, LT265/70R18, LT265/60R20, LT275/65R18, P285/50R20, 285/45R22, or P285/45R22, use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use chains that are the proper size for the tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on the tires of the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage the vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while driving, especially if the tires are maintained properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if there ever is a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction as used in a skid. Stop pressing the accelerator pedal and steer to straighten the vehicle. It may be very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.
{ Warning
Driving on a flat tire will cause permanent damage to the tire. Re-inflating a tire after it has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat may cause a blowout and a serious crash. Never attempt to re-inflate a tire that has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat. Have your dealer or an authorized tire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon as possible.
{ Warning
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 421
Warning (Continued)
be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place, well off the road, if possible. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers 0 175.
{ Warning
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall causing injury or death. Find a level place to change the tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly. (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
2. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. For four-wheel-drive vehicles, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N (Neutral).
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle.
6. Place wheel blocks, if equipped, on both sides of the tire at the opposite corner of the tire being changed.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2), use the following example as a guide to assist in the placement of the wheel blocks (1), if equipped.
422 Vehicle Care
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
1. Wheel Block (If Equipped) 2. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire.
Crew Cab
1. Wheel Blocks 2. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel
Blocks 3. Tool Kit 4. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit 5. Jack 6. Jack Knob
Regular Cab
1. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks
2. Wheel Blocks 3. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit 4. Tool Kit 5. Jack 6. Jack Knob
Double Cab
1. Wheel Blocks 2. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit 3. Tool Kit 4. Jack 5. Jack Knob
For regular cab models, the equipment you will need is behind the passenger seat. For double and crew cab models, the equipment is on the shelf behind the passenger side second row seat.
1. Turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head to release the jack from its holder.
2. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise to remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer.
3. Turn the wing nut used to retain the storage bag and tools counterclockwise to remove it.
Use the jack handle extensions and the wheel wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
1. Spare Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Down)
2. Tire/Wheel Retainer 3. Hoist Cable 4. Hoist Assembly
Vehicle Care 423
5. Hoist Shaft 6. Jack Handle Extensions 7. Wheel Wrench 8. Spare Tire Lock (If
Equipped) 9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole 10. Hoist End of Extension Tool 1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the ignition key to remove the spare tire lock (8). To remove the spare tire lock, insert the ignition key, turn, and pull straight out.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench (7) and the two jack handle extensions (6), as shown.
424 Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
3. Insert the hoist end (open end) (10) of the extension through the hole (9) in the rear bumper.
Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension (10) connects to the hoist shaft. The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
5. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.
6. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer.
Tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of the wheel along with the cable and spring.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
1. Jack 2. Wheel Blocks 3. Jack Handle 4. Jack Handle Extensions 5. Wheel Wrench
The tools you will be using include the jack (1), the wheel blocks (2), the jack handle (3), the jack handle extensions (4), and the wheel wrench (5).
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 420.
Vehicle Care 425
3. Use the wheel wrench and turn it counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.
2. If the vehicle has wheel nut caps, loosen them by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise.
If the vehicle has a center cap with wheel nut caps, the wheel nut caps are designed to stay with the center cap after they are loosened. Remove the entire center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center cap, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel, and gently pry it out.
Front Position 1500 Models 4. If the flat tire is on the front of
the vehicle (1500 models), position the jack under the bracket attached to the vehicle's frame, behind the flat tire, as shown.
426 Vehicle Care
Front Position All Other Models
If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (all other models), position the jack under the vehicle, as shown.
Rear Position 1500 Models
5. If the flat tire is on the rear, for 1500 models position the jack under the rear axle about 5 cm (2 in) inboard of the shock absorber bracket.
Rear Position All Other Models
For all other models, position the jack under the rear axle between the spring anchor and the shock absorber bracket.
If a snow plow has been added to the front of the vehicle, lower the snow plow fully before raising the vehicle.
Make sure that the jack head is positioned so that the rear axle is resting securely between the grooves that are on the jack head.
{ Warning
Getting under a vehicle when it is lifted on a jack is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ Warning
Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.
6. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well.
Vehicle Care 427
7. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
{ Warning
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel.
9. Install the spare tire.
{ Warning
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
10. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel.
428 Vehicle Care
11. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is held against the hub.
12. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
{ Warning
If wheel studs are damaged, they can break. If all the studs on a wheel broke, the wheel could come off and cause a crash. If any stud is damaged because of a loose-running wheel, it could be that all of the studs are damaged. To be sure, replace all studs on the wheel. If the stud holes in a wheel have become larger, the wheel could collapse in operation. Replace any wheel if its stud holes have become larger or distorted in any way. Inspect hubs and hubpiloted wheels for damage. Because of loose
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
running wheels, piloting pad damage may occur and require replacement of the entire hub, for proper centering of the wheels. When replacing studs, hubs, wheel nuts or wheels, be sure to use GM original equipment parts.
{ Warning
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing. Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications 0 468 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications.
Caution Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications 0 468 for the wheel nut torque specification.
13. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence, as shown, by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
For vehicles with dual wheels, have a technician check the wheel nut tightness of all wheels with a torque wrench after the first 160, 1 600 and 10 000 km (100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi). Repeat this service whenever you have a tire removed or serviced. See Capacities and Specifications 0 468.
When reinstalling the regular wheel and tire, also reinstall either the center cap, or bolt-on hub cap, depending on what the vehicle is equipped with. For center caps, place the cap on the wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel. The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line up the tab on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel. For bolt-on hub caps, align the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and then tighten by hand. Then use the wheel wrench to tighten.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
{ Warning
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.
Caution
Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up can damage the wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired as soon as possible.
Vehicle Care 429
Caution The tire hoist can be damaged if there is no tension on the cable when using it. To have the necessary tension, the spare or road tire and wheel assembly must be installed on the tire hoist to use it. Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier.
1. Spare Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Down)
2. Tire/Wheel Retainer
430 Vehicle Care
3. Hoist Cable 4. Hoist Assembly 5. Hoist Shaft 6. Jack Handle Extensions 7. Wheel Wrench 8. Spare Tire Lock (If
Equipped) 9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole 10. Hoist End of Extension Tool
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear.
2. Pull the cable and spring through the center of the wheel. Tilt the wheel retainer plate down and through the center wheel.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel.
3. Attach the wheel wrench (7) and extensions (6) together, as shown.
4. Insert the hoist end (10) through the hole (9) in the rear bumper and onto the hoist shaft. Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench.
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to turn the tire. If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock, if the vehicle has one.
To store the jack and jack tools:
1. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks
2. Wheel Blocks 3. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit 4. Wheel Wrench and
Extensions 5. Tool Bag 6. Jack Mounting Bracket 7. Jack 8. Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks 1. Put the tools (4) in the tool bag (5) and place them in the retaining bracket (3). 2. Tighten down the wing nut (3).
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (2) and jack (7) together with the wing nut (1) and retaining bolt (8).
4. Position the jack (7) in the mounting bracket (6). Position the holes in the base of the jack (7) onto the pin in the mounting bracket (6).
5. Return them to their original location in the vehicle. See "Removing the Spare Tire and Tools."
Full-Size Spare Tire
If this vehicle came with a full-size spare tire, it was fully inflated when new, however, it can lose air over time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. See Tire Pressure 0 405 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 259. For instructions on how to remove, install, or store a spare tire, see Tire Changing 0 422.
If equipped with a temporary use full-size spare tire, it is indicated on the tire sidewall. See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 399. This spare tire should not be driven on over
Vehicle Care 431
112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph) when pulling a trailer, at the proper inflation pressure. Repair and replace the road tire as soon as it is convenient, and stow the spare tire for future use.
Caution
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and a different size spare tire is installed, do not drive in four-wheel drive until the flat tire is repaired and/or replaced. The vehicle could be damaged and the repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Never use four-wheel drive when a different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the road tires originally installed on the vehicle. This spare tire was developed for use on this vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it. If the vehicle has
432 Vehicle Care
four-wheel drive and a different size spare tire is installed, drive only in two-wheel drive.
After installing the spare tire on the vehicle, stop as soon as possible and check that the spare tire is correctly inflated.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced and installed back onto the vehicle as soon as possible so the spare tire will be available in case it is needed again.
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together. If the vehicle has a spare tire that does not match the original road tires and wheels in size and type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
Jump Starting
Jump Starting - North America
For an eAssist vehicle, see the Silverado/Sierra supplement.
For more information about the vehicle battery, see Battery - North America 0 378.
If the vehicle's battery (or batteries) has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{ Warning
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
the State of California to cause cancer. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.
See California Proposition 65 Warning 0 351.
{ Warning
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:
. They contain acid that can burn you.
. They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
. They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.
Caution
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Caution
If the other vehicle does not have a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use a vehicle that has a 12-volt system with a negative ground for jump starting.
2. If you have a vehicle with a diesel engine with two batteries, you should know before you begin that, especially in cold weather, you
may not be able to get enough power from a single battery in another vehicle to start your diesel engine. If your vehicle has more than one battery, using the battery that is closer to the starter will reduce electrical resistance. This is located on the passenger side, in the rear of the engine compartment.
3. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause an unwanted ground connection. You would not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put the automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in Neutral before setting the parking brake. If you have a
Vehicle Care 433
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear, not in N (Neutral).
Caution
If any accessories are left on or plugged in during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Whenever possible, turn off or unplug all accessories on either vehicle when jump starting.
4. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the accessory power outlets. Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio!
5. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive (+) and negative () terminal locations on that vehicle.
434 Vehicle Care
The positive (+) terminal is under a red plastic cover at the positive battery post. To uncover the positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic cover.
For more information on the location of the remote positive (+) and remote negative () terminals, see Engine Compartment Overview 0 354.
{ Warning
An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
{ Warning
Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.
{ Warning
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.
6. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative () will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative () or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative () cable to the negative () terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step.
10. Connect the other end of the negative () cable.
Vehicle Care 435
5.3L Shown, 4.3L, 6.0L, 6.2L, and 6.6L Similar
7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery.
8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Connect the black negative () cable to the negative () terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.
4.3L Shown, 5.3L and 6.2L Similar
To the metal bracket that is bolted to the engine and supports the resonator, on the vehicle with the dead battery.
6.0L
To the generator bracket, on the vehicle with the dead battery.
436 Vehicle Care
6.6L To the negative () post on
the auxiliary battery, on the vehicle with the dead battery. 11. Start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
Caution
If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
Reverse the sequence exactly when removing the jumper cables.
After starting the disabled vehicle and removing the jumper cables, allow it to idle for several minutes.
Towing the Vehicle
Caution
Incorrectly towing a disabled vehicle may cause damage. The damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not lash or hook to suspension components. Use the proper straps around the tires to secure the vehicle.
Use only a flatbed tow truck for towing a disabled vehicle. Never use a sling type lift or damage will occur. Use ramps to help reduce approach angles if necessary. A towed vehicle should have its drive wheels off the ground.
Consult a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle, such as a motor home. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are dinghy and dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels on a dolly.
Follow the tow vehicle manufacturer's instructions. See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations.
Caution
Use of a shield mounted in front of the vehicle grille could restrict airflow and cause damage to the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
(Continued)
Caution (Continued) warranty. If using a shield, only use one that attaches to the towing vehicle. Dinghy Towing Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Caution If the two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 437 Caution (Continued)
components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground. Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drive vehicles with a two-speed transfer case that have an N (Neutral) and a
Four-Wheel Drive Low (4 (n) setting.
438 Vehicle Care
{ Warning
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). You or others could be injured. Set the parking brake before shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral).
To dinghy tow:
1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow vehicle, facing forward and on a level surface.
2. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle.
3. Apply the parking brake and start the engine.
4. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See "Shifting into N (Neutral)" under Four-Wheel Drive 0 284. Check that the vehicle is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to R (Reverse) and then to D
(Drive). There should be no movement of the vehicle while shifting. 5. Turn the engine off.
Caution
Failure to disconnect the negative battery cable or to have it contact the terminals can cause damage to the vehicle.
6. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and secure the nut and bolt. Cover the negative battery post with a non-conductive material to prevent any contact with the negative battery terminal.
7. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
Caution
If the steering column is locked, vehicle damage may occur.
8. Move the steering wheel to make sure the steering column is unlocked.
9. With a foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Keep the ignition key in the towed vehicle in ACC/ ACCESSORY to prevent the steering column from locking.
Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle
Before disconnecting the towed vehicle:
1. Park on a level surface.
2. Set the parking brake, then shift the transmission to P (Park), and move the ignition key to OFF.
3. Connect the battery.
4. Apply the brake pedal.
5. Turn the ignition on with the engine off. Shift the transfer case out of N (Neutral) to Two-Wheel Drive High. See "Shifting out of N (Neutral)" under Four-Wheel Drive 0 284.
See your dealer if the transfer case cannot be shifted out of N (Neutral).
6. Check that the vehicle is in Two-Wheel Drive High by shifting the transmission to R (Reverse) and then to D (Drive). There should be movement of the vehicle while shifting.
7. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn off the ignition.
8. Disconnect the vehicle from the tow vehicle.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Reset any lost presets.
The outside temperature display will default to 0 °C (32 ° F) but will reset with normal usage.
Dolly Towing Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the Ground) Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Caution If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
Vehicle Care 439
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed.
To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle, the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly. See "Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)" later in this section.
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the Ground) Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
440 Vehicle Care
To dolly tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from the front:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Set the parking brake.
{ Warning
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). You or others could be injured. Set the parking brake before shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral).
5. Use a clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer's instructions.
7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See "Shifting into N (Neutral)" under Four-Wheel Drive 0 284 for the proper procedure.
8. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground) Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear: 1. Drive the rear wheels onto the
dolly. 2. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake 0 293. 3. Put the transmission in
P (Park). 4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's instructions.
5. Use a clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
{ Warning
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). You or others could be injured. Set the parking brake before shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral).
To dolly tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
1. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
2. Set the parking brake. See Parking Brake 0 293.
3. Put the transmission in P (Park).
4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer's instructions.
5. Use a clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position.
6. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See "Shifting into N (Neutral)" under Four-Wheel Drive 0 284 for the proper procedure.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Vehicle Care 441
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Locks
Locks are lubricated at the factory. Use a de-icing agent only when absolutely necessary, and have the locks greased after using. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish, wash it often and out of direct sunlight.
Caution
Do not use petroleum-based, acidic, or abrasive cleaning agents as they can damage the vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic parts. If damage occurs, it would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from
(Continued)
442 Vehicle Care
Caution (Continued)
your dealer. Follow all manufacturer directions regarding correct product usage, necessary safety precautions, and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product.
Caution
Avoid using high-pressure washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Caution
Do not power wash any component under the hood that
has this e symbol.
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
This could cause damage that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
If using an automatic car wash, follow with the car wash instructions. The windshield wiper and rear window wiper, if equipped, must be off. Remove any accessories that may be damaged or interfere with the car wash equipment.
See Power Assist Steps 0 42 for cleaning information.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after, to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Finish Care
Application of aftermarket clearcoat sealant/wax materials is not recommended. If painted surfaces are damaged, see your dealer to have the damage assessed and repaired. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Occasional hand waxing or mild polishing should be done to remove residue from the paint finish. See your dealer for approved cleaning products.
Do not apply waxes or polishes to uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals, simulated wood, or flat paint as damage can occur.
Caution
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/ clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle.
To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Moldings
Caution
Failure to clean and protect the bright metal moldings can result in a hazy white finish or pitting. This damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
The bright metal moldings on the vehicle are aluminum, chrome or stainless steel. To prevent damage always follow these cleaning instructions:
. Be sure the molding is cool to the touch before applying any cleaning solution.
. Use only approved cleaning solutions for aluminum, chrome or stainless steel. Some cleaners are highly acidic or contain alkaline substances and can damage the moldings.
. Always dilute a concentrated cleaner according to the manufacturer's instructions.
. Do not use cleaners that are not intended for automotive use.
. Use a nonabrasive wax on the vehicle after washing to protect and extend the molding finish.
Spray-In Bedliner Care
A spray-in bedliner is a permanent coating that bonds to the truck bed and cannot be removed. Promptly
Vehicle Care 443
rinse the bedliner surface following a chemical spill to avoid permanent damage.
Spray-in bedliners can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty hauling, and hard water stains. Clean it periodically by washing off the loose dirt and using a mild detergent. To restore the original appearance, apply the bedliner conditioner available through your dealer.
Caution
Using silicone-based products may damage the bedliner, reduce the slip-resistant texture, and attract dirt.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Lenses, Emblems, Decals and Stripes
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth, and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems, decals and stripes. Follow instructions under "Washing the Vehicle" previously in this section.
444 Vehicle Care
Lamp covers are made of plastic, and some have a UV protective coating. Do not clean or wipe them while they are dry.
Do not use any of the following on lamp covers:
. Abrasive or caustic agents. . Washer fluids and other cleaning
agents in higher concentrations than suggested by the manufacturer.
. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or other harsh cleaners.
. Ice scrapers or other hard items. . Aftermarket appearance caps or
covers while the lamps are illuminated, due to excessive heat generated.
Caution
Failure to clean lamps properly can cause damage to the lamp cover that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Caution
Using wax on low gloss black finish stripes can increase the gloss level and create a non-uniform finish. Clean low gloss stripes with soap and water only.
Air Intakes
Clear debris from the air intakes, between the hood and windshield, when washing the vehicle.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean rubber blades using a lint-free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Damage can be caused by extreme dusty conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.
Weatherstrips
Apply Dielectric silicone grease on weatherstrips to make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips once a year. Hot, dry climates may require more frequent application. Black marks from rubber material on painted surfaces can be removed by rubbing with a clean cloth. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462.
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to clean the tires.
Caution
Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle.
Wheels and Trim -- Aluminum or Chrome
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water to clean the wheels. After rinsing thoroughly with clean water, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied.
Caution
Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium, calcium, or sodium chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. Always wash the chrome with soap and water after exposure.
Caution
To avoid surface damage, do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Use only approved cleaners. Also, never drive a vehicle with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Damage could occur and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Brake System
Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect all other brake parts.
Vehicle Care 445
Steering, Suspension, and Chassis Components
Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear at least once a year.
Inspect power steering for proper attachment, connections, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Visually check constant velocity joint boots and axle seals for leaks.
1500 Series vehicles, at least every other oil change lubricate the outer tie rod ends.
2500/3500 Series vehicles, at least every other engine oil change lubricate the upper and lower control arm ball joints. Control arm ball joints on 1500 series vehicles are maintenance-free.
2500/3500 Series vehicles equipped with steering linkage, at least every other engine oil change lubricate the tie rod ball joints, idler arm pivot shaft bearings, idler arm socket, and pitman arm socket.
446 Vehicle Care
Caution
Lubrication of applicable steering/ suspension points should not be done unless the temperature is 12 °C (10 °F) or higher, or damage could result.
For an eAssist vehicle, see the Silverado/Sierra eAssist supplement.
Body Component Lubrication
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the steel fuel door hinge unless the components are plastic. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Underbody Maintenance
At least twice a year, spring and fall, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to thoroughly clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. If equipped
with power assist steps, extend them and then use a high pressure wash to clean all joints and gaps.
Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or axles and should be replaced.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty.
Finish Damage
Quickly repair minor chips and scratches with touch-up materials available from your dealer to avoid
corrosion. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted vehicle surfaces causing blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Refer to "Finish Care" previously in this section.
Interior Care
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Immediately remove any soils. Newspapers or dark garments can transfer color to the vehicle's interior.
Use a soft bristle brush to remove dust from knobs and crevices on the instrument cluster. Using a mild soap solution, immediately remove hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect repellent from all interior surfaces or permanent damage may result.
Use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned to prevent permanent damage. Apply cleaners directly to the cleaning cloth. Do not spray cleaners on any switches or controls. Remove cleaners quickly.
Before using cleaners, read and follow to all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning the interior, open the doors and windows to get proper ventilation.
To prevent damage, do not clean the interior using the following cleaners or techniques:
. Never use a razor or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface.
. Never use a brush with stiff bristles.
. Never rub any surface aggressively or with too much pressure.
. Do not use laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. For liquid cleaners, use approximately 20 drops per 3.8 L (1 gal) of water.
A concentrated soap solution will create streaks and attract dirt. Do not use solutions that contain strong or caustic soap.
. Do not heavily saturate the upholstery when cleaning.
. Do not use solvents or cleaners containing solvents.
Interior Glass
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric dampened with water. Wipe droplets left behind with a clean dry cloth. If necessary, use a commercial glass cleaner after cleaning with plain water.
Caution
To prevent scratching, never use abrasive cleaners on automotive glass. Abrasive cleaners or aggressive cleaning may damage the rear window defogger.
Cleaning the windshield with water during the first three to six months of ownership will reduce tendency to fog.
Vehicle Care 447
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with water and mild soap.
Coated Moldings
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
. When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.
Fabric/Carpet/Suede
Start by vacuuming the surface using a soft brush attachment. If a rotating vacuum brush attachment is being used, only use it on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible:
. Gently blot liquids with a paper towel. Continue blotting until no more soil can be removed.
. For solid soils, remove as much as possible prior to vacuuming.
448 Vehicle Care
To clean:
1. Saturate a clean, lint-free colorfast cloth with water. Microfiber cloth is recommended to prevent lint transfer to the fabric or carpet.
2. Remove excess moisture by gently wringing until water does not drip from the cleaning cloth.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Rotate the cleaning cloth to a clean area frequently to prevent forcing the soil in to the fabric.
4. Continue gently rubbing the soiled area until there is no longer any color transfer from the soil to the cleaning cloth.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution followed only by plain water.
If the soil is not completely removed, it may be necessary to use a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small hidden area for colorfastness before using a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. If ring formation occurs, clean the entire fabric or carpet.
After cleaning use a paper towel to blot excess moisture.
Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Vehicle Information and Radio Displays
Use a microfiber cloth on high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays. First, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that can scratch the surface. Then gently clean by rubbing with a microfiber cloth. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use.
Caution
Do not attach a device with a suction cup to the display. This may cause damage and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Low Gloss Paint Surfaces and Natural Open Pore Wood Surfaces
Use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For a more thorough cleaning, use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with a mild soap solution.
Caution
Soaking or saturating leather, especially perforated leather, as well as other interior surfaces, may cause permanent damage.
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
Wipe excess moisture from these surfaces after cleaning and allow them to dry naturally. Never use heat, steam, or spot removers. Do not use cleaners that contain silicone or wax-based products. Cleaners containing these solvents can permanently change the appearance and feel of leather or soft trim, and are not recommended.
Do not use cleaners that increase gloss, especially on the instrument panel. Reflected glare can decrease visibility through the windshield under certain conditions.
Caution
Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ Warning
Do not bleach or dye safety belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse safety belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.
Vehicle Care 449
Floor Mats
{ Warning
If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.
Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage:
. The original equipment floor mats were designed for your vehicle. If the floor mats need replacing, it is recommended that GM certified floor mats be purchased. Non-GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the pedals. Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals.
450 Vehicle Care
. Do not use a floor mat if the vehicle is not equipped with a floor mat retainer on the driver side floor.
. Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over.
. Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on top of another.
Removing and Replacing the Floor Mats
Pull up on the rear of the driver side floor mat to unlock each retainer and remove.
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat retainer openings over the carpet retainers and snapping into position.
Make sure the floor mat is properly secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.
Service and Maintenance
General Information General Information . . . . . . . . . . 451
Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 452
Special Application Services Special Application Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Additional Maintenance and Care
Additional Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Maintenance Records Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 466
Service and Maintenance 451
General Information
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. For diesel engine vehicles, see "Maintenance Schedule" in the Duramax diesel supplement.
Your vehicle is an important investment. This section describes the required maintenance for the vehicle. Follow this schedule to help protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance. It may also help to maintain the value of the vehicle if it is sold. It is the responsibility of the owner to have all required maintenance performed.
Your dealer has trained technicians who can perform required maintenance using genuine replacement parts. They have up-to-date tools and equipment for fast and accurate diagnostics. Many dealers have extended evening and Saturday hours, courtesy transportation, and online scheduling to assist with service needs.
Your dealer recognizes the importance of providing competitively priced maintenance and repair services. With trained technicians, the dealer is the place for routine maintenance such as oil changes and tire rotations and additional maintenance items like tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper blades.
Caution
Damage caused by improper maintenance can lead to costly repairs and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are important to keep the vehicle in good working condition.
The Tire Rotation and Required Services are the responsibility of the vehicle owner. It is recommended to have your dealer perform these services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
452 Service and Maintenance
keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces vehicle emissions.
Because of the way people use vehicles, maintenance needs vary. There may need to be more frequent checks and services.
Normal Service
All maintenance services, including those listed under Additional Required Services, are for vehicles that:
. Carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 259.
. Are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.
. Use the recommended fuel. See Fuel 0 311.
Severe Service
In addition to the normal service schedule, some vehicles require service more often. Severe service is for vehicles that are:
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather.
. Mainly driven in hilly or mountainous terrain.
. Frequently towing a trailer.
. Used for high-speed or competitive driving.
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery service.
{ Warning
Performing maintenance work can be dangerous and can cause serious injury. Perform maintenance work only if the required information, proper tools, and equipment are available. If they are not, see your dealer to have a trained technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work 0 353.
Maintenance Schedule
Owner Checks and Services
At Each Fuel Stop
. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil 0 359.
Once a Month
. Check the tire inflation pressures. See Tire Pressure 0 405.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See Tire Inspection 0 411.
. Check the windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid 0 375.
Engine Oil Change
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, have the engine oil and filter changed within the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate the need for vehicle service for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once
a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your trained dealer technician can perform this work. If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the last service. Reset the oil life system when the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System 0 362.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter removes dust, pollen, and other airborne irritants from outside air that is pulled into the vehicle. The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance. Inspect the passenger compartment air filter every 36 000 km/ 22,500 miles or two years, whichever comes first. Replace if necessary. More frequent replacement may be needed if the vehicle is driven in areas with heavy traffic, areas with poor air quality, or areas with high dust levels.
Service and Maintenance 453
Replacement may also be needed if there is a reduction in air flow, excessive window fogging, or odors.
Tire Rotation and Required Services Every 12 000 km/ 7,500 mi
Rotate the tires, if recommended for the vehicle, and perform the following services. See Tire Rotation 0 412.
. Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. If needed, change engine oil and filter, and reset oil life system. See Engine Oil 0 359 and Engine Oil Life System 0 362.
. Check engine coolant level. See Engine Coolant 0 369.
. Check windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid 0 375.
. Visually inspect windshield wiper blades for wear, cracking, or contamination. See Exterior Care 0 441. Replace worn or damaged wiper blades. See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 384.
. Check tire inflation pressures. See Tire Pressure 0 405.
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire Inspection 0 411.
. Visually check for fluid leaks.
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/ Filter 0 367.
. Inspect brake system. See Exterior Care 0 441.
454 Service and Maintenance
. Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear. See Exterior Care 0 441. Lubricate the suspension and steering components at least every other oil change. (If equipped with grease fittings)
. Check restraint system components. See Safety System Check 0 72.
. Visually inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
. Visually inspect exhaust system and nearby heat shields for loose or damaged parts.
. Lubricate body components. See Exterior Care 0 441.
. Check starter switch. See Starter Switch Check 0 383.
. Check automatic transmission shift lock control function. See Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check 0 383.
. Check ignition transmission lock. See Ignition Transmission Lock Check 0 383.
. Check parking brake and automatic transmission park mechanism. See Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check 0 384.
. Check accelerator pedal for damage, high effort, or binding. Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage. Check the hold open ability of the strut. See your dealer if service is required.
. Inspect sunroof track and seal, if equipped. See Sunroof 0 54.
. Verify spare tire key lock operation and lubricate as needed. See Tire Changing 0 422.
Additional Required Services
Service and Maintenance 455
12 000 km/7,500 mi 24 000 km/15,000 mi 36 000 km/22,500 mi 48 000 km/30,000 mi 60 000 km/37,500 mi 72 000 km/45,000 mi 84 000 km/52,500 mi 96 000 km/60,000 mi 108 000 km/67,500 mi 120 000 km/75,000 mi 132 000 km/82,500 mi 144 000 km/90,000 mi 156 000 km/97,500 mi 168 000 km/105,000 mi 180 000 km/112,500 mi 192 000 km/120,000 mi 204 000 km/127,500 mi 216 000 km/135,000 mi 228 000 km/142,500 mi 240 000 km/150,000 mi
Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services. Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2)
Inspect evaporative control system. (3)
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.
For GVW under 3 900 kg (8,600 lb), change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4)
For GVW over 3 900 kg (8,600 lb), change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4)
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5)
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6)
Replace brake fluid. (7)
Replace clutch fluid. (8)
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@ @
456 Service and Maintenance
Footnotes -- Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Normal
(1) Or every two years, whichever comes first. More frequent replacement may be needed if the vehicle is driven in areas with heavy traffic, poor air quality, areas with high dust levels or are sensitive to environmental allergens. Filter replacement may also be needed if you notice reduced airflow, windows fogging up, or odors. Your local GM Service location can help you determine when it is the right time to replace your filter.
(2) Or every four years, whichever comes first. If driving in dusty conditions, inspect the filter at each oil change or more often as needed.
(3) Visually check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper attachment, connection, routing, and condition.
(4) Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or drive axles and should be replaced.
(5) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System 0 368.
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying, excessive cracking, or damage; replace, if needed.
(7) Replace brake fluid every five years. See Brake Fluid 0 377.
(8) Replace clutch fluid every three years. See Hydraulic Clutch 0 366.
Service and Maintenance 457
12 000 km/7,500 mi 24 000 km/15,000 mi 36 000 km/22,500 mi 48 000 km/30,000 mi 60 000 km/37,500 mi 72 000 km/45,000 mi 84 000 km/52,500 mi 96 000 km/60,000 mi 108 000 km/67,500 mi 120 000 km/75,000 mi 132 000 km/82,500 mi 144 000 km/90,000 mi 156 000 km/97,500 mi 168 000 km/105,000 mi 180 000 km/112,500 mi 192 000 km/120,000 mi 204 000 km/127,500 mi 216 000 km/135,000 mi 228 000 km/142,500 mi 240 000 km/150,000 mi
Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services. Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2)
Inspect evaporative control system. (3)
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
For GVW under 3 900 kg (8,600 lb), change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4)
For GVW over 3 900 kg (8,600 lb), change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4)
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5)
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6)
Replace brake fluid. (7)
Replace clutch fluid. (8)
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@ @
458 Service and Maintenance
Footnotes -- Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Severe
(1) Or every two years, whichever comes first. More frequent replacement may be needed if the vehicle is driven in areas with heavy traffic, poor air quality, areas with high dust levels or are sensitive to environmental allergens. Filter replacement may also be needed if you notice reduced airflow, windows fogging up, or odors. Your local GM Service location can help you determine when it is the right time to replace your filter.
(2) Or every four years, whichever comes first. If driving in dusty conditions, inspect the filter at each oil change or more often as needed.
(3) Visually check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper attachment, connection, routing, and condition.
(4) Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or drive axles and should be replaced.
(5) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System 0 368.
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying, excessive cracking, or damage; replace, if needed.
(7) Replace brake fluid every five years. See Brake Fluid 0 377.
(8) Replace clutch fluid every three years. See Hydraulic Clutch 0 366.
Special Application Services
. Vehicles with Dual Wheels: Check dual wheel nut torque at 160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100, 1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. Repeat this service whenever a tire/wheel is serviced or removed.
. Severe Commercial Use Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis components every oil change.
. Have underbody flushing service performed. See "Underbody Maintenance" in Exterior Care 0 441.
Additional Maintenance and Care
Your vehicle is an important investment and caring for it properly may help to avoid future costly repairs. To maintain vehicle performance, additional maintenance services may be required.
It is recommended that your dealer perform these services -- their trained dealer technicians know your vehicle best. Your dealer can also perform a thorough assessment with a multi-point inspection to recommend when your vehicle may need attention.
The following list is intended to explain the services and conditions to look for that may indicate services are required.
Service and Maintenance 459
Battery
The 12-volt battery supplies power to start the engine and operate any additional electrical accessories.
. To avoid break-down or failure to start the vehicle, maintain a battery with full cranking power.
. Trained dealer technicians have the diagnostic equipment to test the battery and ensure that the connections and cables are corrosion-free.
Belts
. Belts may need replacing if they squeak or show signs of cracking or splitting.
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment to inspect the belts and recommend adjustment or replacement when necessary.
Brakes
Brakes stop the vehicle and are crucial to safe driving.
. Signs of brake wear may include chirping, grinding, or squealing noises, or difficulty stopping.
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment to inspect the brakes and recommend quality parts engineered for the vehicle.
Fluids
Proper fluid levels and approved fluids protect the vehicle's systems and components. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 462 for GM approved fluids.
. Engine oil and windshield washer fluid levels should be checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may come on to indicate that fluids may be low and need to be filled.
460 Service and Maintenance
Hoses
Hoses transport fluids and should be regularly inspected to ensure that there are no cracks or leaks. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can inspect the hoses and advise if replacement is needed.
Lamps
Properly working headlamps, taillamps, and brake lamps are important to see and be seen on the road.
. Signs that the headlamps need attention include dimming, failure to light, cracking, or damage. The brake lamps need to be checked periodically to ensure that they light when braking.
. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can check the lamps and note any concerns.
Shocks and Struts
Shocks and struts help aid in control for a smoother ride.
. Signs of wear may include steering wheel vibration, bounce/ sway while braking, longer stopping distance, or uneven tire wear.
. As part of the multi-point inspection, trained dealer technicians can visually inspect the shocks and struts for signs of leaking, blown seals, or damage, and can advise when service is needed.
Tires
Tires need to be properly inflated, rotated, and balanced. Maintaining the tires can save money and fuel, and can reduce the risk of tire failure.
. Signs that the tires need to be replaced include three or more visible treadwear indicators; cord or fabric showing through the rubber; cracks or cuts in the tread or sidewall; or a bulge or split in the tire.
. Trained dealer technicians can inspect and recommend the right tires. Your dealer can also provide tire/wheel balancing services to ensure smooth vehicle operation at all speeds. Your dealer sells and services name brand tires.
Vehicle Care
To help keep the vehicle looking like new, vehicle care products are available from your dealer. For information on how to clean and protect the vehicle's interior and exterior, see Interior Care 0 446 and Exterior Care 0 441.
Wheel Alignment
Wheel alignment is critical for ensuring that the tires deliver optimal wear and performance.
. Signs that the alignment may need to be adjusted include pulling, improper vehicle handling, or unusual tire wear.
Service and Maintenance 461
. Your dealer has the required equipment to ensure proper wheel alignment.
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the best viewing, keep the windshield clean and clear.
. Signs of damage include scratches, cracks, and chips.
. Trained dealer technicians can inspect the windshield and recommend proper replacement if needed.
Wiper Blades
Wiper blades need to be cleaned and kept in good condition to provide a clear view.
. Signs of wear include streaking, skipping across the windshield, and worn or split rubber.
. Trained dealer technicians can check the wiper blades and replace them when needed.
462 Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or an Allison Transmission, see "Recommended Fluids and Lubricants" in the Duramax diesel supplement.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage
Automatic Transmission (6-Speed Transmission)
Automatic Transmission (8-Speed Transmission)
Fluid/Lubricant DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
DEXRON®-HP Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19331925, in Canada 19300537).
Chassis Lubrication Engine Coolant
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® coolant. See Engine Coolant 0 369.
Engine Oil
Engine oil meeting the dexos1TM specification of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 359.
Floor Shift Linkage
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category LB or GC-LB.
Service and Maintenance 463
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Front Axle Driveshaft Splines (All 4WD Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 19257121, in 1500/2500/3500 Series) and Rear Axle Canada 19257122).
Driveshaft Splines (All 2WD 1500 Series with Automatic Transmission)
Front Axle (Four-Wheel Drive)
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, in Canada 89021678).
Hydraulic Brake System
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in Canada 19299819).
Hydraulic Clutch System
DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299570).
Hydraulic Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 19329450, in Canada 19329451). (2500/3500 Series Only)
Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate Hinge Canada 10953474). and Linkage, Fuel Door Hinge, Tailgate
Handle Pivot Points, Hinges, Latch Bolt, and Linkage
Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 93436060).
Rear Axle (1500 Series)
SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, in Canada 19300458).
Rear Axle (2500/3500 Series)
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, in Canada 89021678).
464 Service and Maintenance
Usage Rear Driveline Center Spline
(Two-Piece Driveshaft) Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive)
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Weatherstrip Squeaks
Windshield Washer
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in Canada 10953437).
Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection requirements.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
22845992
A3181C
Oil Filter
4.3L V6
19330000
PF63E
5.3L V8; 6.2L V8
19330000
PF63E
6.0L V8
19303975
PF48E
Part Passenger Compartment Air Filter Spark Plugs
4.3L V6 5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 6.0L V8 Wiper Blades Driver Side 55 cm (21.7 in) Passenger Side 55 cm (21.7 in)
Service and Maintenance 465
GM Part Number 23281440
ACDelco Part Number CF188
12622441 12622441 12621258
41114 41114 41110
22754397
-
22754397
-
466 Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Date
Odometer Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Technical Data 467
Technical Data
Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 471
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See "Engine Specifications" under
Capacities and Specifications 0 for the vehicle's engine code.
468
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove box, has the following information: . Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). . Model designation. . Paint information. . Production options and special
equipment.
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
468 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
0. Lubricants 462
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Cooling System 4.3L V6 1500 Series 5.3L V8 1500 Series 6.0L V8 2500 Series and 3500 Series 6.2L V8 1500 Series
Engine Oil with Filter 4.3L V6 5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 6.0L V8
Capacities
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
15.1 L 15.7 L 16.1 L 15.7 L
15.9 qt 16.6 qt 17.0 qt 16.6 qt
5.7 L 7.6 L 5.7 L
6.0 qt 8.0 qt 6.0 qt
Technical Data 469
Fuel Tank
Application
Capacities
Metric
English
1500 Series Standard and Short Box
98.4 L
26.0 gal
1500 Series Long Box
128.7 L
34.0 gal
2500 Series and 3500 Series Standard Box
136.3 L
36.0 gal
2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box
136.3 L
36.0 gal
3500 Series Chassis Cab
240.4 L
63.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab Front Tank
89.0 L
23.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab Rear Tank (if equipped)
151.4 L
40.0 gal
Transfer Case Fluid
1.5 L
1.6 qt
Wheel Nut Torque
190 Y
140 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
470 Technical Data
4.3L V6 (LV3) 4.3L V6 (LV1) 5.3L V8 (L83) 6.0L V8 (L96) 6.2L V8 (L86)
Engine
Engine Specifications VIN Code H P C G J
Spark Plug Gap
0.951.10 mm (0.037 0.043 in)
0.951.10 mm (0.037 0.043 in)
0.951.10 mm (0.037 0.043 in)
0.951.10 mm (0.037 0.043 in)
0.951.10 mm (0.037 0.043 in)
Engine Drive Belt Routing
Technical Data 471
V6 Engines
6.0L V8 Engine
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.
5.3L and 6.2L V8 Engines
472 Customer Information
Customer Information
Customer Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 475 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 475 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 479 Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 484 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 485
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by your dealer's sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE : Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the owner of your dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO : If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by your dealership without further help, in the U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of Canada Customer Care Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance representative:
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.
. Dealership name and location.
. Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
Customer Information 473
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE -- U.S. Owners : Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. 3033 Wilson Boulevard Suite 600 Arlington, VA 22201
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 http://www.bbb.org/council/ programs-services/ dispute-handling-and-resolution/ bbb-auto-line
This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
474 Customer Information
STEP THREE -- Canadian Owners : In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, General Motors of Canada Company wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Company has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors Customer Care Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program c/o Customer Care Centre General Motors of Canada Company Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to:
United States and Puerto Rico
Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232-5170 www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020 1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone Devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-243-8872
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada
General Motors of Canada Company Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 www.gm.ca
1-800-263-3777 (English) 1-800-263-7854 (French) 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-2438. TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Online Owner Center
Online Owner Experience (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com
The Chevrolet online owner experience allows interaction with Chevrolet and keeps important vehicle-specific information in one place.
Membership Benefits
E : Download owner manuals and
view vehicle-specific how-to videos.
G : View maintenance schedules,
alerts, and OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Information. Schedule service appointments.
I : View and print dealer-recorded
service records and self-recorded service records.
D : Select a preferred dealer and
view locations, maps, phone numbers, and hours.
Customer Information 475
r : Track your vehicle's warranty
information.
J : View active recalls by Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 0 467.
H : View GM Card, SiriusXM
Satellite radio (if equipped), and OnStar account information (if equipped).
F : Chat with online help
representatives.
See my.chevrolet.com to register your vehicle.
Chevrolet Owner Centre (Canada) chevroletowner.ca
Visit the Chevrolet Owner Centre:
. Chat live with online help representatives.
. Locate owner resources such as lease-end, financing, and warranty information.
476 Customer Information
. Retrieve your favorite articles, quizzes, tips, and multimedia galleries organized into the Featured Articles and Auto Care Sections.
. Download owner manuals. . Find the
Chevrolet-recommended maintenance services.
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program
This program is available to qualified applicants for cost reimbursement of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for the vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/ scooter lift for the vehicle.
For more information on the limited offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text Telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.ca or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call 1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)
For Canadian-purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following information ready:
. Your name, home address, and home telephone number.
. Telephone number of your location.
. Location of the vehicle.
. Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle.
. Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.
. Description of the problem.
Coverage
Services are provided for the duration of the vehicle's powertrain warranty.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. General Motors North America and Chevrolet reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification.
General Motors North America and Chevrolet reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
Services Provided
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
. Lock-Out Service: Service to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar. For security reasons, the driver must present identification before this service is given.
. Emergency Tow from a Public Road or Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven. Assistance is not given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
Customer Information 477
. Flat Tire Change: Service to change a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to jump start a dead battery.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty event, incidental expenses may be reimbursed within the Powertrain warranty period. Items considered are reasonable and customary hotel, meals, rental car, or a vehicle being delivered back to the customer, up to 805 km (500 mi).
Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance
. Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
. Legal fines.
. Mounting, dismounting, or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Service is not provided if a vehicle is in an area that is not accessible to the service vehicle or is not a regularly traveled or maintained public road, which includes ice and winter roads. Off-road use is not covered.
Services Specific to Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement is up to 7 liters. If available, diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service.
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must be over 150 km from where your trip was started to qualify. Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair orders are required. Once authorization has been
478 Customer Information
received, the Roadside Assistance advisor will help to make arrangements and explain how to receive payment.
. Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be provided right away, the Roadside Assistance advisor may give permission to get local emergency road service. You will receive payment, up to $100, after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be covered, however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When the vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising the service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety related. If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If your dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same-day repair.
Courtesy Transportation Program
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada), extended powertrain, and/or hybrid-specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.
Several Courtesy Transportation options are available to assist in reducing inconvenience when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled "Limited Warranty and Owner Assistance Information" furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to do so, your dealer may offer the following transportation options:
Shuttle Service
This includes one-way or round-trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of your dealer's area.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If overnight warranty repairs are needed, and public transportation is used, the expense must be supported by original receipts and within the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. If U.S. customers arrange their own transportation, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
For an overnight warranty repair, the dealer may provide an available courtesy rental vehicle or provide for reimbursement of a rental vehicle. Reimbursement is limited and must be supported by original receipts as well as a signed and completed rental agreement and meet state/ provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements,
Customer Information 479
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Additional fees such as fuel usage charges, taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair are also your responsibility.
It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Contact your dealer for specific availability.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If the vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish the vehicle resale value, and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which the vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are the best choice to ensure that the vehicle's designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain the vehicle's originally designed appearance and safety
480 Customer Information
performance; however, the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for the vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/ corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts is not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs. Your dealer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and state-of-the-art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable equipment.
Insuring the Vehicle
Protect your investment in the GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to the GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs through the use of aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you ensure that the vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing company may require you to have insurance that ensures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read the lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of the lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move the vehicle only if its position puts you in danger, or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
Give only the necessary information to police and other parties involved in the crash.
For emergency towing see Roadside Assistance Program 0 476.
Gather the following information:
. Driver name, address, and telephone number.
. Driver license number.
. Owner name, address, and telephone number.
. Vehicle license plate number.
. Vehicle make, model, and model year.
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
. Insurance company and policy number.
. General description of the damage to the other vehicle.
Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality replacement parts. See "Collision Parts" earlier in this section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? 0 79.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process
In the event that the vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take the vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Customer Information 481
Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by the GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with the repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember, if the vehicle is leased, you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance company is paying for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company's collision policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as the cost stays within reasonable limits.
Service Publications Ordering Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on the engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of the vehicle.
482 Customer Information
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The Owner Manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and Warranty Manual.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 $40.00 (U.S.) plus handling and shipping fees.
Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and shipping fees.
Current and Past Models
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 Monday Friday 8:00 AM 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Or write to:
Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, MI 48170
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Radio Frequency Statement
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio frequency that complies with Part 15/Part 18 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/216/220/251/310, ICES001.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
Customer Information 483
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that the vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, and notify General Motors of Canada Company. Call Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 80 rue Noel Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
484 Customer Information
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Company Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
The vehicle has a number of computers that record information about the vehicle's performance and how it is driven. For example, the vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy them in a crash, and, if equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help the dealer technician service the vehicle. Some modules may also store data about how the vehicle is operated, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may retain personal preferences, such as radio presets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/ or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Customer Information 485
GM will not access these data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request by police or similar government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as required by law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If the vehicle is equipped with OnStar® and has an active subscription, additional data may be collected through the OnStar system. This includes information about the vehicle's operation; collisions involving the vehicle; the use of the vehicle and its features; and, in certain situations, the location and approximate GPS speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement on the OnStar website.
See OnStar Additional Information 0 491.
Infotainment System
If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system as part of the infotainment system, use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. See the infotainment manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions.
486 OnStar
OnStar
OnStar Overview OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
OnStar Services Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
OnStar Additional Information OnStar Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
OnStar Overview
= Voice Command Button Q Blue OnStar Button > Red Emergency Button
This vehicle may be equipped with a comprehensive, in-vehicle system that can connect to an OnStar Advisor for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Connections, and Diagnostics Services. OnStar services may require a paid subscription and data plan. OnStar requires the vehicle battery and electrical system, cellular service, and GPS satellite signals to be available and operating. OnStar acts as a link to existing emergency service providers. OnStar may collect information about you and your vehicle, including location information. See OnStar User
Terms, Privacy Statement, and Software Terms for more details including system limitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
The OnStar system status light is next to the OnStar buttons. If the status light is:
. Solid Green: System is ready.
. Flashing Green: On a call.
. Red: Indicates a problem.
. Off: System is active. Press Q
twice to speak with an OnStar Advisor.
Press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an Advisor.
Press = to:
. Make a call, end a call, or answer an incoming call.
. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling voice commands.
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice commands.
. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fi® hotspot name or SSID and password, if equipped.
Press Q to connect to an
Advisor to:
. Verify account information or update contact information.
. Get driving directions.
. Receive a Diagnostic check of the vehicle's key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
. Manage Wi-Fi Settings, if equipped.
Press > to get a priority connection
to an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:
. Get help for an emergency.
. Be a Good Samaritan or respond to an AMBER Alert.
. Get assistance in severe weather or other crisis situations and find evacuation routes.
OnStar Services
Emergency
Emergency Services require an active, OnStar service plan (excludes Basic Plan). With Automatic Crash Response, built-in sensors can automatically alert a specially trained OnStar Advisor who is immediately connected in to the vehicle to help.
Press > for a priority connection to
an OnStar Advisor who can contact emergency service providers, direct them to your exact location, and relay important information.
With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially trained Advisors are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to provide a central point of contact, assistance, and information during a crisis.
With Roadside Assistance, Advisors can locate a nearby service provider to help with a flat tire, a battery jump, or an empty gas tank.
OnStar 487
Security
If equipped, OnStar provides these services:
. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance, OnStar Advisors can use GPS to pinpoint the vehicle and help authorities quickly recover it.
. With Remote Ignition BlockTM, if equipped, OnStar can block the engine from being restarted.
. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown®, if equipped, OnStar can work with law enforcement to gradually slow the vehicle down.
Theft Alarm Notification
If equipped, if the doors are locked and the vehicle alarm sounds, a notification by text, e-mail, or phone call will be sent. If the vehicle is stolen, an OnStar Advisor can work with authorities to recover the vehicle.
488 OnStar
Navigation
OnStar navigation requires a specific OnStar service plan.
Press Q to receive Turn-by-Turn
directions or have them sent to the vehicle's navigation screen, if equipped.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation
1. Press Q to connect to an
Advisor.
2. Request directions to be downloaded to the vehicle.
3. Follow the voice-guided commands.
Using Voice Commands During a Planned Route
Cancel Route
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone. 2. Say "Cancel route." System
responds: "Do you want to cancel directions?"
3. Say "Yes." System responds: "OK, request completed, thank you, goodbye."
Route Preview
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Route preview." System responds with the next three maneuvers.
Repeat
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Repeat." System responds with the last direction given, then responds with "OnStar ready," then a tone.
Get My Destination
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Get my destination." System responds with the address and distance to the destination, then responds with "OnStar ready," then a tone.
Send Destination to Vehicle
Subscribers can have directions sent to the vehicle's navigation screen, if equipped.
Press Q, then ask the Advisor to
download directions to the vehicle's navigation system, if equipped. After the call ends, the navigation screen will provide prompts to begin driving directions. Routes that are sent to the navigation screen can only be canceled through the navigation system.
See www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Connections
The following OnStar services help with staying connected.
For coverage maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Ensuring Security
. Change the default passwords for the Wi-Fi hotspot and RemoteLink mobile application. Make these passwords different
from each other and use a combination of letters, numbers, and symbols to increase the security.
. Change the default name of the SSID (Service Set Identifier). This is your network's name that is visible to other wireless devices. Choose a unique name and avoid family names or vehicle descriptions.
OnStar Wi-Fi® Hotspot (If Equipped)
The vehicle may have a built-in Wi-Fi hotspot that provides access to the Internet and web content at 4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobile devices can be connected. A data plan is required. Use the in-vehicle controls only when it is safe to do so.
1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspot
information, press =, wait for
the prompt, then say "Wi-Fi settings." On some vehicles, touch Wi-Fi Settings on the screen.
2. The Wi-Fi settings will display the Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID), password, and on some vehicles, the connection type (no Internet connection, 3G, 4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality (poor, good, excellent).
3. To change the SSID or
password, press Q or call
1-888-4ONSTAR to connect with an Advisor.
After initial set-up, your vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot will connect automatically to your mobile devices. Manage data usage by turning Wi-Fi on or off on your mobile device, using the RemoteLink mobile app, or by contacting an OnStar Advisor.
OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App (If Equipped)
Download the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app to select Apple® iOS, AndroidTM, BlackBerry®, or Windows® mobile devices.
OnStar 489
OnStar Subscribers can access the following services from a mobile device:
. Remotely start/stop the vehicle, if factory-equipped.
. Lock/unlock doors, if equipped with automatic locks.
. Activate the horn and lamps.
. Check the vehicle's fuel level, oil life, or tire pressure, if factory-equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System.
. Send directions to the vehicle.
. Locate the vehicle on a map (U.S. market only).
. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot on/off, manage settings, and monitor data consumption, if equipped.
For OnStar RemoteLink information and compatibility, see www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
490 OnStar
Remote Services
Contact an OnStar Advisor to unlock the doors or sound the horn and flash the lamps.
OnStar AtYourService
OnStar Advisors can provide offers from restaurants and retailers on your route, help locate hotels, or book a room. These services vary by market.
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
Make and receive calls with the built-in wireless calling service, which requires available minutes.
Make a Call
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready."
2. Say "Call." System responds: "Call. Please say the name or number to call."
3. Say the entire number without pausing, including a "1" and the area code. System responds: "OK, calling."
Calling 911 Emergency
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready."
2. Say "Call." System responds: "Call. Please say the name or number to call."
3. Say "911" without pausing. System responds: "911."
4. Say "Call." System responds: "OK, dialing 911."
Retrieve My Number
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready."
2. Say "My number." System responds: "Your OnStar Hands-Free Calling number is," then says the number.
End a Call
Press =. System responds: "Call
ended."
Verify Minutes and Expiration
Press = and say "Minutes" then
"Verify" to check how many minutes remain and their expiration date.
Diagnostics
Advanced Diagnostics provides a status of the vehicle's key systems with a monthly e-mail, or by
pressing Q. If equipped, Diagnostic
Alerts can be received in real-time via e-mail or text. The Proactive Alerts feature (if available) can help predict and alert of potential upcoming maintenance issues with select components on the vehicle, before they become a problem.
OnStar can also monitor and report tire pressure, if the vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
OnStar Additional Information
In-Vehicle Audio Messages
Audio messages may play important information at the following times:
. Prior to vehicle purchase.
Press Q to set up an account.
. With the OnStar Basic Plan, every 60 days.
. After change in ownership and at 90 days.
Transferring Service
Press Q to request account transfer
eligibility information. The Advisor can cancel or change account information.
Selling/Transferring the Vehicle
Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) immediately to terminate your OnStar services if the vehicle is disposed of, sold, transferred, or if the lease ends.
Reactivation for Subsequent Owners
Press Q and follow the prompts to
speak to an Advisor as soon as possible. The Advisor will update vehicle records and explain OnStar service options.
How OnStar Service Works
Automatic Crash Response, Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Advanced Vehicle Diagnostics, Remote Services, Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are available everywhere or on all vehicles. For more information, a full description of OnStar services, system limitations, and OnStar User Terms, Privacy Statement, and Software Terms:
. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
OnStar 491
. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
. Press Q to speak with an
Advisor.
OnStar services cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area. The wireless service provider must also have coverage, network capacity, reception, and technology compatible with OnStar services. Service involving location information about the vehicle cannot work unless GPS signals are available, unobstructed, and compatible with the OnStar hardware. OnStar services may not work if the OnStar equipment is not properly installed or it has not been properly maintained. If equipment or software is added, connected, or modified, OnStar services may not work. Other problems beyond the control of OnStar -- such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather, electrical system design and architecture of the vehicle, damage
492 OnStar
to the vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone network congestion or jamming -- may prevent service. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 482.
Services for People with Disabilities
Advisors provide services to help Subscribers with physical disabilities and medical conditions.
Press Q to help:
. Locate a gas station with an attendant to pump gas.
. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc., that meets accessibility needs.
. Provide directions to the closest hospital or pharmacy in urgent situations.
TTY Users
OnStar has the ability to communicate to deaf, hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired customers while in the vehicle. The available dealer-installed TTY system can provide in-vehicle
access to all OnStar services, except Virtual Advisor and OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
OnStar Personal Identification Number (PIN)
A PIN is needed to access some OnStar services. The PIN will need to be changed the first time when speaking with an Advisor. To change the OnStar PIN, contact an
OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or
calling 1-888-4ONSTAR.
Warranty
OnStar equipment may be warranted as part of the vehicle warranty.
Languages
The vehicle can be programmed to respond in multiple languages.
Press Q and ask for an Advisor.
Advisors are available in English, Spanish, and French. Available languages may vary by country.
Potential Issues
OnStar cannot perform Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the vehicle has been off continuously for 10 days without an ignition cycle. If the vehicle has not been started for five days, OnStar can contact Roadside Assistance or a locksmith to help gain access to the vehicle.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
. Obstruction of the GPS can occur in a large city with tall buildings; in parking garages; around airports; in tunnels and underpasses; or in an area with very dense trees. If GPS signals are not available, the OnStar system should still operate to call OnStar. However, OnStar could have difficulty identifying the exact location.
. In emergency situations, OnStar can use the last stored GPS location to send to emergency responders.
A temporary loss of GPS can cause loss of the ability to send a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The Advisor may give a verbal route or may ask for a call back after the vehicle is driven into an open area.
Cellular and GPS Antennas
Cellular reception is required for OnStar to send remote signals to the vehicle. Do not place items over or near the antenna to prevent blocking cellular and GPS signal reception.
Unable to Connect to OnStar Message
If there is limited cellular coverage or the cellular network has reached maximum capacity, this message
may come on. Press Q to try the
call again or try again after driving a few miles into another cellular area.
Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar services require a vehicle electrical system, wireless service, and GPS satellite technologies to be available and operating for features
to function properly. These systems may not operate if the battery is discharged or disconnected.
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The OnStar system is integrated into the electrical architecture of the vehicle. Do not add any electrical equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 345. Added electrical equipment may interfere with the operation of the OnStar system and cause it to not operate.
Vehicle Software Updates
OnStar or GM may remotely deliver software updates or changes to the vehicle without further notice or consent. These updates or changes may enhance or maintain safety, security, or the operation of the vehicle or the vehicle systems. Software updates or changes may affect or erase data or settings that are stored in the vehicle, such as OnStar Hands-Free Calling name tags, saved navigation destinations, or pre-set radio stations. Neither OnStar nor GM is responsible for any affected or erased data or
OnStar 493
settings. These updates or changes may also collect personal information. Such collection is described in the OnStar privacy statement or separately disclosed at the time of installation. These updates or changes may also cause a system to automatically communicate with GM servers to collect information about vehicle system status, identify whether updates or changes are available, or deliver updates or changes. An active OnStar agreement constitutes consent to these software updates or changes and agreement that either OnStar or GM may remotely deliver them to the vehicle.
Privacy
The complete OnStar Privacy Statement may be found at www.onstar.com (U.S.), or www.onstar.ca (Canada). We recommend that you review it. If you have any questions, call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
or press Q to speak with an
Advisor. Users of wireless communications are cautioned that
494 OnStar
the privacy of any information sent via wireless cellular communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept or access transmissions and private communications without consent.
OnStar - Software Acknowledgements
Certain OnStar components include libcurl and unzip software and other third party software. Below are the notices and licenses associated with libcurl and unzip and for other third party software please see http://www.lg.com/global/support/ opensource/index and https://www.onstar.com/us/en/ support/getdocuments.html
libcurl:
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS," WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
unzip:
This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Info-ZIP copyright and license. The definitive version of this document should be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ license.html indefinitely.
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All rights reserved.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Info-ZIP" is defined as the following set of individuals:
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich Wales, Mike White.
This software is provided "as is," without warranty of any kind, express or implied. In no event shall Info-ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of conditions.
2. Redistributions in binary form (compiled executables) must reproduce the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of conditions in documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. The sole exception
to this condition is redistribution of a standard UnZipSFX binary (including SFXWiz) as part of a self-extracting archive; that is permitted without inclusion of this license, as long as the normal SFX banner has not been removed from the binary or disabled.
3. Altered versionsincluding, but not limited to, ports to new operating systems, existing ports with new graphical interfaces, and dynamic, shared, or static library versionsmust be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. Such altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info-ZIP releasesincluding, but not limited to, labeling of the altered versions with the names "Info-ZIP" (or any variation thereof, including, but not limited to, different capitalizations), "Pocket UnZip," "WiZ" or "MacZip" without the explicit permission
OnStar 495
of Info-ZIP. Such altered versions are further prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use the names "Info-ZIP," "Zip," "UnZip," "UnZipSFX," "WiZ," "Pocket UnZip," "Pocket Zip," and "MacZip" for its own source and binary releases.
496 Index
Index
A Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Active Fuel Management® . . . . . . 275 Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 345 Adding a Snow Plow or
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Additional Information
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Agreements
Trademarks and License . . . . . 231 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 367 Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Passenger Sensing System . . . .82
Airbag System (cont'd) What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .75
Airbags Adding Equipment to the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Passenger Status Indicator . . . 137 Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Servicing Airbag-Equipped Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Alarm Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 191 Antenna
Fixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 292
Antilock Brake System (ABS) (cont'd) Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Appearance Care Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Assistance Systems for Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . . 302
Audio Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 182
Audio Players CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Automatic Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Forward Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . 363, 366
Automatic Transmission Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Automatic Transmission (cont'd) Shift Lock Control Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 176
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Avoiding Untrusted Media
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
B
Battery
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Battery - North America . . . .378, 432
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 384
Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Bluetooth
Overview . . . . . . . .
216, 217,
221, 226
Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Brake
Pedal and Adjustable
Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . 140
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Index 497
Brakes (cont'd) Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Automatic Forward . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 267 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps, and Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
498 Index
C Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 California
Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .351, 378, 432 Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2 Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Carbon Monoxide Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 3 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 116 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Charging Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 138 Check
Ignition Transmission Lock . . . 383 Malfunction Indicator
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children . . . . . 90 Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 106 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Cleaning Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237, 238 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . 237, 238 Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 238 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 479 Compartments Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Connections OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Traction and Electronic Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Control Light Hill Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Engine Temperature Gauge . . 133 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 481
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
D Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 479 Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 3 Data Collection
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 485 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 484 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Diagnostics OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 471 Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . 301 Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 147 Driving Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 304
Driving (cont'd) Characteristics and Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . .31 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 256 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 258 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Dual Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
E E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 395 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Index 499
Emergency OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Check and Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 354 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Cooling System Messages . . . 152 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 132 Overheated Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 277 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 484
500 Index
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 171 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 173
F Fan
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Features
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Filter,
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 175 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 FlexFuel
E85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 117 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 363, 366
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Four-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Fluid (cont'd) Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Forward Automatic Braking . . . . . 306 Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . .284, 379 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . . 141 Frequency Statement
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Front Fog Lamp
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . 63 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 144 Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . 275
Fuel (cont'd) Requirements, California . . . . . 312 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 395
G Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 132 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 451 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
General Information (cont'd) Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
H Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 175 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 144 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 173 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 145 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Heated and Ventilated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Heater
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Heating and Air
Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237, 238 High Voltage Devices and
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . 407 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 256 Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . 297 Hill Descent Control Light . . . . . . . 141 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . 294 Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186, 188 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
I Idle System
Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Index 501
Indicator Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Instrument Panel
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 50 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
J Jack
Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Jump Starting - North
America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
K Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . . 153 Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . .36 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
L Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 399 Lamps
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
502 Index
Lamps (cont'd) Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 174 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . 138 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Lane Departure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . 309 Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . 142 Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 LATCH System
Replacing Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
LATCH, Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Light
Hill Decent Control . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Lighting Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 177 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 140 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 173 Lane Departure Warning . . . . . . 142 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 134 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . 143 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 144 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
M Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Maintenance and Care
Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 452
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 138 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Media
Avoiding Untrusted Devices . . 196 Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . 152 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Object Detection System . . . . . 153 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . . 154 Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Messages (cont'd) Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Mirrors Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 50 Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
N Navigation
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . 382
Index 503
O Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Oil Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 362 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . 132 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 88 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 475 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 OnStar® Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 488 OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Operating Mode Overheated Engine
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
504 Index
Operation Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Ordering Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . 481
Outlets Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . 374
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 184
P Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 384 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 275 Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Parking or Backing Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 302 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Passenger Sensing System . . . . . 82
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . . 352
Personalization
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Phone
Apple CarPlay and
Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Bluetooth . . . . . . . .
216, 217,
221, 226
Pickup Conversion to
Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Port
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 201
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 271
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . 71
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 484
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . 478
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . .351, 378, 432
R Radio Frequency Statement . . . . 482 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 191 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 65 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . 302 Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Recognition Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Records Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 437 Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Replacement
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 88 Replacing LATCH System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government . . . . . . . . 483 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Restraints Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Ride Control Systems Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Roads Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Roof Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 471 Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
S Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .73 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .71 Safety Defects Reporting Canadian Government . . . . . . . . 483 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 478
Index 505
Seats Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Heated and Ventilated Front . . . . 63 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . .59 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .59 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 65 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Securing Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 106
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 238 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 353 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 466 Maintenance, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
506 Index
Service (cont'd) Parts Identification Label . . . . . 467 Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 478
Services Special Application . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Special Application Services . . . . 458 Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Steering System Messages . . . . . 156 Steps
Power Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 115 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Switches Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 System Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 485
System (cont'd) Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Systems Driver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
T Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 475 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 45
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Tires (cont'd) Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Pressure Monitor Operation . . 408 Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 407 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Terminology and Definitions . . 403 Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 418 When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 315 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 315 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 437 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 344 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Traction (cont'd) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Trademarks and License Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . 344 Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . 363, 366 Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Truck-Camper Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Turn Signal Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Index 507
U Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 417 Universal Remote System . . . . . . 168
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Updates Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199, 201 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
V Vehicle
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Identification Number (VIN) . . . 467 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . . 159 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 142 Vehicle Care Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
508 Index
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Voltage Devices and Wiring . . . . 389 Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
W Warning
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . 307 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Warnings Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance . . 418 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 94 Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 384 Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Wiring, High Voltage Devices . . . 389
Mac OS X 10.11.6 Quartz PDFContext